% 



3 ^ 



t 



<qj ^- 



IibrarToTcongress. i 




UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. 






■^^,,oIl*^^^G^-^ 






1% 






.n-^iir- 



^rt^ 



WiMi 







r 1 



3t^ ) 



"«t» 



\ 



AMERICAN RESORTS; 



-WITH- 



Notes Upon Their Climate. 



l/ BY 

BUSHROD W. JAMES. A. M.. M. 1)., 



VOFCO/V3^ 



Member of the American Association for the Advancement of Science ; 
The American Public Health Association ; The Pennsylvania His- 
torical Society ; The Franklin Institute, and The Academy 
of Natural Sciences, Philadelphia ; The Society 
of Alaskan Natural History and 
Ethnology, Sitka, Alaska ; 
etc., etc., etc. 



WITH A TRANSLATION FROM THE GERMAN BY MR. S. KAUFFMANN OF THOSE 

CHAPTERS OF "DIE KLIMATE DER ERDE," WRITTEN BY DR -\ 

WOEIKOF, OF ST. PETERSBURG, RUSSIA, THAT RELATE TO 

NORTH AND SOUTH AMERICA AND THE ISLANDS 

AND OCEANS CONTIGUOUS THERETO. 



Intended for invalids and those who desire to preserve good health in a 
suitable climate. 



PHILADELPHIA and LONDON 

1889. 

F. A. DAVIS. 



PHILADELPHIA, U.S.A.: 
1231 Filbert Street. 

SAN FRANCISCO, U. S. A.: 
427 Sutter Street. 



LONDON, ENG. : 
139-143 O-XFORD Street W. 

NEW YORK, U.S.A.: 
45 E. Twelfth Street. 



Copyrighted 1889 
By F. A. Davis. 



CONTENTS. 



Preface, 



PAGE. 



2 



CHAPTER I. 

MEDICAL CLIMATOLOGY. 

Introduction— Definitions of Climate — Elements of Climate — Modifying 
Influences — Atmospheric Changes — Temperature — Moisture — Sun- 
hght — Rainfall — Air Pressure — Electricitj- — Soil — Configuration of 
the Ground — Forests — Latitude — Altitude — Prevailing Winds— In- 
fluence of Ocean Currents — Islands — Climate of the Western Conti- 
nent — Climatic Resources of the United States — Artificial Climate — 
Climate as a Remedy, 9 

CHAPTER II. 

BENEFITS AND DANGERS OF HEALTH RESORTS. 

Dependent upon Individual Peculiarities — General Beneficial Condi- 
tions — Importance of Residence in a Suitable Climate — Individuali- 
zation of Climatic Prescriptions — Suitable Surroundings — Congenial 
Company — Mental Impressions — Advantages of American Health 
Resorts, 19 

CHAPTER III. 

SEA-SIDE RESORTS. 

Their Attractions — They Afford a Variety for Either Winter or Summer 
Residence — Brief References to the Atlantic Sea-coast Resorts — 
Those on the Gulf of Mexico — Those on the Pacific Coast — Locali- 
ties on Puget Sound — Places in Alaska, 24 

CHAPTER IV. 

FRESH-WATER RESORTS. 

Lakes of New England— Lake Regions of New York and New Jersey — 

Thousand Islands — Lake Ontario — Niagara Falls — Lake Erie — Lake 

• Huron — Lake Michigan — Lake Superior — Lakes of the Northwest — 

California Mountain Lakes — Great Salt Lake— Lakes of Florida, . 57 

(3) 



CHAPTER V. 

MOUNTAIN RESORTS. 
Climate of High Altitudes— The White Mountains — The Green Moun- 
tains — The Adirondacks — The Catskills — The Alleghanies — The 
Rocky Mountains — The Sierra Nevadas, 83 

CHAPTER VI. 

TRIPS UPON OCEAN, LAKE AND RIVER. 
Benefits of the Sea Air — British Maritime Provinces — The Bermudas — 
The West Indies — Alaska — The Sandwich Islands — The Great 
Lakes— The St. Lawrence River — The Hudson River — The Missis- 
sippi River — The Ohio River — The Columbia River, 100 

CHAPTER VII. 

MINERAL SPRINGS. 
Medicinal Value Known to the Ancients — Climate of the Locality — 

Classification — Mineral Springs of the United States — Therapeutics, 127 

CHAPTER VIII. 

SUMMER RESORTS. 
Location and Latitude— Resorts of British America — Alaska — The At- 
lantic Sea-Board — The Great Lakes — The Great Northwest — The 
Pacific Coast, 136 

CHAPTER IX. 

WINTER RESORTS. 
Intermediate Resorts — Resorts of Minnesota — Southern States — South- 
ern California, 145 

CHAPTER X. 

THERAPEUTICS. 
EflTect of Climate — Out-door Exercise — Pulmonary Phthisis — Catarrhal 
Affections of the Respiratory Organs — Asthma — Hay Fever — Neu- 
rasthenia — Debility— Rheumatism — Bright's Disease — Hepatic Dis- 
orders — Scrofulous Dyscrasia — Malarial Aftections, 155 

CHAPTER XI. 

MEXICO AND SOUTH AMERICA. - 
Mexico — Natural and Historical Attractions — Climate— Places of Re- 
sort — South America — Mountainous Resorts, 170 

CHAPTER XII. 

Translation from "Die Klimate der Erde " — Climate of the High 
North— The Middle Latitudes of North America— Tropical America 
— South America— The Atlantic Ocean, 174 



LIST OF AUTHORS CONSULTED. 



The author is indebted for the help he has received from re- 
ference to various works bearing upon the subject, as follows : 

" Mineral Springs of the United States and Canada," by George 
E. Walton, M. D. ; " Health Resorts at Home and Abroad," by 
M. Charteris, M. D. ; " Wintering Abroad," by Dr. Alfred Drysdale; 
" Health and Health Resorts," by John Wilson, M. D. ; " The Prin- 
cipal Health Resorts of Europe and Africa," by Thomas M. Madden, 
M. D. ; "Appleton's, General Guide to the United States and 
Canada," " Hand-Book of Summer Resorts," " Hand-Book of Winter 
Resorts," "Guide to Mexico;" Swinton's "Geography, Physical, 
Political and Commercial ;" " Health Resorts of Colorado Springs 
and Manitou," by S. Edwin Solly, M. R. C. S.; " Rocky Mountain 
Health Resorts," by Charles Denison, M. D. ; "Facts and Fallacies 
in Climatology," by H. E. Beebe, M. D.; "Weather," by the Hon. 
Ralph Abercromby; "The Traveller's Guide," by J. Disturnell ; 
" Compressed Air Below the Sea- Level," by Walter Lindley, M D. 
—Medical Record, September i, 1888; "Where Shall We Spend 
Our Summer?" by Gen. A. W. Greely, Scribner's Magadiie, April, 
1888; "Where Shall We Spend Our Winter?" by Gen. A. W. 
Greely, Scribner's Magadnc, November, 1888; "Winter in the 
Adirondacks," by H. W. Mabie, Scribners Magazine, December, 
1888; "The Domain of Climatology and Demography as Depend- 
encies of Medicine," by Albert L. Gihon, M. D. — Transactions of 
the Ninth International Medical Congress, Vol. V. ; "The Meteo- 
rological Elements of Climate and Their Effects upon the Human 
Organism," by George H. Roh6, M. D. — Transactions, Volume V.; 
"The Importance of the Study of Climatology in Connection with 
the Science of Medicine," by William Thornton Parker, M. D. — 
Transactions, Volume V. ; " The Preferable Climate for Phthisis," 
by Charles Denison, M. D. — Transactions, Volume V.; "House 
Atmospheres or Artificial Climates," by P. H. Bryce, M. D. — 
Transactions, Volume v.; "Ground Air in its Climatological and 
Hygienic Relations," by John D. Macdonald, M. D. — Transactions, 
Volume V. ; " Some Remarks on the Climate of the Swiss Alps," 
by A. T. Wise, M. D. — Transactions, Volume V. ; " The Ocean as 
a Health- Resort," by William S. Wilson, L. R. C P. 



PREFACE. 



The longer the author is engaged in professional work as a 
physician, the more he is impressed with the importance of the 
residence of invalids in a suitable climate as an almost indis- 
pensable factor in the treatment, prevention and cure of many 
forms of disease. 

No attempt has been made in this work to describe the trans- 
Atlantic health stations, as our own countrj- affords sufficient 
variety and range of climatic conditions to meet the needs of any 
case where change of climate is desired. It seems scarcely neces- 
sary for Americans to seek relief at the resorts of the humid 
Riviera, such as Nice, Mentone, San Remo, Santa Monica, Cannes, 
and similar places ; or at the more questionable places of health 
resort, such as Rome, Naples, Algiers, or Palermo, which afford 
the excitements and unsanitary accompaniments of city life ; when 
in their own land they may enjoy equally good or even superior cli- 
mates at the health resorts of Florida, Southern California and other 
places, of kindred clime. Truly, the climate of the health 
stations located amid the Alpine heights or the fastnesses of the 
Pyrenees offers many attractions, but that of the resorts in the 
Colorado Rocky Mountains compares very favorably in every 
respect. Many of the famous European spas are but prototypes 
of more or less noted mineral springs in this country, numbered 
here by hundreds. 

(7) 



8 

If we, as a people, would more generally seek health in our 
own sanitaria, and our medical men would encourage their 
patients so to do, the value of these places of retreat for health would 
soon be appreciated and their fame become widespread. For the 
American, the health stations in his own land are preferable in 
that while he is seeking benefit in a change of climate, he is at 
home among his own countrymen, familiar customs, language 
and diet, a truly inestimable advantage in many cases of sickness. 

This book does not aim at a scientific consideration of the 
subject of climatology, but has been prepared in the hope that it 
may be of some practical service to the numerous health seekers 
in search of information regarding our climate and health resorts. 

The author here desires to express his appreciation of the 
assistance he has received in his work ; he extends his sincere 
thanks to Mary E. Grady, M. D., who has helped in collecting 
material for the book, and preparing it for the press ; to S. 
Lilienthal, M. D., of San Francisco, and Mr. D. C. Walsh, of the Penn- 
sylvania Railroad, for material for reference; to Mr. Charles R. 
Deacon, of the American Biographical Publishing Company, who 
has shown such kindly interest and business energy in the 
publication of the book; and to Mr. S. Kaufifmann, the translator of 
those chapters of Dr. A. Woeikof's " Die Klimate der Erde," that 
treat of the climates of the western continent. This translation 
was not an easy task, as the original work was written by Dr 
Woeikof, of St. Petersburg, in Russian, his native tongue, and 
translated by him into the German language, consequently the 
rendering of the English was somewhat difficult and tedious. 

The Author. 



CHAPTER I. 

MEDICAL CLIMATOLOGY. 

Introduction — Definitions of Climate — Elements of Climate — Modifying Influ- 
ences—Atmospheric Changes — Temperature— Moisture — Sunlight— Rainfall 
— Air Pressure — Electricity — Soil— Configuration of the Ground — Forests — 
Latitude — Altitude — Prevailing Winds — Influence of Ocean Currents— Is- 
lands — Climate of the Western Continent — Climatic Resources of the United 
States — Artificial Climate — Climate as a Remedy. 

Though home has its endearments a summer or a 
winter tour has its kindred joys. 

In consequence of the improvements in railroad speed 
and comfort, the American people are rapidly becoming 
the greatest travellers in the world. They fly over and 
about their own country from place to place and their 
families go from resort to resort, and this tide of travel is 
annually assuming greater proportions. A natural desire 
for the preservation and restoration of health is the main 
propelling influence at work as the cause of this general 
search after a new climate or new scenes, differing in char- 
acter from those of the usual place of residence. 

What, then, we may inquire, is this subtle combination 
of influences known by the name of climate ? 

CLIMATOLOGY. 

Montesquieu spoke most truly when he said : " The 
empire of climate is the most powerful of all empires ; " 
capable, as it is, of making and molding its subjects 
physically and mentally, of bestowing life or death upon 
them ; the majority of whom have but little knowledge of 

(9) 



10 

the climatic influences of earth, air, and sea by which 
they are governed. Yet there is nothing mysterious 
about these telluric, aerial, cosmic and maritime manifesta- 
tions ; they are simply the result of the workings of cer- 
tain natural laws which may be, at least in part, known and 
understood. 

Numerous attempts have been made to define the term 
climate satisfactorily, but this is a somewhat difficult under- 
taking-. Walsh defines it as: "The sum total of the 
extrinsic physical influences amid which we breathe." 
Bell as : " The sum of the influences exerted upon the 
atmosphere by temperature, pressure, soil, proximity to the 
sea, lakes, rivers, plains, forests, mountains, light, ozone, 
electrical conditions, and doubtless, some other conditions 
of which we have no knowledge." De Chaumont as : 
" One of the most complex influences in existence. It is 
made up of questions of temperature, humidity, pressure, 
velocity and direction of the wind, nature of the soil, con- 
formation of the surface, presence or absence and kind of 
vegetation, proximity to the sea or great continents, elec- 
trical influences, presence or absence of malaria, and 
probably scores of other things of an obscure or unknown 
character. Its variation is practically infinite, and the 
integration of its many factors well nigh impossible." 

From these definitions we gather that the elements of 
climate are air, temperature, humidity, barometric pressure, 
light, electricity, soil, and configuration of the ground ; 
and that the climate of any given place is modified by its 
latitude, altitude, proximity to or distance from the sea 
or large bodies of water, length of the day, direction of 
the prevailing winds, and nature of the vegetation. 

The most important element in climate is the air, that 
circumambient fluid in which we live, and that is subject to 



II 



so many variations in its thermometric, hygrometric and 
barometric conditions. The branch which especially treats 
of these changes as occurring in a given climate, constitutes 
what is known as Meteorology or the science of weather. 
Air in its pure state consists of one volume of oxygen and 
four volumes of nitrogen, but many impurities enter into 
it, the chief of which are : carbonic acid, the product of com- 
bustion ; ammonia and its compounds, the product of organic 
decomposition ; organic impurities ; dust ; smoke ; and mi- 
cro-organisms. Another extraneous constituent, a most im- 
portant one, is moisture. 

Sometimes a portion of the oxygen of the air exists 
in the form of ozone, this occurs where the air is purest, 
as on the sea, in high altitudes, and pine forests ; its 
quantity is said to be increased by thunder storms and 
stronor sunlip^ht. 

The atmosphere receives its heat from the rays of the 
sun ; in part by direct radiation, but in a greater degree by 
reflection and conduction from the earth. This heat is 
chiefly lost through radiation into space. The eftects of at- 
mospheric heat or cold are increased by atmospheric 
humidity. 

When the degree of moisture is calculated as to the num- 
ber of grains of vapor contained in a cubic foot of air the 
result is called the absolute humidity, when the amount of 
moisture is calculated as to the percentage of saturation of 
the air, it is known as the relative humidity, this depends 
upon the temperature, for the higher that is the greater the 
capacity of the air to contain vapor. The lowest possible 
relative humidity has been estimated to be twenty-five per 
cent. ; when below fifty five per cent, the atmosphere is said 
to be very dry ; between that and seventy-five the dryness 
is moderate ; under eighty-five the air is moderately 



12 

damp, and over, extremely so. Rainfall depends not so 
much upon the humidity of the atmosphere as upon cold 
currents of air which precipitate the moisture in the form 
of rain. 

The air-pressure at the level of the sea is equivalent to 
fifteen pounds to the square inch ; this is decreased on as- 
cending above, and increased on descending below, the sea 
level. 

The electricity of the air is positive, while that of the 
earth is negative ; that of the air is stronger at high alti- 
tudes, under a clear sky, and in a cold temperature. 

The soil has a marked influence upon the humidity, tem- 
perature and purity of the lower strata of air. Clay is the 
most bibulous form of soil as it absorbs an equal weight 
of water, sand the dryest as it absorbs but about one-third 
of its weight and soon loses even that. These kinds of soil 
show the same peculiarities in regard to the absorption and 
retention of heat. Considerable attention has been devoted 
to the contamination of the air arising from the earth, this 
is more marked in some regions than others. 

Each external feature of the landscape effects climate 
more or less. Mountains or hilly ranges act as barriers to 
currents of air by either arresting or turning them back. 
Forests have a modifying effect upon the extremes of 
heat and cold, protecting the earth against the fierce rays 
of the summer sun, and in winter when the heat from 
the ground is returned into space, the roof formed by the 
branches interferes with its escape. Moist or marshy tracts 
of land act in much the same way, receiving heat more 
slowly than sandy soil and releasing it with corresponding 
tenacity. 

The climate of a portion of country does not depend 
alone upon the relative nearness to or distance from pole 



13 

or equator, but is modified by several conditions, one of 
which is altitude. Atmospheric temperature decreases at 
the rate of one degree for every three hundred feet of 
perpendicular ascent ; hence, other conditions being equal, 
a place having an altitude of six thousand feet above 
the sea would register a temperature twenty degrees 
lower than that of a place, in the same latitude, at the level 
of the sea ; while one having an altitude of fifteen thous- 
and feet would have a temperature fifty degrees lower' than 
one at the sea level. 

Climate is also modified by nearness to, or remoteness 
from, the sea or any great body of water. Water absorbs 
heat to a greater depth and radiates it more slowly than the 
land ; hence the sea is a great store-house of heat. It 
tends to produce mildness and equability in the climate of 
the adjacent land, as in summer its atmosphere is cooler 
than that of said land because it radiates its heat more 
slowly, while in winter the sea air is warmer than that of 
the land for the same reason. Islands have a milder, more 
equable climate than inland places of a corresponding 
latitude. The warm currents of the ocean have a wonder- 
fully modifying effect upon the places influenced by them. 
As a rule the western coast of the continents is warmer 
than the eastern. At open sea the great extremes of 
temperature experienced on land are unknown, and though 
the humidity of the atmosphere is in excess of that on 
land, it differs in character and its effect upon the human 
organism from moisture in the air of the land. This differ- 
ence is probably due to the saline properties of the sea 
moisture, and also to the fact that the amount of moisture 
is much less variable than on land. 

The length of the day has an effect upon climate. In 
long summer days more heat is accumulated than is lost 



14 

during the following short night ; in short winter days an 
opposite condition obtains. 

The prevailing winds of a given locality modify its 
climate. Currents of air from the equator carry heat with 
them, while currents from the polar regions are cold. A 
place on the northern hemisphere exposed to a southerly or 
equatorial current will have (other conditions being equal) 
a milder climate than one in the same latitude exposed to 
the northern or polar currents. 

The vegetation of a locality also modifies its climate ; an 
illustration of this is seen in the effect of large pine forests. 

THE CLIMATE OF THE WESTERN CONTINENT. 

American climate presents an infinite variety, as might be 
supposed, as the western continent extends from seventy- 
five degrees north latitude to fifty-five degrees south lati- 
tude, including the northern frigid and temperate, the tropi- 
cal and southern temperate, zones. 

The northern third of North America is very cold ; the 
southern part of the western coast of Alaska, British 
Columbia and Washington Territory have a much milder 
climate than the rest of this region because of the warm 
Pacific currents and counter trade-winds. The northern 
temperate region contains the United States, the basin 
of the St. Lawrence and Great Lakes, as well as the plateau 
of Mexico. The tropical region includes the lowlands of 
Mexico, Central America, the West Indies, and the lowlands 
of the northern three fourths of South America. Within 
the southern temperate region are included the high table- 
land of the Andes and the lower fourth of South America. 

The climatic resources of the United States are rich and 
varied, ranging, as this country does, from the arctic 
regions of Alaska to the semi-tropical climate of Florida 



15 

and Southern California, an extent of forty-five degrees of 
latitude, and from the moisture-laden atmosphere of the 
ocean and seaboard to the dry, rarefied, bracing air of the 
elevated plateaus or pinnacled mountain ranges. 

From the conformation of the surface, the country is 
divided into three natural divisions : The Atlantic Highland 
and Plain, the Central Plain or the Mississippi Valley, and 
the Pacific Highland. 

The climate of the eastern section is varied ; the 
rainfall is abundant, moisture being freely supplied by 
winds from the Atlantic Ocean, the Gulf of Mexico and 
the Great Lakes. The winter climate of the northern por- 
tion of this section Is much more rigorous than that of the 
corresponding portion of the Pacific coast, because of its 
exposure to a great cold current proceeding from the Polar 
seas, loaded with Ice, which passes down the Atlantic shores 
to the west of the Gulf stream. Another factor In the 
production of this severe climate Is the expansion of the 
continent toward the polar regions whence come the cold 
northwest currents of air, the prevailing winter winds, and 
narrowing of the same toward the tropics. 

The summer climate of the northern portion of the 
Mississippi Valley is hot and sultry, the winter cold and 
stormy ; the southern portion has a semi-tropical climate, 
the winters being mild. Rainfall is plentiful throughout 
this section, moisture being abundantly supplied by winds 
from the Gulf of Mexico and the Great Lakes. 

The climate of the Pacific Highland is very dry, having 
but little rain-fall ; the Pacific Slope (which Includes the 
State of California and the western portion of Oregon and 
Washington Territory) has a climate differing from that of 
any other portion of the United States, having but two sea- 
sons : the rainy season (winter) and the dry season (summer). 



i6 



ARTIFICIAL CLIMATES. 



This term has been applied to the atmosphere of dwel- 
lings in which a large proportion of the population of the 
temperate and colder regions spend more than half their 
existence. During the winter months they live in this viti- 
ated atmosphere, deriving but little benefit from the climate 
of the locality in which they reside, no matter how salubri- 
ous it may be. This artificial atmosphere generally has too 
low a relative humidity, being much too dry ; a tempera- 
ture not only too high, but unequal in degree at different 
levels and portions of the apartment; and a great lack of 
currents and air movements, which are useful in substitut- 
ing a fresh supply of air for that already used ; in addition to 
these conditions, is the abnormal state of the air as to its 
constituents. 

It contains a diminished amount of oxygen, and an 
excess of carbonic acid, from the combustion of gas, 
fuel, etc. ; carbon monoxide from stoves, furnaces and 
leaks in gas-pipes ; ammonia and its compounds, and other 
gases present where organic decomposition is going on ; 
animal emanations from the digestive, respiratory and 
cutaneous tracts of living bodies which are probably of the 
nature of ptomaines ; and micro-organisms. These last named 
exist in greater quantities in dwellings than in the open air. 
Experiments in Paris, conducted by Miquel, showed the 
difference between the number of bacteria per cubic metre 
contained in outdoor and indoor air, as follows : 



OUTER AIR. 




Autumn 


121 


Winter 


53 


Spring 


70 


Summer 


92 



AIR IN woman's ward 
OF L'HOPITAL DE la PITIE. 



36,700 
52,800 
32,300 
19,300 



17 

To these artificial climates most of the invalids, women 
and young children, of the colder sections of country, are 
doomed for seven months of the year. It is but an added 
proof of the ability of the human organism to accomodate 
itself to its environments that so small a proportion of the 
community perish from these conditions. 

CLIMATE AS A REMEDY. 

Climate viewed from a medical standpoint is a subject 
with which the practicing physician should be thoroughly 
conversant, and of which every intelligent person would do 
well to possess some general information. The physician 
who studies climatology must be an advocate of the preven- 
tion as well as the cure of disease, and taking into account 
the various forms of sporadic and epidemic maladies, and 
all the atmospheric conditions general and local, that tend 
to produce or aggravate these various affections, he should, 
from his gathered experience, be able to locate his patients, 
geographically and therapeutically, to their best advantage, 
so as to prevent the development of threatened diseases 
and facilitate the cure or alleviation of those already existing. 

As a result of the innate desire of man for longevity, the 
anxiety for continued vigor felt by the healthy, and the 
eagerness for restoration to health and strength shown by 
the invalid, climatic agencies have been sought and em- 
ployed in all ages both as preventatives and curatives. Of 
late years this field has been more and more scanned, and 
many localities have proved beneficial in restoring the health 
and preventing the unbalancing of the vital equilibrium. 

The subject of climate and health resorts is one of import- 
ance to the public, as hundreds of thousands of the citizens 
of this great Republic annually seek rest, recreation and 
healing in a change of climate. 



A goodly proportion of these, leave their own land and 
cross the Atlantic to visit noted European health stations 
while equally desirable climatic conditions exist in America 
nearer at home. 

For the healthy who reside in cities, even the slight 
change from the more or less impure atmosphere into a 
strictly rural one, free from the exhalations arising from a 
dense population, is in itself a remedy. The diseases to 
which they are liable simply by residing in a vitiated atmos- 
phere of dust, smoke and deleterious influences which con- 
stantly exist in towns and cities, are thus greatly benefitted. 
This is observed every summer when sick children are 
taken to the country or sea-shore for restoration. How 
much better is it then, not only to reside in a rural place but 
even in an ocean atmosphere or one of a high altitude, where 
the air exists in a purer form and produces likewise a more 
stimulating action upon the heart and lungs, this activity 
improving the circulation and extending in its beneficial 
effects to the entire human system. 

There are localities, usually at considerable altitude, where 
pulmonary consumption does not originate, or if cases of it 
be found, they are transported with hereditary tendency or 
they are only sporadic ones resulting from exposure to 
changes of the atmosphere. Where the climatic conditions 
are such as to prevent this disease, it naturally leads one 
to infer that the same regions will prove beneficial where 
the inroad of such a malady has manifested itself. 

In the following chapters an attempt is made to direct 
the attention of the reader briefly, to the many desirable 
places of resort found on this continent, most of them 
within the limits of the United States. 



CHAPTER II. 

BENEFITS AND DANGERS OF HEALTH RESORTS. 

Dependent upon Individual Peculiarities — General Beneficial Conditions — Im- 
portance of Residence in a Suitable Climate — Individualization of Climatic 
Prescriptions — Suitable Surroundings — Congenial Company— Mental Im- 
pressions — Advantages of American Health Resorts. 

The benefits and dangers of the chmate of a health 
resort cannot be arbitrarily stated, as those climatic condi- 
tions which constitute life to one invalid or class of invalids 
may be inimical to the well-being of another. Truly there are 
certain conditions equally desirable for all classes of cases, 
such as purity of the atmosphere and water, hygienic sur- 
roundings and other circumstances, but these, as a rule, are 
matters due to the peculiarities of the special localit}-, and 
are not, strictly speaking, of a climatic nature. 

Residence in a suitable climate is an almost indispensable 
factor in the treatment, prevention and cure of many forms 
of disease. This is evident, for we constantly see invalids 
about us whose condition is critical, and whose days are 
numbered if they remain in the climate in which they are 
living. Many of these persons remove to a climate 
suitable to their individual case and their malady is cured, 
or at least so alleviated that life is prolonged for years, and 
they again become active, useful members of society. In 
some of these cases this improvement only continues so 
long as they reside amid these congenial surroundings, for 
as soon as they return to the unsuitable location they 
are again reduced to their former sad condition of ill 
health. 

(19) 



20 



The prescriber of climate must learn to individualize 
his prescriptions, not alone in regard to the disease, but 
more particularly in respect to the patient, for every victim 
of a given disease, such for instance as pulmonary phthisis, 
will not do equally well in the same climate ; hence, in pre- 
scribing, the temperament of a patient and the nature and 
stage of his malady must be considered. 

When contemplating a change of residence for an invalid 
we are, of course, to keep in mind other equally important 
conditions, such as rest, clothing, cuisine, nursing, sanitary 
surroundings, congenial company, avoidance of the excite- 
ment of fashionable resorts, and many other matters of similar 
import. There is also to be taken into consideration the various 
other inconveniences attendant upon travelling, absence from 
home, business, friends, and the usual physician, also the 
depressing influence of the presence, at popular health re- 
sorts, of numerous invalids. This is particularly unfortu- 
nate where many cases of phthisis are stopping in one 
house, for by constant coughing they will trouble each other 
day and night. 

Great care should be exercised in choosing the resort, 
in regard to the sanitary surroundings. The place in gen- 
eral may have much to recommend it as to healthfulness, 
but if the house in which the patient stops has imperfect 
arrangements in the way of drainage, ventilation, pure water 
supply, or other hygienic requisites, little will be gained by 
the change of climate alone. 

The same may be said with regard to food ; if the patient 
be unable to secure proper nourishment, as is often the 
case, he may be but little benefitted by the atmospheric sur- 
roundings. 

The temperament and circumstances of the invalid should 
also be taken into consideration in choosing a health resort; 



21 

one with quiet tastes will not enjoy a gay place, and vice 
versa ; again if one of moderate circumstances visits a place 
where the expenses are beyond his means, the worry about 
pecuniary affairs will probably neutralize the effect of the 
climate. 

It is a matter of great importance for the invalid to seek 
the benefits of a change of climate at a stage of his malady 
sufficiently early to be really helpful. Nothing is more 
pitiful than to see a dying patient, or one near the termina- 
tion of a fatal disease, or an invalid who cannot be relieved 
or improved, expend his small store of strength in a fruit- 
less journey and exchange the many comforts of home for 
the suffering and discomforts that have to be endured by the 
sick when travelling. 

There are, however, many persons affected with chronic 
incurable diseases, whose sufferings may be alleviated and 
life prolonged by a residence in a suitable climate, and 
such should be encouraged to make a change. 

We cannot emphasize too strongly the importance of 
congenial company for the health-seeker. Many invalids 
when sent away from home, family and friends, suffer so 
much from homesickness that they are but little benefitted 
by the change of climate, and are even made worse. 

Hence a place of resort should not only possess a climate 
suitable to the physical needs of the patient, but such con- 
ditions, in the way of scenery, amusements, diversions and 
congenial surroundings, as will act favorably upon his mind ; 
for who can estimate the effect of mental conditions upon 
the health of the body ? Probably many times the improve- 
ments occurring in an invalid incident to a change of resi- 
dence, is not so much the result of the influence of the cli- 
mate of the new place, as of the favorable impression made 
upon the mind of the sufferer. 



22 



The climatic prescription should always be that of a place 
of resort suitable to the mental condition of the patient. 
It would not be wise to send a patient suffering from men- 
tal depression to a dull, secluded spot, where little could be 
found to divert his mind from preying upon itself ; such a 
case should rather be advised to visit a cheerful, gay resort, 
where he will forget his real or imaginary troubles in be- 
holding and participating in the pleasures of life. On the 
other hand, a person worn out and broken down from a 
tedious succession of social or business duties will be more 
apt to find relief in a retreat far from the haunts of fashion 
or trade, where comparatively alone, he may listen to the 
secrets that Nature has to tell him ; a place where he can 
settle down quietly and say, "Here may I loaf and invite 
my soul." 

This aspect of the subject widens and grows as it is pur- 
sued, until it leads us to that mysterious realm of psycho- 
logical and spiritual forces, hidden as yet from our view by 
the shadows of ignorance and prejudice but which must, 
sooner or later, be revealed as an important factor in the 
healing of sick bodies and minds diseased. 

Residence in a congenial climate is as important a means 
of preserving health and preventing disease, as it is In the 
treatment and cure of the developed malady ; this is be- 
ing more and more realized, and we are earnestly looking 
for the time when the chief occupation of the physician will 
cease to be that of tinkering diseased and shattered bodies, 
and his best energies may be devoted to the practice of 
preventive medicine and the annihilation of epidemics and 
other diseases. Surely that will be the "golden age" of 
the noble calling of the medical profession. 

A health resort on this continent has for us several ad- 
vantages over a distant or trans-Atlantic station. There 



23 

the invalid may be among people whose language and cus- 
toms are not the same as his own ; here he will be saved 
much inconvenience in case of sudden attacks or a serious 
aggravation of symptoms, by not being at so great a dis- 
tance from his family, home and friends. 

The climate resources of our own country are so great 
and varied that we may here not only readily find a suit- 
able resort for every case that a climate change will benefit, 
but the invalid does not feel so severely the process of 
becoming acclimated as he does in more distant regions 
across the sea. 

It is observed that in localities where considerable moist- 
ure exists and the population is dense, animal food unpro- 
tected, will decompose very quickly, while the same kind of 
nourishment exposed to the atmosphere in a similar manner 
in some of the drier interior high plateaus does not easily 
disintegrate but becomes dry, and is preserved for a 
long period without the least trace of putrifaction. 

In an atmosphere possessing these qualities we almost 
universally find that pthisis pulmonalis cases, if not in the 
last stages of the disease, are improved or the malady 
held in abeyance. Such a climate we regard as a true type 
of the remedial ones to which we have referred. 

It is well known that a low temperature, a few degrees 
above the freezing point, will preserve many animal and 
vegetable substances. This fact is taken advantage of by 
commercial men who preserve meats and fruits in large re- 
frigerating houses as articles for food supply. An even, 
cool, spring-like climate is also the most healthy. 

The applicability of certain special health stations to the 
various forms of disease will be treated of in detail in 
the chapter on "Therapeutics." 



CHAPTER III. 
SEA-SIDE RESORTS. 

Their Attractions — They Afford a Variety for Either Winter or Summer Resi- 
dence — Brief References to the Atlantic Sea-Coast resorts — Those on the 
Gulf of Mexico — Those on the Pacific Coast — Localities on Puget Sound — 
Places in Alaska. 

The sea-side must ever be a favorite place as it offers 
many attractions to both pleasure seekers and inva- 
lids ; the sea draws them with its peculiar charms, seeming 
in Emerson's beautiful words to say : 

" Is not my voice thy music, morn and eve? 
My breath thy healthful climate in the heats, 
My touch thy antidote, my bay thy bath ? " 

and they to whom a sea voyage is impossible or inconveni- 
ent may here enjoy the benefits of sea-air while remaining 
on terra firma. The air at the sea-shore is charged with 
an increased amount of moisture and ozone ; and with sea 
salts. These constituents of the atmosphere have a decid- 
ed effect upon the human organism, and are beneficial to 
certain classes of cases. This subject is discussed at greater 
length in the chapter on "Therapeutics." 

In our own country the great extent of sea-coast stretch- 
ing along both oceans, from the cold north to the sunny 
south, affords sufficient variety of this kind of climate and 
outward features of scenery to suit any case to which sea-air 
is beneficial, and accomodate the most varied tastes. Almost 
all resorts so located are places of general summer 
or winter rendezvous, but we will name the principal 
ones on or near the coasts, and simply state their location, 

(24) 



25 

with the attractions and accommodations they offer to visi- 
tors. Those that have any particular adaptabiHty for any 
special malady will be referred to under climate treatment in 
the chapter above mentioned. Beginning with our eastern 
sea-line at its northern boundary, we will follow around, 
naming the localities on or near the shores, leaving moun- 
tain and other regions regardless of State lines, to other 
chapters. 

NEW ENGLAND. 

The rocky, irregular and picturesque coast of New Eng- 
land, with its adjacent islands, presents many beautiful re- 
treats for those in search of the "healing of the seas." 
Most of these places have a delightfully cool and salubri- 
ous summer climate. 

Eastport — At the extreme eastern point of Maine's 
rugged extensive ocean line, is situated the pretty town 
of Eastport, with a population of about four thousand, 
and but a few miles from the Canadian frontier. It is a 
place well adapted for the residents of Southern cities or 
those in the belt of summer heat, as a retreat from excess- 
ive temperature, and yet one having the advantages of a 
town residence. Convalescents from low fevers, and cases 
of neurasthenia and brain-fag, do well here; it is also a 
good place for simply resting as a preventive measure 
against becoming sick. Visitors will find large hotels here. 

Mount Desert Island. — This the largest of the Porcupine 
group, which is situated in Frenchman's Bay, is one of the 
many beautiful summering points in Maine and the most 
popular. It has an area of about one hundred square miles, 
being fourteen miles long and eight wide ; its north- 
ern shore approaches the mainland so nearly that it is 
joined to the latter by a bridge. 

The favorite places on the island are Bar Hdrhor on 



26 

the eastern, and South West Harhor on the southern shore ; 
the former is the more popular and attractive place, but 
both afford excellent accommodations for visitors. 

This island is richly endowed by nature, combining 
ocean, lake and mountain scenery ; its most prominent 
peak is Green Mountain which attains an altitude of 1527 
feet above sea-level, the highest elevation directly on the 
Atlantic coast-line ; its summit is an excellent point from 
which to view the surrounding hilly country and the out- 
stretching forests and ocean. About half way of its ascent 
one comes to Eagle Lake, a beautiful mountain sheet of 
water in which trout abounds. 

Mount Desert has a cool, healthful, summer climate, 
combining sea and mountain air, which is rendered sooth- 
ing from the abundant evergreen and piney growth on the 
island. Bronchial and pulmonary cases generally do well 
here in the hot season (July and August) notwithstanding the 
fact that considerable fog hangs over the island or portions 
of it, at times, especially in summer during the morning 
and evening. The sun usually appears, however, during 
the early forenoon of these semi-foggy days. 

Portland. — Some idea of the charm of much of the 
scenery along the New England coast may be gained from 
Whittier's lines on Casco Bay, the inlet upon which Maine's 
commercial metropolis, Portland, is situated. 

" Nowhere fairer, sweeter, rarer. 
Does the golden-locked fruit bearer 
Through his painted woodlands stray, 
Than where hill-side oaks and beeches 
Overlook the long, blue reaches, 
Silver coves and pebbled beaches, 
And green isles of Casco Bay." 

This beautiful body of water, which has been compared 
to the Bay of Naples, is a very fine harbor and contains 



27 

several hundred islands, the largest of which is Gushing s 
Island, located three miles from Portl,and, with which place 
it is connected by steam ferries. Its area is about two hun- 
dred and fifty acres ; its beaches are excellent and the facil- 
ities for bathing good. It is a place much resorted to by 
Canadians ; there being a good hotel on the island. Sev- 
eral of the other islands in Casco Bay are resorted to and 
afford grood accommodations. 

At the southern side of Casco Bay is a point of land 
known as Gape Elizabeth, a pleasant locality with good bath- 
ing and fishing. The cape consists of a series of cliffs and 
ledges and on its point stand the Twin Sisters (lighthouses). 
This place is very near the city of Portland and has 
desirable hotels. 

Scarborough Beach. — This place has ample facilities for 
bathing, hunting and fishing, and excellent hostleries. It is 
a few miles from the last-named place and is very pop- 
ular during the summer months. A short distance down 
the coast is Pine Point, also a pleasant place. 

Old Orchard Beach. — This is one of the finest beaches 
on the New England coast ; it is crescent-shaped, about 
ten miles in length, and has fine surf bathing, excellent 
fishing and driving. Many hotels and boarding-houses 
affording choice entertainment for families desiring to spend 
the entire summer, are to be found here. This is one of 
the most frequented places on this portion of the coast. 

Biddeford. — It is but four or five miles from Old Orchard 
to Biddeford^ which is a flourishing city of 13,000 popula- 
tion, situated near the mouth of the Saco river. 

Saco Pool is not far from Biddeford ; a steamer runs 
twice daily between these points during the summer 
months. The pool is a basin hollowed out of solid rock 
about one quarter of a mile from the ocean, with which it 



28 

is connected by an inlet through which it is filled and emp- 
tied by the tide. There is a hotel at the pool. 

Kennehunkport. — A few miles down the coast is the 
picturesque old town of Kennehunkport, situated on the 
Kennebunk river. This place had a few years since a large 
ship-building trade, but this industry has nearly ceased since 
the decline of American shipping. 

Wells Beach. — Not far distant is Wells Beach, six miles 
in length and a favorite region for sportsmen. Snipe, 
curlew, partridges and woodcock are found in abundance 
and a trout stream adds to the attractions of this place, 
which has several hotels and is about eighty-five miles from 
Boston. Beyond this point is a long stretch of beach 
known as Ogunquit Beach. It extends nearly the entire 
distance from Wells to York. 

York Beach. — This is a good bathing place and a favorite 
summer resort. There are some fine cliffs in the vicinity 
which add to the scenery of this part of the coast, 

Portsmouth. — About ten miles to the south-west is the old 
town of Portsmouth, located on the Piscataqua river. 
New Castle., a town on an island of the same name, about 
two miles from Portsmouth, is prettily situated at the 
mouth of the river and is a popular place. It has one 
of the finest hotels on the coast. This is a locality of 
historic interest, being the first settlement of any import- 
ance in New Hampshire, and for some time the seat of the 
provincial government and the centre of trade. 

The Isles of Shoals. — This is a group of eight rocky, bare 
islands, which lie at a distance of about fifteen miles directly 
off the coast from Portsmouth. The Appledore is the largest 
of the group ; the first-class hotel of the same name and its 
cottages are the only residences on the island. On Star 
Island., another of the group, a fine hotel and several 



29 

cottages are located, which are equal to those of the 
Appledore Isle. On White Island there is a lighthouse 
with a powerful revolving light, which is visible fifteen 
miles distant. 

This group has come to have a prominent place in liter- 
ature, from the writings of Lowell and others. Mrs. Celia 
Thaxter the poet, many years of whose life have been spent 
on White and Appledore Islands has sung to their praise ; 
in her book, "Among the Isles of Shoals," the descriptions 
of their charms are beautiful ; she says: " Swept by every 
wind that blows, and beaten by the bitter brine for unknown 
ages, well may the Isles of Shoals be barren, bleak and bare. 
At first sight, nothing can be more rough and inhospitable 
than they appear. * * * * But to the human 
creature who has eyes that will see, and ears that will 
hear, Nature appeals with such a novel charm, that the 
luxurious beauty of the land is half forgotten before one is 
aware." 

Rye Beach. — About seven miles from Portsmouth, is the 
most noted sea-side resort on the New Hampshire coast. 
Rye Beach. It has good surf bathing and excellent 
hotels. 

Hampton Beach. — It is separated from Hampton Beach by a 
prominent headland, the Boar's Head. The bathing, fish- 
ing, scenery and driving are fine at Hampton as well 
as at Rye ; both being much frequented places by summer 
visitors. 

Salisbury Beach. — This is a hard beach extending from 
the Merrimac River to Hampton Beach, a distance of six 
miles. The shore descends gradually and is very good for 
bathing. There is a hotel at this place which, with a num- 
ber of cottages, afford room for many visitors during 
the summer months. 



30 

Neicburyport. — This is an old town situated on the Massa- 
chusetts shore of the Merrimac River three miles from 
its mouth. 

Three miles to the east is Plum Island, connected to the 
mainland by a bridge. This is a long narrow strip of land, 
on which a hotel and two lighthouses are located. 

Newburyport had, in days gone by, a large shipping 
trade, but like many other New England sea-shore towns 
its maritime interests have declined. 

Rochport. — A popular spot, is the town of Rochfort, beau- 
tifully located at the end of Cape Ann. The scenery of 
this place is very fine. 

Pigeon's Cove is two miles north and has finely laid out 
avenues and drives. The bathing is good, and it is a pleas- 
ant place for a summer's tarry, being popular and much 
frequented. 

Ocean View, and Annisquam are also well-known resorts 
in this vicinity. 

Gloucester. — The town of Gloucester four miles south of 
Rockport, and about thirty miles from Boston, has a fine 
harbor, and is the centre of the northern fishing interests as 
well as a popular place. Two miles from the city at the 
entrance of the harbor is the mass of rock known as the 
"Reef of Norman's Woe," the dread of sailors, made fa- 
mous by Longfellow's Poem "The Wreck of the Hesperus," 
in which he graphically describes the loss of the vessel which 
tradition says occured in the latter part of the seventeenth 
century, as follows : 

" And fast through the midnight, dark and drear. 
Through the whistling sleet and snow, 
Like a sheeted ghost the vessel swept 
Toward the reef of Norman's woe." 

Magnolia. — Some three miles south of Gloucester is a 



31 

place named Magnolia, so called from the great number of 
luxuriant magnolias growing wild thereabout. 
Whittier tells us 

" Of the marvellous valley hidden in the depth of Gloucester woods, 
Full of plants that love the summer, blooms of warmer latitudes ; 
Where the Arctic birch is braided by the tropic's flowery vines. 
And the white magnolia blossoms star the twilight of the pines." 

Manchester. — A couple of miles down the coast we come 
to Manchester, which has a "singing beach" which is "of 
simple-looking light sand, but owing to some singular con- 
formation of the atoms of sand, they triturate against each 
other, beneath the foot with as musical a vibration as when 
glass is struck against silver." Good hotels are found at 
this place and fine private residences line the beach between 
it and Beverly. 

Beverly. — This is an old town with very good beaches. Its 
chief business is shoe manufacturing ; it is two miles from 
Salem. 

Salem. — Another old town and a place of great historic 
interest, is Salem, it being the first settlement in the 
old Massachusetts colony. The harbor furnishes good 
boating and fishing. There are several good hotels in 
the town. 

Marhlehead. — Four miles from Salem is Marblehead, an- 
other quaint old colonial town, formerly having large mari- 
time interests but now engaged in the shoe trade. It is a 
fine summer resort and has an excellent harbor across 
which is Marblehead Neck. 

Marhlehead Neck is two miles alongf the shore from Mar- 
blehead and is a favorite place for camping out. 

Lowell Island, about two miles out in the bay, has a 
summer hotel and is a pretty and healthful spot. 

Many houses in Marblehead, still standing, were built 



32 

and occupied before the Revolution. Longfellow in writ- 
ing of the town said : 

"Not far away we saw the port, 
The strange, old-fashioned, silent town, 
The lighthouse, the dismantled fort. 
The wooden houses, quaint and brown." 

Clifton Beach Bluff and Phillips Beach are pleasant loca- 
tions below Marblehead on the coast ; south of these 
places is Swampscott. 

Swampscott. — This is the favorite resort of the wealthiest 
citizens of Boston, being to that city what Long Branch is 
to New York. It has many private residences and first- 
class hotels. It is about twelve miles from Boston. Lynn, 
a city of about 40,000, is on Massachusetts Bay about 
eleven miles from Boston, situated in the midst of interest- 
ing scenery. 

Nahant. — Four miles north of Lynn is Nahant, a rocky 
peninsula which juts far out into the water. Its highest point 
is one hundred and fifty feet above the sea level. The 
beaches are very hard and the views are grand. Many 
summer residences are here located and also fine hotels, 
but it is not so popular now as Swampscott. 

Point of Pines. — This place, nine miles from Boston, as its 
name indicates, is plentifully supplied with trees. It is a fa- 
vorite sea-side visiting place for daily excursions from 
Boston. 

Chelsea, or Revere Beach. — Another pleasant place, four 
miles north of Boston. The beach is three miles in length 
and visitors are well cared for. It is a favorite place for a 
few hours visit from Boston by excursion. This beach 
affords good driving, promenading and bathing. 

Nantashet. — About twenty miles south of Boston is Nan- 
tashet. This place has a fine beach four miles long and 



33 

several good hotels. It has steamboat connection with Bos- 
ton, the boats running several times daily. 

Cohasset. — This is a pretty village two miles and a half from 
Nantasket. It is a well-known summer resort, beinof sur- 
rounded by charming scenery ; the coast line is very rugged 
at this portion and lined with hotels and residences. 

Scituate. — Five miles further south is Scituate,2in old town 
with a good beach (Peggotty Beach) and a summer hotel. 

Marshfield is a popular spot with several hotels. It is 
eight miles from the last-named place. 

Cape Cod. — This is an unattractive, sandy peninsula ex- 
tending out into the ocean. "For centuries the storms have 
beaten upon this narrow strip of sand, behind which the 
commerce of a state lies intrenched. The assault is un- 
flagging, the defence obstinate. Fresh columns are always 
forming outside for the attack, and the roll of the ocean is 
forever beating the charge. Yet the Cape stands fast and 
will not budge." It begins at Sandwich, a town sixty-two 
miles from Boston ; from this point the land extends 
about thirty-five miles to the east and, at Orleans, it begins 
to curve to the north and westward, extending about an 
equal distance in that direction, thus inclosing the Massachu- 
setts Bay. There are several towns and villages on the 
Cape. 

Provincetown, at its extreme end, is a flourishing and an in- 
teresting old place being a fishing town with a good harbor, 
and the centre of the cod and mackerel fisheries on the 
coast. 

Hyannis, on the south shore, is growing in favor as a 
summer retreat. 

Yarmouth, a few miles to the interior, is an attractive 
village, near which place there is a camp-meeting ground. 

Nantucket. — This island is situated about twenty miles 



34 

south of Cape Cod. It is sixteen miles long and from three to 
four miles wide. Its largest town, Nantucket, was the chief 
whaling port of the world in the olden days of America, 
but this trade has fallen off and gone. It is now a favorite 
New England summer resort ; it is a pretty little town, 
picturesquely situated and has good hotels. Delightful 
excursions may be made to various parts from this point. 
An interesting trip is to Siasccmset, an old place situated 
on the south-east coast. The summer climate is very cool 
and enjoyable on this island, the air being pure and invig- 
orating on account of its distance from the mainland. Its 
permanent inhabitants are mostly farmers and fishermen. 

Martha s Vineyard. — The island of this name lies at a 
distance of thirty miles from Nantucket. It has a length of 
twenty miles and an average width of six miles. It is 
considerably resorted to during the summer, there being 
several favorite places located on it. 

Edgartown and Oah Bluff's, in the eastern part of the 
island, are well patronized places in the summer season. 

Near the last-named place is the great Methodist camp- 
meeting ground, where thousands of people congregate 
every summer, and many families stay all the season, 
from June to September or October, in cozy, cheery and 
comfortable cottages, which in some places are so compact 
as to make pretty streets and avenues. Although good 
sanitary arrangements are secured, it is not a suitable place 
for phthisis cases on account of the aggregation of people. 
Good boardinor and hotels are to be found here as well as 
at the various places on the island. It is connected with 
Newport and New Bedford by a good steamboat line. 

Newport. — This celebrated sea-side city is situated on 
the west shore of Aquidneck or Rhode Island (the largest 
of the islands of Narragansett Bay), five miles from the 



35 

ocean.' It is one of the best adorned, most beautiful and 
most truly fashionable resorts in this country. The hotel 
accommodations are of the very best. Its beaches are not 
extensive, but they are excellent and the bathing is fine. 
The scenery is charming and the surroundings of costly vil- 
las and green lawns help to make the place attractive. The 
avenues are superb and the finest equipages daily drive 
over them during the season. It is one of the principal 
towns of Rhode Island with some historic interest and 
has many places in the city and its vicinity which will well 
repay one to visit. 

Rocky Point. — An enjoyable trip may be made to this fa- 
vorite place for "clam bakes." It is prettily situated on a 
small island in Narragansett Bay and is connected by 
steamboat with Newport and Providence. 

Narragansett Pier. — This place which is growing in pop- 
ularity, is situated at the town of Kingston, Rhode Island, 
on the west shore of Narragansett Bay near its mouth. 
Its beach is excellent and the bathing is very good and per- 
fectly safe. The riding and driving are very fine, to which 
attractions may be added those of fishing and boating, which 
are also first-class. Its hotels are ample and very good. 
Excursions can be made to various points on the Bay from 
this place. 

Noyes Beach. — This is situated on the southern coast of 
Rhode Island, and is likewise a delightful summer home. 

Watch Hill Point. — This is found on the extreme south- 
western point of Rhode Island and is a popular resort, 
with well appointed conveniences for a large number of 
summer sojourners. It has a fine beach and beautiful 
scenery. With the exceptions of Newport and Narragan- 
sett Pier this is the most frequented retreat in the state. 

Block Island. — ^This island lies out at sea about ten miles 



36 

from the south coast of the State of Rhode Island and an 
equal distance from the eastern extremity of Long Island ; 
it is about midway between Narragansett Pier, and Mon- 
tauk Point on Long Island. It is free from land breezes 
and from consequent land-breeze contamination. The island 
is about seven miles long and from two to four wide. The 
southern shore presents bluffs which rise about two hun- 
dred feet above the water's edge, the land gradually de- 
scending until it reaches the opposite shore, which has a 
beach several miles in length and a fine surf. It has a 
genial climate, the air is soft and balmy and the tempera- 
ture seldom rises above seventy -five degrees Fahrenheit. 
Whittier says of it in the " Palatine :" 

" And the pale health-seeker findeth there, 
The wine of Life in its pleasant air." 

Much of the island is devoted to farm lands, though 
the occupation of the majority of its male inhabitants is 
fishing. The village of Newshoreham is on the south coast. 
The hotels on the island are good and there are many excel- 
lent drives around to places of interest. The scenery extends 
over hill and dale with water-views in fine relief. 

There are some noteworthy sea-side resorts on the Con- 
necticut shore of the Long Island Sound. 

Stonington. — This is an old town in the extreme eastern 
portion of the coast line and is quite a favorite place, having 
good boating, bathing, fishing and hotels. 

New London. — Twelve miles to the west is New London, 
situated on the Thames River. In its vicinity are several 
charming spots for warm weather retreat. 

SaybrooJc. — About twenty miles west of New London is 
Saybrook, a pretty village with good inns, situated at the 
mouth of the Connecticut River. 

Guilford. — Fifteen miles further to the west is Guilford, 



37 

an interesting town with good summer hotels in its neigh- 
borhood. 

Branford Point. — This place situated eight miles west of 
Guilford, is a fine watering place, and three miles distant is 
Indian Neck, a quiet little village ; both these places offer 
good entertainment. 

New Haven. — The beautiful city of New Haven is a few 
miles west, but it is not a summer resort. 

Milford is a pretty town some miles to the westward and 
five miles east of Stratford which is a fine old place. It 
lies a few miles east of Bridgeport another pleasant sum- 
mering place. 

Fairfield. — Is a pretty place five miles west of Bridgeport, 
with a history dating back to colonial days. It is claimed to 
have the finest beach on the Sound. It has desirable board- 
ing places. Southport and Westport are small places lying 
between Fairfield and Norwalk. 

Norwalk. — Which is situated on a fine bay, is a home- 
like village with smaller places in its locality, which are in 
good favor. Oysters are to be had in abundance at this 
place. The hotels are good and its nearness to NewYork, 
brings many summer guests from that city. 

Stamford. — A beautiful town, which with its suburbs is 
much frequented by New Yorkers, being but thirty-five 
miles from the great metropolis. 

Greenwich. — Which is at the western end of the Connecti- 
cut shore, is an old town founded nearly two hundred and 
fifty years ago. It is popular and convenient of access from 
New York City. 

LONG ISLAND. 

This long narrow strip of land has an extensive stretch 
of sea-shore, the island being one hundred and twenty-five 
miles in length. It is studded with many delightful and 



38 

popular summering places, easily accessible from New York, 
Brooklyn, Philadelphia and Boston. On the northern 
shore, situated on the small bays and inlets skirting Long 
Island Sound, are a number of little villages more or 
less resorted to, having good hotels and fine summer 
homes. 

Sea Cliff. — Among these is Sea Cliff, a village at a 
distance of twenty-seven miles from New York City ; it 
is beautifully situated on a bluff overlooking the Sound. 
It was established as a Methodist camp-meeting ground, 
but has grown in favor with other classes of people, 
and has now quite a large permanent population. The 
boating, bathing and fishing are very good, and the board- 
ing excellent. 

Glen Cove. — A few miles from this place is Glen Cove, an- 
other delightful resort with fine summer villas, good hotels, 
beautiful scenery and excellent boating, fishing and bathing. 

Oyster Bay. — The village of Oyster Bay lies a few miles 
to the east, on a beautiful bay. It is a yachtman's head- 
quarters and has considerable reputation as a summer 
retreat. 

Cold Spring. — A few miles further east is the village of 
Cold Spring, situated on an arm of the same pretty bay with 
a fine back-ground of hills. It has good hotels, fine drives, 
all water sports and pleasures, and is also quite a popular 
place for yachtsmen. 

Port Jefferson. — A number of smaller places dot the 
shore between this point and the old town of Port Jefferson, 
(fifty-eight miles from New York), which is a small shipping 
centre, offering some attractions to summer visitors. It 
has several hotels and the hills lying back of the town are 
the site of summer residences. 

Greenport. — At the eastern part of the island the popular 



39 

little place Greenport is found, where good boating, bathing 
and fishing may be enjoyed. This place has a fine harbor 
and shipping interests of some importance. The hotels 
are good, and there are also a number of private summer 
residences. 

Shelter Island. — It is but a short distance across the bay 
to Shelter Island, another well known residing place. It is 
thirteen miles long and about four miles wide containing 
about 9000 acres. It is a pretty island with fine lakes and 
woods, excellent hotels, attractive private residences, good 
bathing and fishing. There is a camp-meeting ground on 
the island. The old town of Sag Harbor lies some miles 
south across the bay. 

Many good resorts are to be found along the southern 
shore of Long Island, which is, for the greater portion of its 
length, separated from the ocean by a sand bar, which in- 
closes several bays, the largest of which is that interesting 
body of water, which is known as the Great South Bay. 

Montauk Point. — At the extreme eastern end of the 
southern coast about one hundred and twenty-five miles from 
New York is Montauk Point, a picturesque and pretty spot 
where a small summer settlement has been started. 

Southampton. — The Hamptons are pleasant places, one of 
these, Southampton, situated on the south shore of the island, 
about ninety miles from New York, has been called the 
" Newport of Long Island." The village is separated from 
the sea by a strip of sand. It affords suitable accommoda- 
tions for summer visitors. 

Quogue. — This is a quiet, pretty spot, seventy-eight miles 
from New York. Its bathing*beach is separated from the 
shore of Long Island by a creek which is famous for its 
crabs ; the stream is spanned by a small bridge. The air of 
this section of the Island is very invigorating. 



40 

The Moriches. — These villages lie near the water about 
seventy miles from New York. East Moriches lies directly 
on the East Bay where still-bathing, fishing and boating may 
be enjoyed. The hotels are good at these places. Two 
miles across on the bar, at South Beach, those who prefer 
surf-bathing may there enjoy it. 

Bellport. — Ten miles to the west is the village of BeJlport, 
with its comfortable hotels and cottages. It is a short distance 
from the Bay and has the advantages of fishing and other 
water amusements. 

Patchogue — This village is situated in the same manner 
on Great South Bay, about three miles further west. It 
has some four or five thousand permanent residents, but 
during the summer months its population is considerably 
increased. There are several good hotels and many 
boarding houses at this place. The Patchogue Lake 
furnishes fresh-water fishing, while the bay and ocean 
afford salt-water fishing. The ocean is accessible from 
Water Island Beach, across the bay. 

The villages of Bayport and Sayville, respectively fifty- 
two and fifty miles from New York, are likewise fine 
resting places. 

Mip. — Which is six miles west of Sayville, is a popular 
resort with good hotels and fine private residences. It is 
near the Bay and connected with it by a creek. 

Bay Shore. — Another place situated on Great South Bay, 
forty-one miles from New York City, is a popular resort, 
containing good hotels and beautiful villas. Yachting, 
fishing, bathing and boating are to be enjoyed here. 

5a&7/?on.— Situated at a distance of thirty-six miles from 
New York, is this town with a population of about three 
thousand. It is a fashionable summer place, with 
first-class hotels and palatial private residences. It 



41 

is on Great South Bay opposite Fire Island, which is also a 
popular place, having an excellent hotel, still and surf bath- 
ing and good fishing. 

Traveling further to the south and westward we pass 
Amityville, South Oyster Bay, Freepcn't and other places of 
summer outing, 

Lang Beach. — Crossing Hempstead Bay from the last- 
named place, we come to Long Beach, (twenty-four miles 
from New York), a summer location to which persons from 
the adjacent cities may go for a few hours, and yet one at 
which a number of guests stay for an entire season. It 
has one of the largest summer-hotels in the United States, 
and a number of cottages. It has a very fine beach with 
surf and still bathing. 

Point Lookout, about four miles distant, is also a pleasant 
locality with good hotels and cottages. 

Rochaway Beach. — This sandy stretch situated south and 
west of Long Beach is easily accessible from New York and 
adjoining cities, and is visited by many persons for a day or 
part of a day. It has ample accommodations for permanent 
guests and can be readily reached by excursion boats or 
rail-road, and it is connected by a ferry with Coney Island. 

Coney Island. — Which is a narrow strip of sand, four 
and a half miles long, lying just outside of New York 
Harbor, ten miles from the city, is separated from Long 
Island by a creek. It is divided into several beaches, which 
improve, from asocial standpoint as one goes north or east- 
war I, away from the harbor end and the large excursion 
piers. The best portions of the island are the Brighton and 
Manhattan and Oriental Beaches, where there are first-class 
hotels. This locality, the northern or east end, is resorted 
to by the better class of people. It has many attractions 
in the way of bathing, good music and out-door entertain- 



42 

ments. Many guests spend weeks at these hotels, and 
others who cannot leave the populous cities for any length 
of time go to the island on excursions for a few hours, 
enjoying the ocean breezes and escaping, for a little while, 
the impure and heated air of the city. 

NEW JERSEY. 

The New Jersey coast presents many seaside summering 
places, some of which are towns with a large permanent 
population, while others merely consist of one or more 
large hotels and a few cottages. Some of these places 
are more exempt than others from the visits of the prover- 
bial "Jersey mosquito," which abounds or disappears 
according as the winds prevail from land or sea. The 
resorts on this coast are easy of access from New York, 
Philadelphia and Baltimore, and are visited annually by a 
large number of persons from these and other cities. 

Highlands. — If we start at the northern end of the coast 
and travel southward, we first reach the Highlands. These 
are bluffs which rise over two hundred feet above the wa- 
ter's edge, and are just south of Sandy Hook. The village of 
Highlands, situated on the Shrewsbury river, is a popular 
resort ; the beach, bathing, fishing and boating are good, 
as well as the hotels. Both unruffled and surf bathing can 
be had at this place. 

Sea Bright. — Which is located two miles south, has a perma- 
nent population of about six hundred. It is a popular summer 
spot and contains many cottages and several summer 
hotels. It is situated on a narrow neck of land lying 
between the ocean and the Shrewsbury river. 

Monmouth Beach. — This place comes next en route. It is 
suitable for quiet and select families. 



43 

Lang Branch. — This is and has been for many years, one 
•of the most popular non-invalid resorts on the Atlantic 
coast. It has many fine hotels and beautiful private 
residences. The bathing is good. A slight bluff over- 
looks the beach and extends along in front of the hotels, the 
principal avenue, Beach Drive, skirts this bluff, giving on 
one side, a fine view of the ocean, and on the other, of the 
splendid cottages and hotels. There are other very good 
drives around and about the place. Elheron is practically 
a part of Long Branch as is also West End, or that portion 
adjacent to the West End hotel. 

Deal. — This summer site has a hard beach with fine surf- 
bathing. It is three miles south of Elberon, and contains 
two hotels. It is a quaint place which has been popular 
as a resort from the early days of summer sea-shore visiting. 

Ashury Park and Ocean Grove. — About a mile south of 
Deal are these well known flourishing places. They are pop- 
ular resorts with a quiet class of people, especially those 
families who are rearing children and who favor temperance 
and religious principles. At the latter place a camp-meeting 
is annually held for ten days in August. Ocean Grove is an 
incorporated association while Asbury Park is an organized 
town. Both places have good beaches, bathing, boating and 
fishing. They are separated by Wesley Lake, which has re- 
cently been spanned by two iron foot-bridges. This is a 
shallow body of fresh water affording good boating for child- 
ren and ladies. Its shores are lined with terraces and neat 
and pretty cottages. 

Ocean Beach. — This place of resort, on the Shark river, is 
two miles south of Ocean Grove. It has a number of 
good hotels, boarding places, cottages and large villas ; the 
lots are large, and the residences widely scattered. Its 
beach affords fine bathing. 



44 

Key East. — Opposite Ocean Beach, on Shark river, is a 
new and growing place by this name with a large first-class 
hotel and boarding places. 

Ccymo, is also a very pretty spot with several cottages but 
no hotels. It is just south of Ocean Beach. 

Spring Lake. — Then come Brighton, now called North 
Spring Lake^ and Spring Lake, the latter being a fashionable 
and lovely resort. It takes its name from a beautiful 
body of clear fresh water which abounds with black-bass 
and pickerel and is surrounded by shady walks, which 
add greatly to the attractions of the place ; it is a popular 
boating lake, even for ladies and children. There are large 
hotels and many fine cottages at these places. 

Sea- Girt. — A mile south of Spring Lake we come to 
another charming spot, Sea- Girt, forty-one miles from New 
York. It contains large choice hotels and boarding places, 
and has a fine bathing beach. It is renowned for having 
been the sea-side summer home of Commodore Stockton 
and his family during his lifetime. 

Manasquan. — A mile further south, is the old village 
of Manasquan, which has two or more hotels, and is annually 
increasing in popularity. 

BrielJe. — This is a pleasant resort fifty-nine miles from 
New York ; it has a fine beach, good drives, and a first-class 
hotel and cottages. 

Point Pleasant. — A few miles south of this place is Point 
Pleasant, one of the oldest resorts on the Jersey coast, with 
a permanent population of about one thousand. It is situ- 
ated at the head of Barnegat Bay, which is a body of water 
extending a long distance down the New Jersey coast, very 
similar in nature and situation to the Great South Bay on 
the Long Island coast. 

Bay Head, Mantoloking, Chadwicks, Lavallette, Berkeley, 



45 

Sea-Side Parh^ Barnegat City^ Beach Haven^ Bonds and 
Sea Haven are places situated on the long sand bar which 
encloses the bay. They have surf and still-water bathing, 
boating, fishing and good hotels, cottages and boarding 
places. Island Beach, situated at the mouth of an inlet, has 
not improved very much, but will in time. 

Manchester^ Island Heights, Torn's River, Bayville, Barne- 
gat, Manahawhin and Tucherton are located on the other 
side of Barnegat Bay, on the mainland. These are places 
of more or less note, affording good accommodations to 
summer visitors. 

Atlantic City. — This is a very popular cosmopolitan sea- 
side city and resting place, especially with Philadelphians, 
being about sixty-five miles from their city, and easy of ac- 
cess. It is well patronized in summer, from June to October, 
and in winter from January to April. From New York 
the distance is one hundred aiid twenty-eight miles. It is 
located on an island, Absecom Beach ten miles in length, 
and has a permanent population of eight thousand. A salt 
meadow extends about five miles back to Absecom where 
the sand bluffs begin. It has many good hotels, with numer- 
ous cottages of all classes, while the city is underdrained 
and has a cautious and efficient Board of Health. Fishing, 
gunning, surf-bathing, hot salt-water baths in some of the 
hotels, and sun parlors (for winter) are among its advant- 
ages. The soil is porous and sandy and dries off quickly 
after a rainfall. Its winter climate is comparatively mild, as 
the Gulf Stream approaches the coast in this vicinity. 

Longpori. — Just below Atlantic City, is a quiet, growing 
place known as Longport. It is free from the dissipations 
of some of the larger and more frequented places. 

Ocean City. — This is a small place of a few years' growth, 
situated on an island some miles south of Atlantic City. 



46 

Sea-Isle City. — Another pretty little sea-side retreat, 
some miles further south, with a good beach, bathing and 
fishing. It has two hotels and a number of cottages. 

AngJesea. — About ten miles south of this place we come 
to AngJesea, which is about an equal distance north of 
Cape May. This is a quiet little resort where the fishing 
and bathing and boarding accommodations are good. Many 
fishing parties find summer recreation here. 

Holly City Beach. — A few miles south of Anglesea is a 
quiet little resting place known as Eolly City Beach. 

Cape May. — At the extreme southern point of New 
Jersey, at the entrance of Delaware Bay, is Cape May City 
which is probably the oldest fashionable resort along the 
coast. It has the finest bathing beach in the country. This 
is five miles long and very hard, its excellence being known 
all over the land. The surf is very good and bathing can 
be indulged in at any time. About noon is the usual bath- 
ing hour adopted by custom. The permanent population 
is about fifteen hundred. It is a favorite resort with 
Philadelphians, Baltimoreans and southern people. There 
are several large hotels here which are very near the 
beach, and a great number of smaller boarding places. 
This place, like Atlantic City, is now considerably resorted 
to during the winter months. 

Cape May Point. — This is on the Delaware Bay side of the 
Cape. It was started some years ago as a religious summer 
meeting retreat, but this feature has been abandoned and 
now it is popular as a health resort with fine hotels. 

Rehohoth Beach. — Across Delaware Bay, opposite to Cape 
May, is Cape Henlopen, on the Delaware coast. A fine 
beach begins here which extends twelve miles to the south 
without a break. Rehohoth Beach is a place of resort five 
miles south of che Cape on this beach. It was started as 



47 

a Methodist camp-meeting ground, but has outgrown this 
feature and is now in favor and popularity as a summer 
pleasure and health resort. The surf is fine and the bath- 
ing safe. There are a number of fresh-water lakes in the 
vicinity, which supply good drinking water and also good 
boating and fishing. There are several good hotels and 
numerous boarding places and cottages. 

Ocean City, Md. — Some miles further down the coast we 
come to Ocean City, a delightful place, situated on a strip of 
sand lying off the Maryland coast. It has good surf-bathing 
and boarding accommodations. 

As we travel southward along the coast we come to a 
number of places which are resorted to during the entire 
year. In the summer months, principally by the residents 
of the neighboring cities ; and in the colder weather by 
persons driven southward by the rigorous winters of the 
more northern states. 

Chesapeake Bay. 

On the irregular shores of this beautiful body of water 
numerous health stations are located, some of which are open 
throughout the year. The most important of these are the 
followino" : 

Bay Ridge. — This place is situated on a point of land 
about three miles down the Bay from Annapolis, Md. It has 
much natural beauty and is easy of access from Richmond, 
Washington, Baltimore, Philadelphia and New York. There 
is here good bathing and fishing and a large hotel. 

Old Point Comfort. — This beautiful and historic spot, is 
situated on the Virginia shore of the Chesapeake at the en- 
trance of Hampton Roads, about thirteen miles north of 
Norfolk. Its far-famed hotel is but one hundred yards from 
Fortress Monroe, the largest fort in the United States, which, 



48 

with the surrounding waters and neighboring section of 
country was the scene of many important military engage- 
ments during the Revolutionary war and the late Rebellion. 
The fort is a source of interest to visitors to the " Point." 
This is a fine place to visit at any part of the year, but es- 
pecially during the spring and fall months when the climate 
is particularly delightful. 

Newport News. — This is a popular new place situated on 
Hampton Roads about eight miles above Old Point Comfort, 
and like the latter, it is a delightful "middle ground " as to 
location and climate, the average winter temperature being 
47° Fahrenheit. The scenery is attractive and the boat- 
ing, driving, bathing, fishing and gunning are good. There 
is a new large first-class hotel at this place. 

Virginia Beach. — Seventeen miles east of Norfolk we find 
the new place known as Virginia Beach, which is situated 
immediately below Cape Henry on the Atlantic coast. It 
has a good beach, surf-bathing and a large hotel. It 
is well patronized as a summer resort by residents of the 
southern cities. 

Charlestcm. — From Virginia we do not pass any sea-side 
places of particular note, as we journey southward along the 
coast, till we come to Charleston, S. C. The climate of this 
vicinity is claimed to be very similar to that of the favorite 
resorts of southern Europe. The harbor of Charleston is 
very fine and contains Sullivan's Island which is a popular 
retreat, many northern invalids spending the winter here. 
Mount Pleasant is another such place in the harbor ; it is a 
favorite summering place for the inhabitants of the city. 

Savannah. — The model southern city of Georgia, is known 
world-wide for its beauty, comfort and healthfulness. It is 
not situated on the sea-coast, but on the bank of the Savan- 
nah river about eighteen miles from its mouth. 



49 

Brunswick-hy-the-Sea. — Brunswick, Oa., has been rechris- 
tened by this title and is becoming a favorite winter resort 
on account of the beauty of its scenery, its equable salubri- 
ous climate and its nearness to the sea. Excellent accommo- 
dations are afforded by its beautiful new hotel completed last 
year ; there are also other houses where guests are well 
provided for. The pine woods in the vicinity add to the 
healthfulness of the place. 

FLORIDA AND THE GULF COAST. 

Fernandina. — Florida has a number of sea-side resorts ; 
the most northern is Fernandina on the eastern coast, situa- 
ted on the Amelia Island at the mouth of the Amelia River, 
about fifty miles north of Jacksonville. The winter climate is 
mild and equable. It is an old town with a permanent 
population of three thousand. It has a good beach and 
excellent hotel accommodations. 

Fort George Island. — This is a wooded, lovely spot at the 
mouth of the St. John's River, with shell roads cut through 
the natural forest of live-oak, magnolia and palmetto trees. 
There is a good hotel here with gunning, fishing and boating 
and never failing springs of the purest water. 

Pahlo Beach. — This is a new sea-side resort on the coast, 
a few miles south of the mouth of the St. John's river. It 
has a fine hotel and cottages; the hunting, bathing 
and fishing are good, and its beach is unexcelled. It 
stretches away in an unbroken line to the town of St. 
Augustine. 

St. Augustine. — Which is situated on the Florida coast 
about thirty-three miles from Jacksonville, is the oldest 
settlement of European origin in the United States, and has 
many landmarks of great interest, which are the remains of 
the Spanish settlement started in 1565. Its permanent 



50 

population is about two thousand, and this is quadrupled 
during the winter months. The climate is mild and equable, 
and the hotels are first-class, and some magnificently fitted up 
with the latest improvements and conducted in the best north- 
ern style. There are several places south of St, Augustine, 
situated on lagoons or arms of the sea. These are New 
Britain^ Daytona and Port Orange on the Halifax River ; 
New Smyrna, on the Hillsboro River; and Titusville and 
. Rock Ledge, on the Indian River. 

Key West. — Florida has a long stretch of coast line on the 
Gulf of Mexico. Key West is situated on an island of the 
same name, at the southern end of Florida, at the entrance 
of the Gulf. It has a population of seven thousand, being 
next in size to the celebrated city of Jacksonville, on the 
St. John's River, some miles back from the sea. The 
climate of Key West is thoroughly tropical. 

Tampa. — This town on the west coast of Florida, is an ex- 
cellent winter resting place. The scenery hereabout is 
beautiful, the fishing excellent, the game in abundance 
and the vegetation tropical. The hotels are good. 

Cedar Keys. — This is a flourishing village with a popula- 
tion of seven hundred ; it has a fine mild climate. It does 
not offer, however, very comfortable quarters for invalids. 

Pensacola. — This place situated on a bay of the same name, 
is the largest town of western Florida and has a population of 
twelve thousand. Its winter climate is mild and equable ; 
the surrounding country is sandy and covered with a pine 
growth. 

Mobile. — A few miles west of Pensacola, is Mobile, Aln.^ 
situated on the Mobile River near its entrance into the bay of 
the same name. It is a beautiful city with a pleasant winter 
climate, although considered somewhat damp. Its hotels 
are good. 



51 

Along the Gulf coast there are a number of smaller 
places of resort mostly of local interest. 

Galveston. — This, the largest city and commercial metrop- 
olis of Texas, is situated on the north-eastern end of 
Galveston Island, at the mouth of the bay of the same name. 
The city is finely laid out, and some of its streets are lined 
with oleander trees. It has a population of thirty-five or 
forty thousand, and affords good hotel accommodations. 
The island upon which it is situated is twenty-eight miles 
long, with an excellent beach throughout its entire length, 
easily accessible and quite adjacent to the built-up portion 
of the city. Daily lines of steamers run from Galveston to 
Indianola and Corpus Christi, pleasant places, located on 
the Gulf coast some miles further south. Steamers also 
run to New Orleans. 

THE PACIFIC COAST. 

Many delightful sea-side resorts are found upon the west- 
ern coast of the United States. The most noted of these 
are situated in California, the great Pacific State which has 
a sea-coast equal in extent to the distance, on the Atlantic 
sea-board, from Massachusetts to Georgia. 

San Diego. — The most southern of these resting places, 
situated about fifteen miles north of the Mexican border, 
is this beautiful, flourishing and salubrious city of San Diego. 
It has the finest harbor on the Pacific coast, south of San 
Francisco, with its large bay and arms. Its climate is won- 
derfully bracing and equable, the mean temperature being 
sixty-two degrees, seldom rising to eighty or sinking to the 
freezing point. The air is particularly dry and free from the 
fogs which are found farther north along the coast ; the aver- 
age rain-fall is but ten inches per annum. The first Fran- 
ciscan mission was established some miles north of the 



52 

present flourishing city of San Diego, and the few remaining 
houses of the mission are called the "old town" of San 
Diego. The dry spring-like climate all the year round, 
induced many persons to locate here with their families for 
their health, and, as the years passed, the invalids have been 
restored to health, engaged actively in business and be- 
come permanent residents. Across the harbor, situated on 
a peninsula, is the new resort known as Coronado Beach. 
It has a fine hard beach and good surf bathing the entire year. 
A magnificent hotel is situated on a low bluff overlooking 
the beach ; a number of pretty cottages have also been 
erected here. A ferry connects the place with San Diego. 
It is a resort suitable for any season of the year, and is 
destined to rival other American health stations on the 

Pacific coast. 

Santa Monica. — This is a delightful sea-side resort, where, 
as at other Southern Californian places, bathing may be in- 
dulged in during summer and winter ; it has a fine beach and 
is very near to the Sierra Santa Monica, a range which lends 
beauty to the scene. It has an excellent hotel situated on a 
bluff above the beach. This place is about sixteen miles 
from Los Angeles. 

Santa Barbara. — Like many other cities of California, this 
has grown out of an old Spanish Mission. It was founded 
during the last century, by the brave Franciscans, who have 
left many traces of their former abode. It is beautifully 
situated in a sheltered nook on the coast and is pro- 
tected on the north by ranges of mountains. It is one of 
the most popular watering places on the Pacific coast. Its 
climate is mild and equable ; the average summer tempera- 
ture is seventy degrees, and in winter it is fifty-three degrees. 
It is a spot highly favored by nature, fruit and flowers grow- 
ing the entire year, mountains form the background, while 



53 

sea-ward is the charming view of the islands of Santa Cruz, 
Santa Rosa, Santa Miguel, and Ana Capa. The hotels are 
first-class, as they are at all these popular California resorts. 

San Luis Obispo. — This is a place with a population of 
three thousand. It is built on the site of an old mission ; 
and contains one of the largest hotels on this coast. The 
climate is delightful. 

Monterey. — Which is situated at the southern extremity of 
the bay of the same name, is an interesting old Spanish town. 
It was the centre of commercial enterprise and the seat of 
government in the early history of California, but its glory 
waned as San Francisco grew into importance. During the 
last few years, Del Monte, its near neighbor, has become a 
popular health resort as it deserves to be on account of its 
natural beauty and its delightful, dry climate, as also for its 
fine beach and surf Its large new hotel is luxurious, with 
extended grounds, ornamented lawns, flower-beds and 
woody retreats, fine bathing-houses on the beach and other 
surroundings, to make it attractive. There are also in the 
town of Monterey hotels and boarding places. Two miles 
to the south is Pacific Grove, which has a fine hotel. It is 
growing in popularity as a summer retreat. 

Santa Cruz. — Situated at the northern extremity of the bay, 
opposite the town of Monterey, is one of the most popular 
watering places of California. It is pleasantly located, be- 
ing protected from the winds by the forest-covered Santa 
Cruz mountains. It is a winter as well as a summer retreat, 
the climate always being mild and genial, but sometimes 

foggy- 

Along the railroad to San Francisco north of Santa Cruz 
is fine scenery and forests of the large red-wood trees ; many 
interesting and pleasant places of resort are here, located 
a few miles from the coast ; they are easy of access from 



54 

San Francisco, which city has also a number of small towns 
in its immediate neighborhood suitable for health and 
pleasure, on salt-water bays. 

Sa7i Rafael. — This is such a place near the west shore of San 
Pablo Bay. It is well protected by mountains on the north 
and west, and the air is very bracing, and free from the fogs 
and winds which prevail at San Francisco and render it un- 
suitable as a place of residence for the majority of pulmo- 
nary invalids. 

San Francisco, and Oakland across San Francisco 
Bay, are mild, cool and delightful all winter, except 
somewhat foggy at certain times, with cool afternoon winds 
in summer from the Pacific. They are good cities for busi- 
ness men who require an even climate to live in. In their 
environs are many lovely villas and retreats, all having 
merit for persons with weak constitutions as well as for 
the healthy. Many salubrious and lovely valleys are also 
found all along the northern California coast. 

Clatsop Beach. — The great watering place of Oregon, is 
situated at the mouth of the Columbia River, across the 
promontory^ from Astoria and not far from Portland, the 
chief city of the state. 

riicaco. — Passing further up the coast we come to Ihvaco, 
Washington Territory, which lies about one hundred miles 
northwest of Portland. This place has a fine beach, good 
bathing, fishing and hunting and a cosy hotel. 

There are many spots on the coast of Washington Territory 
which would make delightful summer resorts, Grays Harbor 
and iS^oa/it^a/er^a^/are such places. They present fine beaches 
and are visited by residents of the interior in search of sea- 
side pleasures ; and will probably some day become fine 
watering places. At present, the most important sea-side 
resorts in the Territory are located on that wonderful inland 



55 

sea, Puget Sound, which has been aptly called the "Mediter- 
ranean of the Pacific." This body of water communicates 
with the ocean by means of the Strait of Juan de Fuca, and 
presents extremely fine scenery, with towering- mountains on 
the east and west. Its climate is delightful, being mild, 
genial and salubrious during the entire year. It con- 
tains numerous beautiful wooded islands which vary from 
ten to thirty miles in length ; its waters abound in fish, 
which, it is stated, represent eighty-five different varieties, 
while the lakes and mountain streams in the vicinity furnish 
fine fresh-water fishing, and the forests near at hand, 
excellent hunting. The bays and inlets which form the 
outline of the Sound afford good boating and yachting ; 
and on their shore are a number of pleasant towns, where 
one finds the energy and spirit characteristic of the great 
and rapidly growing Northwest. 

Olympia. — The Territorial capital, is a fine town in the 
neighborhood of which Is much to attract summer visitors 
and sportsmen. 

Tacoma and Seattle. — The same is true of Tacoma and 
Seattle, both of which towns possess features calculated 
to make them attractive summer resorts ; good boarding 
accommodations are found at all of these places, while at 
Tacoma a very fine hotel has been erected and the recent 
growth of the place has been phenomenal. 

Port Townsend. — This is another town on the Sound ; and 
is the port of entry for the Puget Sound customs-district. 

Whatcom. — Situated on the eastern shore of the Sound, 
some miles north, is the point of departure for persons 
desiring to visit the islands of the San Juan group, which 
lie ten or fifteen miles distant. 

Victoria. — Situated on the southeastern part of Vancou- 
ver's Island, on the Strait of Juan de Fuca, is a British town 



56 

with several fine hotels. It lies very near the place just de- 
scribed, and may be reached by steamers from Puget 
Sound, or by ocean steamers from Portland, Oregon. 
EsquimauU, three miles from Victoria, is the head-quarters 
of the English Pacific squadron, and the landing place for 
the ocean and sound steamers. 

Vancouver. — At the terminus of the Canadian Pacific 
Railroad, a most flourishing town has, within a few years, 
sprung up, under the name of Vancouver. A daily line of 
steamers run during the summer between it and Victoria. 
Its climate is bracing and like the latter place is suitable for 
tourists and health seekers during the hot season of more 
southern climes. 

Metlakatla or Metlaficatlah. — This mission town or vil- 
lage, established by a Mr. Duncan in his work of educating 
and reforming the wild and savage Indian tribes of this 
region will be found a pleasant place to visit or to remain 
over one trip of the Alaskan steamers, if quietness and rest 
be desired by those health-seekers who are fond of fishing 
and gunning. 

Alaska. — A voyage to this distant part of our country is 
undertaken as a rule during the warm months. The 
Pacific Steamship Company run fast steamers for tour- 
ists only ; their freight vessels continuing their trips all 
winter. The country is primitive throughout, and those 
who desire andean endure a "roughing" trip, may well 
seek health by a reconnoitre in Alaska. There are several 
places, however, upon its coast pleasant to visit during the 
summer months, such as Fort Tongas, Fort Wrangell, 
Sitka, on Baranoff Island, Douglass Island, and Juneau City. 
Reference will be made to these places in the chapter de- 
voted to "Trips upon Ocean, Lake and River." 



CHAPTER IV. 

FRESH-WATER RESORTS. 

Lakes of New England — Lake Regions of New York and New Jersey — Thou- 
sand Islands — Lake Ontario — Niagara Falls — Lake Erie — Lake Huron— Lake 
Michigan — Lake Superior — Lakes of the Northwest — California Mountain 
Lakes — Great Salt Lake — Lakes of Florida. 

There are numerous fresh-water resorts in the United 
States, most of which are located upon lakes, the latter pre- 
senting every imaginable variety in shape, size, location, al- 
titude, climate, scenery, nature of waters and kinds of fish 
contained therein. 

Lakes affect the climate of the locality in which they are 
situated by cooling the atmosphere, and in the case of large 
bodies of water, by purifying the air ; moreover they 
afford much amusement and sport in the way of fishing, boat- 
ing and bathing, and usually they greatly add to the beauty 
of the scenery. The larger lakes of the United States are 
located mostly in the northern section of the country, the ex- 
ceptions being the lagoons in Louisiana and Florida, and 
the lakes in the highlands of California. We will give a 
brief description of the most important of these places, 
beginning with those located in the New England States 
and proceeding westward. 

Moosehead Lake. — This is the largest of the many lakes in 
Maine (thirty-five miles in length), and is situated "in the 
northern part of the state among the hills on the verge of 
the great Maine forest. Its elevation is over one thousand 
feet above the sea, with which it is connected by the Ken- 
nebec River. Its waters are deep and clear, containing 

(57) 



58 

trout and other kinds of fish, while the surrounding forests 
are inhabited by a variety of game. On the southern 
shore of the lake the small village of Greenville is located, 
where there are several hotels and boarding places ; from 
this point a small steamer runs daily to the other end of 
the lake, and also to Mt. Kineo, a small elevation overlook- 
ing the lake on its western shore, at the base of which the 
best hotel of the vicinity is situated. At the north-eastern 
end of the lake is Mt. Katahdi7i, (5385 feet high), from the 
summit of which a very fine view of the lake and the sur- 
rounding country can be obtained. Trips of exploration 
may be made, with the assistance of guides, into the adja- 
cent forests and upon the rivers and lakes of this district. 

The Rangeljj or Androscoggi7i Lakes. — These are located in 
the northwestern part of Maine, twelve to fifteen hundred 
feet above the level of the sea. They are six or eight in num- 
ber and are connected by streams so as to make a continu- 
ous water-way fifty miles in length ; the lowest lake of the 
chain, Umhagog.. extends into New Hampshire. This re- 
gion is deeply wooded and in most parts wild and uninhab- 
ited by man, it being the home of the lynx, deer, bear, moose 
and caribou, while in the lakes, trout, salmon and other fish 
are found in abundance. The lakes are surrounded by 
mountains, some of which attain a height of five thousand 
feet. Comfortable hotels are located at intervals along the 
shores, while persons who desire to camp out find pleasant 
spots for this purpose. Several small steamers ply these 
waters during the season. This section is a favorite region 
for hunters and sportsmen. 

Sebago Lake. — Which lies in the southwestern part of 
Maine, about seventeen miles from Portland, is a deep, 
clear body of water, twelve miles in length and connected 
with Long Lake, (fourteen miles long), by the Songo River. 



59 

Steamers make daily trips through the lakes to Harrison at 
the northern end of Long Lake, a distance of thirty-four 
miles. There are hotels at this place and in the neighbor- 
hood, Bridgeton Centre, but one mile distant, is a delight- 
ful summer stopping place. 

Lake WinnepesaMhee. — The largest lake in New Hamp- 
shire, is situated in the centre of the state south of the White 
Mountains ; it is a beautiful body of water, twenty-five miles 
long, irregular in shape, live hundred feet above the sea- 
level and contains two hundred and seventy-four islands. 
There are good hotels in the vicinity. Centre Harbor is a 
favorite place of resort, situated at the head of the lake ; it 
has excellent boarding accommodations. Squam Lake, a 
lovely sheet of water, situated about two miles and a half 
northwest of the village of Centre Harbor, is six miles in 
length, studded with islands and abounding with fish. 

Lake Dunmore, Vt. — This is a small, extremely pretty 
lake, situated at the base of the Green Mountains eight miles 
from Middlehury, at which place there are good hotels. 
There is a summer hotel or two and some cottages situated 
on the west shore of the lake. 

Lake Memphra^nagog. — Which is situated partly in Ver- 
mont and partly in Canada, is thirty miles in length, very 
picturesquely located and contains a number of islands. 
Neioport, at the head of the lake, offers attractions to visitors; 
pleasant hotels are found at other points along its shores. 

WiUoughbij Lake^ Vt. — This is a pretty little lake, seven 
miles in length and surrounded by mountains ; there 
is a good hotel in its vicinity. 

Many lakes are contained in New York State and a great 
portion of its boundary line is formed by these bodies of 
water. 

Lake Champlain. — Which lies between New York and 



6o 

Vermont in a valley enclosed on the east by the Green Moun- 
tains and on the west by the Adirondack Mountains, is a fine 
body of water, one hundred and twenty six miles in length. 
Its shores are irregular, forming many picturesque bays, 
while its surface is studded with about fifty islands. It is 
navigable throughout its entire extent by vessels of consid- 
erable size. There are fine steamers making connection 
with the different points on the lake. Whitehall is located 
at the head or southern extremity of the lake and is a lum- 
bering village with a population of about four thousand 
five hundred. It is about seventy-seven miles from Albany. 
Fort Tlconderoga, built by the French in 1756, is twenty- 
four miles down the lake, at its confluence with the outlet 
of Lake George. It has a prominent place in the history 
of this country, but only the ruins of the fort now remain. 
Port Kent, N. Y., on the west shore, ninety miles north of 
Whitehall, is a point of entrance to the Adirondacks. Platts- 
bwg, N. Y., some miles north, is a pretty village at the bor- 
der of the Adirondack wilderness, where the Saranac River 
flows into the lake. Burlmgton^ Vt.^ on the eastern shore is 
a flourishing city of about fifteen thousand inhabitants. 

Lake George, — This is one of the most beautiful and pop- 
ular lake resorts in this country. It is about thirty-five miles 
in length, surrounded by high hills and beautiful scenery, and 
its bosom is decked with numerous little islands, commonly 
supposed to correspond in number with the days of the 
year. A steamer runs between Caldioell at the southern 
end of the lake and Baldwin at the northern extremity. 
Good hotels are to be found at these places, as well as at 
Boltcni and Hague, villages located on the western shore. 

The Lakes of the Adirondack Region. — These are numer- 
ous, being about one thousand in number, with an average 
altitude of fifteen hundred feet above the sea-level. They are 



6i 

located in the valleys between the mountains, and vary in 
size from those twenty miles in length to others having 
merely the area of ponds. These lakes, which are connected 
by streams, are the chief roads of travel through the moun- 
tains, trips being made, with the assistance of guides, in 
light bark canoes. The largest lakes are Long Lake, Ful- 
ton, Tapper and Saranac Lakes; Lakes Sanford, Golden, 
Raquette, Eckford, Henderson, Forked, Pleasant and Newcomh. 
At or near the most of these, hotel accommodations may be 
found. Some of the smaller lakes are The Luzerne, Para- 
dox, Schroo7i, Blue Mountain, Ausable, Avalanche, Rwxnd, 
St. Regis, Plseco, Ahpersand, Beach's and Rainbow. Lake 
Perkins, the highest, attains an altitude of about four thou- 
sand feet. This region is a favorite resort with sportsmen, 
and for parties desiring to camp-out, but the hotels offer 
excellent fare for those unable to bear the exposures of 
camp life. 

There are several fine lakes east of the lower portion of 
the Hudson River. 

Lake Mohensick. — This is a pretty body of water, six miles 
east of Peekskill, nine hundred feet above the surface of 
the river, and surrounded by beautiful scenery. 

Mohopac Lake. — Which is fourteen miles distant, is one of 
a group of twenty-two lakes. It is situated about one thou- 
sand feet above the level of the sea and is quite popular, 
with ample hotels and cottages. The other lakes of this 
group are visited for health and offer good boarding accom- 
modations. 

Lake Ronkonkoma. — In the central portion of Long Island 
(about fifty miles from New York City), there is a very 
pretty body of fresh water known as Lake Ronkonkoma ; 
its waters are clear and well supplied with fish, and its 
shores afford good bathing. It is quite an attractive 



62 

place, particularly for sportsmen and artists. It has good 
hotels. 

In northern New Jersey, among the highlands, we find a 
lake region where the summer climate is pleasant and 
bracing. 

Budds'' Lake. — Which is also known as Lake Senecawana, 
is situated in this region on the summit of a range known 
as Schooley's Mountains. The lake is very beautiful, being 
deep and clear and affords good fishing and boating. It is 
at a convenient distance from New York City. The accom- 
modations are very good. 

Hopatcong Lake. — Situated a few miles to the east, is a 
beautiful body of water, nine miles in length, dotted with 
islands, and containing large quantities of fish. There are 
several good hotels here. Its scenery and the comparative 
nearness to New York City (fifty miles) combine to make 
it a desirable place to visit, especially with persons con- 
nected with that city. 

Oreemcood Lake. — This lake region extends northward 
over the boundary line into New York State where we find 
the pretty Greenwood Lake, one of a cluster of beautiful 
lakelets, which, as its name suggests, is surrounded by 
mountains and woodlands ; its length is ten miles, and it 
affords excellent boating and fishing. Good stopping places 
are found in its vicinity ; it is a favorite resort for sportsmen, 
as is also the Shawangunk Region, which lies to the north, 
bordering on the Hudson between Kingston and Pough- 
keepsie and extending through Ulster, Sullivan and a part of 
Delaware Counties, New York. There are many pleasant 
boarding places scattered through the region and the adja- 
cent Wallkill Valley. Lake Molionk. — The Shawangunk 
Mountains are a small range extending through Ulster 
County ; at their northern extremity, a few miles west of the 



63 

Hudson, are two beautiful lakes. One of these, Lake 
MoTionh, near the summit of the Sky Top Peak, at an 
altitude of one thousand two hundred feet above the sea, 
is a lovely mountain lakelet about one-half a mile in length, 
clear as crystal and surrounded by rock formation and 
picturesque scenery. The accommodations are desirable 
at the hotel on the lake ; this is a favorite resting place 
for persons of refined and quiet tastes. 

Lake Minnewasha. — Another mountain gem, is located 
a few miles to the south-east (about ninety miles from 
New York City), this is one thousand eight hundred feet 
above the sea-level, and has a cool and pleasant sum- 
mer climate, excellent hotel accommodations and fine 
scenery. 

Lake Otsego. — Travelling further northward we reach 
Otsego Lake, which is located in the county of the same name, 
about ninety miles west of Albany, in a section of country 
rendered classical by the writings of J. Fenimore Cooper. 
His description of the lake reads as follows: "A broad 
sheet of water, so placid that it resembles a bed of the pure 
mountain atmosphere compressed into a setting of hills and 
woods. Nothing is wanted but ruined castles and recollec- 
tions to raise it to the level of the Rhine." This lake is the chief 
source of the Susquehanna River ; it is nine miles in length. 
Cooperstown is located at its southern point ; this is a fa- 
vorite summer resort, and was at one time the home of 
the author, in honor of whom it was named. Many places 
of interest are found in the neighborhood. 

Schuyler^s Lake. — This is a few miles west ; it is connected 
by a stage line with Otsego Lake. It is a fine body of water, 
three and a half miles in length, surrounded by hills and 
interesting scenery. At its head is the popular summer 
watering place of Richfield Springs, (of which mention is 



64 

made in the chapter on Mineral Springs). The hotels are 
well located and are excellent at this place. 

Trenton Falls. — About fifty miles on to the north-west 
(sixteen miles north of Utica), there is a pleasant spot 
affording good hotel accommodations, known as Trenton 
Falls, situated on the West Canada Creek, an affluent 
of the Mohawk, which is in turn a branch of the Hud- 
son River, The waters of the creek make a descent of 
over three hundred feet in two miles, by a series of cata- 
racts. It is a romantic spot situated at the border of that 
region in northern New York, where nature reigns undis- 
turbed in the "forest primeval," displaying her charms in 
solitude, until they reach their climax in the Adirondack 
lakes and mountains. George William Curtis, in his "Lotus 
Eating," says: "Trenton is the summer-song of rest. 
Beauty and grace are its praises. You hear them from 
those who are either hurrying to the grandeur of Niagara 
or from those who step aside to enjoy the music of 
the greater cataract softened into an exquisite fecho. The 
charm of Trenton is unique, and in some choice niche 
of memory you will lay it aside, not as a sublime statue 
nor prophetic and solemn picture, but a vase most delicate, 
and chased with pastoral tracery." 

The central and western portion of the state of New 
York is a lake region, where these beautiful waters are sur- 
rounded by a rich agricultural country, where mountains, 
cascades and glens, make the scenery charming and romantic. 

Lake Oneida. — The most eastern of these lakes, is a de- 
lightful summering spot. Its waters are filled with fish ; 
its length is twenty-two miles, and it lies eight miles from 
Chittenango Springs. Sylvan Beach is a pretty place sit- 
uated on its shore. It has considerable local popularity, also 
a fine bathing beach and other attractions. The lake con- 



65 

tains two islands, of which tradition says: "When the 
Great Spirit formed the world, His smile rested on the 
waters of the blue Oneida, and Frenchman's Island arose to 
greet if. He laughed, and Lotus Island came up to listen." 

Onondago Lake. — This lies a few miles to the south, it is 
seven miles in length and fish abound therein. Syracuse is 
located on its banks ; this is a prosperous city of about sixty 
thousand inhabitants. 

Skaneateles Lahe. — Situated some miles to the south-west, 
is ten miles in length and nearly nine hundred feet above the 
sea-level. It is surrounded by hills rising over one thousand 
feet above its surface. At the northern end of the lake the 
tpwn of the same name is located, and at the southern end 
is the village of Glen Haven. Both of these places are sum- 
mer recreating points, at which season they are connected by 
a steamboat line. About ten miles south-east of Skaneateles 
Lake is located the pretty little Otisco Lake, surrounded by 
towering hills. 

Lahe Owasco. — A few miles to the west, is charmingly sit- 
uated, and is twelve miles in length. Its waters are very 
clear and are filled with fish. The attractive city of Au- 
burn is situated at the mouth of the lake. It has an eleva- 
tion of twelve hundred feet above the sea-level, and a pop- 
ulation of about thirty thousand. 

Lake Cayuga. — Located several miles further west, is a 
long, narrow body of water, its length being thirty-eight 
miles. It is thus described by A. B. Sweet, in his charming 
poem of "Frontenac:" 

" Sweet sylvan lake ! beside thee now 
Green hamlets point their spires to Heaven ; 
Rich meadows wave, broad grain-fields bow, 
The axe resounds, the plow is driven : 
Down verdant slopes roam herds to drink , 
Flocks strew, like spots of snow, thy brink ; 



66 

The frequent farm-house greets the sight, 
Mid falling harvest's scythes are bright ; 
The watch-dog's bark sounds faint from far ; 
Shakes the ear the mill-wheel's jar ; 
The steamer, like a gliding bird, 
Stems the rich emerald of thy wave ; 
And the gay song and laugh are heard. 
But all is o'er the Indian's grave ! " 

It holds abundant supplies of fish, and it affords good 
bathing, sailing and rowing. The shores are dotted at 
intervals with hamlets and towns, most of which offer 
attractions and good accommodations to visitors. At the 
head of the lake, the beautiful town of Ithaca is situated, 
the site of Cornell University. At this point the scenery is 
very picturesque, there being fifteen waterfalls and cascades 
in the vicinity. Sheldrake on the western shore, is a popu- 
lar place with good hotel accommodations. 

Lake jS'eneca.— Which comes next in order of location, is 
about forty miles in length, its waters are very deep and well 
supplied with fish ; the surrounding scenery is fine. Geneva 
is a pleasant well-appointed town, located on the west 
shore of the lake, the town of Waterloo is situated near the 
outlet and the village of Wathins at its head. 

Watkins Glen. — Here the famous Glen begins and 
follows a tortuous course of three miles. " Properly 
speaking it is a series of glens rising one above the other, 
forming a succession of rocky arcades, galleries and grot- 
toes, subterranean at times and again widening out into 
vast amphitheatres, presenting views of wildness and 
beauty and vistas of enchanting loveliness. A limpid 
mountain stream bubbling out from rock-bound springs 
threads its serpentine way through the gorge undergoing 
in its course all the picturesque variations of torrent and 
eddy, cascade and rapids." There is a good hotel in the 
Glen, and others in the town. 



67 

Keuha or Crooked Lake. — Which is twenty-two miles long 
is divided into two branches by a ridge of land called "The 
Bluff," The lake is in a grape and wine producing region ; 
the hills on its banks are vine-clad. Hammondspoi't at the 
head, Pe7in Yan at the outlet, and other places along its 
shores afford suitable conveniences for summer visitors. 
These various points are connected by steamers plying along 
the lake. The boating, sailing, bathing and fishing are 
good. 

Ganandaigua Lake. — This lies still further west is sixteen 
miles long, it is narrow and deep, and situated in the 
midst of fine scenery and a rich grape-raising country. The 
banks of the lake are dotted with fine residences. The vil- 
lage of Ganandaigua, located near the outlet, has a popula- 
tion of about five thousand and is a favorite place of sum- 
mer retreat, as are also Seneca Point and WoodviUe. Still 
further west-ward is the group of small lakes which lies in 
the valley of the Genesee River, some miles south of 
Rochester. These lakelets are the Honeoye., Gcmesus and 
Hemlock. They are beautifully situated and offer many 
attractions. 

Lake Ghautauqua. — The most western lake in New York 
State, is located in the county of the same name, in the ex- 
treme south-western portion of the state. It is eighteen 
miles in length, fourteen hundred feet above the sea-level 
(Atlantic Ocean) and over seven hundred feet above Lake 
Erie. It is claimed to be the highest navigable lake on this 
continent with the exception of Lake Tahoe, Cal. Its shores 
are dotted with villages and residences, the more important 
points being connected by steamers which ply the lake from 
place to place. Jamestown, located at the southern end or 
outlet, is a town of six hundred inhabitants ; a popular place 
with good hotels and boarding places. Lakewood, also at 



68 

the lower end of the lake, is equally pleasant, as is also May- 
ville, at the head of the lake. Chatauqua is the site of the 
great university for home-study, and the annual rallying 
place of its students. There is much here to attract and 
please, and good accommodations are offered visitors. 

Lake of the Tliousand Isles. — The greater portion of 
the northern boundary line of the State of New York, is 
formed by Lake Ontario and the St. Lawrence River. At the 
point at which their waters blend we find the Lake of the 
Thousand Isles, which extends a distance of over forty miles 
down the river, containing that noted cluster of islands and 
islets, whose number is estimated to exceed that indicated 
in the name, being stated as one thousand six hundred and 
ninety-two, the largest group of river islands in the world ; 
however the Ooland Islands in the Baltic Sea are by far 
more numerous and charming. This portion of the river 
was known to the Indians as Manatoana, or the Garden of 
the Great Spirit. Cooper introduced these islands into 
som-e of the most interesting scenes of his " Pathfinder ; " 
and more recent writers have found much in their beauty 
to admire. 

The islands vary in size and appearance from mere 
projections of rock, a few yards in length, to verdure-cov- 
ered islands, several miles long. Some of these islands 
are owned by private individuals and are the site of 
their summer residences. The inlets and bays between 
the islands and those skirting the shores afford good 
boating and fishing. There are several pleasant places 
resorted to on the Canadian shore. Round Island, situated 
in the American channel of the river, is about a mile in 
length, it is entirely occupied by the Round Island Park, 
which is a lovely spot containing a number of summer 
homes and a fine hotel. Wellesly Island is one of the lar- 



69 

gest of the group and at its head the Thousand Island 
Park is located. This is a Methodist camp-meeting ground, 
with several hundred cottages and comfortable hotels. 
Westminster Parh on the lower end of Wellesly Island is 
a pretty place with a number of summer cottages and an 
excellent hotel ; it is directly opposite the village of Alex- 
andria Bay, which is the most important and popular 
among the Islands ; it is situated on the New York 
shore, on a point of land between two river bays. It 
has a population of about seven hundred. Here there are 
many beautiful summer residences, and a number of fine 
hotels. 

The Lakes of Theresa, about eight miles south-east of 
the village of Alexandria Bay are romantic in scenery and 
rich with fish. 

Clayton, a village on the New York shore, twelve miles 
west of Alexandria Bay, is also a summering place, with 
good hotel accommodations. The boating and fishing in its 
vicinity are excellent. 

Cape Vincent, situated eighteen miles south-west of Clay- 
ton, at the head of the Lake of the Thousand Islands, and 
in sight of the waters of Lake Ontario, is a pleasant place 
with good hotels ; it is particularly frequented by disciples 
of Isaak Walton, the fishing in this vicinity being excellent. 
The more important points in the Thousand Island region 
are connected by steamboat trips. 

LAKE ONTARIO. 

On the shores of Lake OntaHo there are a number of 
summer resorts, many having merely a local popularity. 
The most important places on the Canadian shore are 
Kingston, Toronto and Hamilton. 

Sackett's Harbor. — On the New York shore, near the 



70 

foot of the lake, we find this old settlement ; it is a military 
station, and quite a favorite summer stopping place. Yacht- 
ing, boating, bathing and fishing are some of its attractions. 
Henderson Harbor, eight miles west, is also a pleasant spot. 
Oswego. — Lalce View^ Port Ontario and Mexican Point 
afford good fishing ; they are located on the shore, between 
the last-named place and Oswego. The latter is a handsome, 
pleasantly located city of about twenty-five thousand popu- 
lation. It lies on the shore of the Lake, at the mouth of 
the Oswego River. 

Rochester. — Journeying westward we pass Fairhaven, 
Port Haven, the Bluffs and Sodus Point ; thirty-five miles 
west we come to Charlotte, the port of Rochester, located 
at the mouth of the Genesee river, seven miles from the 
city. In its vicinity there are several popular lake-resorts, 
these are Ontario Beach, Windsor Beach, Lake Bluff] Sea 
Breeze, Irondaquoit Bay, Lake Vieio, Lake Beach. They are 
pleasantly located, have good hotel accommodations and 
excellent boating and fishing. Lakeside and Olcott are de- 
lightful places, located on the shore between this point and 
the mouth of the Niagara river. 

Niagara Falls. — The western boundary of New York 
State is limited by Lake Erie, the waters of which, combined 
with those of Lakes Superior, Michigan, Huron and other 
smaller bodies of water, enter Lake Ontario through the 
Niagara river. At a point in this stream, twenty-two 
miles from Lake Erie and fourteen miles from Lake Onta- 
rio, the waters make the wonderful descent known as Ni- 
agara Falls, which consist of three separate, flowing, plung- 
ing volumes — the "Horse Shoe," on the Canadian side; 
the "American," on the New York side ; and the "Cen- 
tral," between the islands (Lena and Goat) in the river. 
The combined length of these cascades is three thousand 



71 

feet. Numerous attempts have been made to fully de- 
scribe this great natural curiosity, by the best of writers, 
such as Charles Dickens, Anthony Trollope, Mrs. Sigour- 
ney and many others, but they have declared it to be a 
hopeless task, and certainly it is one that we shall not un- 
dertake. There are many places of interest in the neigh- 
borhood of the Falls, and large excellent hotels are found 
on both sides of the river. It has recently been made quite 
free and accessible to all its wonders on the American side 
through the liberality of the State of New York. 

LAKE ERIE. 

Lake Erie is the least beautiful and attractive of the Great 
Lakes, it is three hundred miles long, sixty-five wide and one 
hundred and twenty-five feet deep. There are several places 
of importance located on the United States side of the lake. 

Buffalo. — The city of Buffalo is situated on the foot of the 
lake, at the mouth of the Buffalo river and at the head of 
the Niagara river, about twenty-two miles from the Falls ; 
this is a prosperous place of considerable commercial im- 
portance and has a population of about two hundred and 
forty thousand. Dunkirh, N. Y,, lies forty-two miles west 
on the southern shore of the lake. 

Erie. — The old city of Erie is about fifty miles further 
west ; situated on the arm of land Pennsylvania sends up 
to Lake Erie's southern shore ; this place has a good har- 
bor, excellent hotels, a population of about thirty thousand, 
and is a naval station of some importance. 

Cleveland^ 0. — This beautiful city with wide avenues lined 
with splendid mansions, with over two hundred thousand 
inhabitants, is situated about ninety-five miles west of Erie 
at the mouth of the Cuyahoga river. West of Cleveland 
the coast grows more picturesque, the shore is high and 



72 

precipitous, and several tributary streams enter the lake 
through rocky ravines ; beyond this point is Sandusky, 0., 
located on its lovely bay. The town gradually rises from 
the shore and commands a good view of the bay ; excellent 
hotels are found at this place. 

Put-in-Bay Islands. — About sixteen miles off the coast 
from Sandusky, near the head of Lake Erie, about forty 
miles east of Toledo, there is a group of islands, fifteen or 
more in number, which is known as the Put-in-Bay Islands, 
which are a favorite place of summer resort. The largest 
of the group is Kelly's Island, from which a steamer runs to 
Detroit, Michigan, daily ; a distance of about sixty miles. 
Some of the islands are still uninhabited while others are oc- 
cupied by summer residences. Very large vineyards exist 
on some of the islands and a very fine quality of wine, much 
of it of good medicinal value is produced, from their fruit. 
The larger islands afford good hotel accommodations. Put- 
in-Bay is a favorite fishing ground, it is claimed to be the 
finest in the waters of Lake Erie. 

Lakeside, situated on the shore outside the mouth of 
Sandusky Bay, is a charming place, with good hotel accom- 
modations and several hundred cottages. 

Detroit. — Another fine group of islands is found in the 
Detroit river, one of these, Grosse Isle, twenty miles south 
of Detroit, is a favorite summer retreat for the inhabitants 
of that place. Detroit, delightfully situated on the river of 
the same name is the largest city of Michigan, having a pop- 
ulation of about one hundred and fifty thousand. It is a 
commercial centre of considerable importance. Some miles 
north of this city is St. Glair, Mich., a pleasant resort, situ- 
ated on St. Clair river, amid beautiful surrounding scenery ; 
it is noted for its mineral springs. The vicinity of Detroit 
affords excellent fishing and sporting in its season. The 



73 

flats in many places along the St. Clair are valuable, fine 
villas and cottages having been built in these low lands, 
which do not seem to be unhealthy. Many salt wells and 
salt preparing manufactories abound along this river. 

LAKE HURON. 

This lake extends from the head of St. Clair river 
to the Straits of Mackinaw. Its length is two hun- 
dred and fifty miles ; its width about one hundred miles ; 
its depth varies from one hundred to seven hundred and 
fifty feet, and its altitude is five hundred and seventy-four 
feet above the sea-level. The places of most interest on 
its western or Michigan shore are : Sand Beach, Bay City, 
near the head of Saganaw Bay ; Au Sable, Alpena, on 
Thunder Bay, and Cheboygan. There are other pleasant 
places of resort on the Ontario shores of the Lake. 

Along the north shore we find St. Jose^Ks Island, Drum- 
mond Island, and Great Manitoulin Island. At the north- 
eastern portion of the Lake is Georgian Bay, noted for its 
beautiful islands, which in number and variety are said to 
surpass the Thousand Islands of the St. Lawrence river. 
Places of resort on the shores of the Bay are ; Killarney, 
Parry Sound., Midland, Penetang, and Meadford. 

Mackinaw Island. — At the north-western extremity of 
Lake Huron is Mackinac or Mackinaw Island, situated at 
the entrance of the strait of the same name, which connects 
Lakes Huron and Michigan. It is a delightful and popular 
summer resort, located about two hundred and sixty miles 
north-west of Detroit, and three hundred miles north of 
Chicago. The summer climate is cool, healthful and invig- 
orating. The surrounding waters are filled with fish and 
the natural beauties are notable, the scenery being rocky 
and grand. The hotels are good. The island has an area 



74 

of two thousand acres, of which eight hundred and twenty- 
one have been reserved as a National Park, and another 
hundred as a miHtary reservation. 

LAKE MICHIGAN. 

The shores of this Lake are dotted with pleasant sum- 
mer retreats. Mackinaw City. — On the south side of the 
Straits of Mackinac is Mackinaw City, on the opposite side, 
St. Ignace. 

PetosJcey. — On the east shore of the Lake are a number 
of summering places many of which are located upon two 
beautiful bays ; the more northern of these inlets is Little 
Traverse Bay, upon whose shores we find Petoskey, a town 
of about four thousand inhabitants, having good beaches, 
inclosed by hills, and possessing a cool, healthful summer 
climate. Here are also Harhor Springs., Harbor Point, Bay 
View, a camp-meeting ground and the head-quarters of 
Michigan-Chautauqua interest ; and We-que-ton-sing. All 
of these places afford good entertainment for guests. 

Charlevoix. — This is a beautiful summer resort on the 
lake shore between the two bays mentioned. It lies at the 
mouth of the Pine river, which is the outlet of Pine Lake, 
and affords ample stopping places. 

Traverse City. — The second, larger and more southerly 
bay is the Grand Traverse ; at its head is Traverse City, one 
of the most delightful of the many pleasant spots of this 
region of northern Michigan. Its population is about three 
thousand, and its hotels are good. Other places of resort 
on the shores of this bay are : Old Mission, Neio Mission, or 
Omena., Northport, Norwood, Elk Rapids. These all af- 
ford special attractions to persons in search of a cool, brac- 
ing, summer climate, delightful scenery, hunting and fish- 
ing, and comfortable quarters. 



75 

On the eastern shore of the lake below Grand Traverse 
Bay, are other places such as : Manistee, Muskegon, Grand 
Haven ^ South Haven and Michigan City. 

On the western shore the most southerly point of interest 
is Chicago ; traveling northward we find Evanston, Highland 
Park, Lake Forest, Lake Bluffs, Waukegan, Kenosha, 
Racine., Mihvaukee, Sheboygan., Manitowoc^ and Tico Rivers, 
all pleasant places with good hotels. 

On Green Bay, an arm of the lake, we find the towns of 
Memominee, Marinette and Green Bay. 

LAKE SUPERIOR. 

This is the largest body of fresh water in the world. It 
has a rocky shore line of fifteen hundred miles, which pre- 
sents many delightful summer resorts. Its waters are won- 
derfully clear, very cool, and filled with fish. 

Sault Ste. Marie. — On the St. Mary's river, which car- 
ries the waters of this lake into Lake Huron, is Sault Ste. 
Marie, Mich., a. growing town, pleasantly situated, and 
considerably visited in summer. On the Canadian side of 
the river are several fine trout-fishing localities. 

Pictured Rocks. — The southern shore of the Lake, at its 
eastern extremity, about White Fish Point, presents a suc- 
cession of dreary "sand dunes," or hills, which, about sev- 
enty miles west of the last-named place, give way to that 
famous range of sandstone cliffs known as Pictured Rocks, 
which present most curious forms, produced by the action 
of wave, storm and frost ; and great variety of colors, 
caused by the stains of different minerals. These bluffs 
rise abruptly from the waters edge to the height of three 
hundred to five hundred feet, and extend a distance of five 
miles along the shore. The "Pictures" may be visited from 
the town of Old Munising, which lies a few miles to the 



7^ 

west, on the Munising Bay, behind the shelter of Grand 
Island. 

This region is beautiful in scenery and affords excellent 
opportunities for camping, hunting and fishing. 

Au Train, a few miles further west, situated on the Lake 
shore, is a favorite resort with sportsmen. Thirty miles 
west of Au Train is Marquette, the centre of the iron inter- 
ests of this region. The Bay of Marquette affords good 
boating and fishing. Pleasant excursions may be made to 
places of interest in the vicinity, such as Presque Isle, Mt. 
Mesnard, Granite Point and White Fish Bay. Good ac- 
commodations are found at Marquette ; its summer cHmate 
is cool and bracing. Some miles west of Marquette is 
UAnse, situated at the head of the Keweenan Bay ; still 
further west are the towns of Houghtmi and Hancock, sit- 
uated opposite to each other on Portage Lake in the midst 
of a rich copper mining district. 

Again west of these places we find the town of Ontona- 
gon at the mouth of the river of the same name. Seventy 
miles west of Ontonagon is Ashland, situated on the Che- 
quamegon Bay, an arm of Lake Superior. This place is 
four hundred and eighty-three miles from Chicago and is 
fast becoming a favorite place of resort with tourists and 
sportsmen. Its hotel accommodations are excellent, and 
its summer climate cool and delightful. The town of Bay- 
field, sixteen miles northwest on the shore of the Lake, is a 
pleasant place with good hotels. 

A group of more than twenty islands known as the 
Apostle Islands lie off the coast a few miles to the north- 
east of Bayfield. They present clay and sandstone cliffs 
which have been worn into fantastic shapes by the action 
of water. These islands are for the most part uninhabited, 
the largest, Madeline or La Point Island, is partly cultivated. 



77 

Eighty miles west we find Duluth, the " Zenith City of 
the Unsalted Seas," situated at the head of Lake Michigan, 
the gateway to the great North-West. Its present pop- 
ulation is about thirty thousand, and constantly increasing. 
It affords excellent hotel accommodations, has a cool sum- 
mer climate, and is a favorite summer resort, as is also 
Superior on the opposite shore. The northern or Cana- 
dian shore is not much resorted to, being visited chiefly by 
hunters, trappers, and voyageurs of the Hudson's Bay 
Company, to whom more than half of this shore belongs. 

The most important points are : Fort William, Port 
Arthur on Thunder Bay a good starting point for Manitoba ; 
Neepigon Bay, and Heron Bay. The most important isl- 
ands off this coast are : Isle Royale, Saint Ignace and 
Michipicoton Island. 

Many delightful places of summer resort are found 
throughout the great lake region of northern Michigan, 
Wisconsin, Minnesota and Dakota, portions of which are 
still in a wild natural condition, while other parts are re- 
sorted to principally by sportsmen who find this a rich field. 
Other places hereabouts offer all the conveniences and ac- 
commodations necessary for the comfort of persons in search 
of pleasure and health. 

The Eagle Waters, a chain of twenty-seven lakes con- 
nected by navigable streams and channels in northern Wis- 
consin, afford excellent sport to the disciples of Izaak Wal- 
ton as do the Pelican, George, Thompson, St. Germaine, 
Twin, Red Cedar, Rice, Pike and a number of other lakes 
in the region. 

Fine trout streams, such as Brule river, are found here 
and in the adjacent parts of Michigan, where is Gogebic 
Lake, a favorite place of resort. 

Madison, the capital of Wisconsin, though a commercial 



78 

centre of some Importance, is also a summer resort. This 
is due to the fact that it is located in another lake region 
in the southern part of the State. It is encircled by four 
beautiful lakes which are connected with one another and 
a fifth (Lake Wingia) by the tortuous Yahara river. It 
lies on an isthmus of land between Lake Mendota and 
Lake Monona. The former is nine, and the latter five and 
a half miles in length. The climate in summer is cool and 
bracing ; the scenery very beautiful, and the hotel accom- 
modations good. 

The Monona Lake Assembly Grounds (Chautauqua), the 
far famed Ton-ya-wa-tlia, and various pleasant places of re- 
sort are found among these lakes. 

Lakes Waubesa and Kenonsa belong to the same group 
and are each three miles long. Some miles east of Madi- 
son is Waukesha, a popular place of summer resort, at 
which are noted mineral springs. Between these places is 
the pretty quaint town of Lake Mills with its lovely Rock 
Lake which affords excellent fishing. Green Lake in this 
region is another noted place of resort. It is surrounded 
by forests and its waters are filled with fish. The hotel ac- 
commodations are good. 

Elkhart Lake is still another beautiful resort. Glenbeu- 
lah on its southern shore is likewise a favorite place. 

Devils Lake, an attractive place, is surrounded by pecu- 
liar rock formations, the result of volcanic action. The 
scenery is very fine and the hotels are good. 

The largest of these lakes is Lake Winnebago ; at its head 
is the town of Fond Dii Lac ; on its west shore the town of 
Oshkosh, and at its mouth, located on opposite shores of 
the Fox River, are the twin cities Menasha and Neenah ; in 
the river lying between these cities is the beautiful Doty^s 
Island, a favorite resort. Seven miles down the river, at 



79 

the point in its course where the Falls occur, is the town of 
Appleton. The Telulah Springs of this place are claimed 
to possess medicinal virtues. Lake Geneva, situated near 
the southern border of the State, is one of the most popu- 
lar resorts of the West. Its length is twenty-five miles ; its 
waters are crystal clear and filled with choice fish. Its 
banks are indented by numerous inlets and dotted here and 
there by hotel and private residences and club houses. 
Steamers ply the waters from place to place; excellent 
boating is here enjoyed. 

The State of Minnesota abounds in pine forests, and is 
studded with lakes, which number upwards of ten thousand ; 
the largest of these are the Red, Leec\ Swan, Vermilion, 
Lake of the Woods, WinabigosMsh, Millelacs, Bois Blanc, 
Sandy, Rainy, and Wamcldn in the north, and Benton, Big 
Stone, and Saulc in the west and south. Many of the lakes 
are of great beauty, especially those of the district known 
as Lake Park Region. Among the most famous are Lakes 
Minneicaska, Battle^ Clitheral, and Detroit, all of which have 
fine beaches, fine surrounding forests, and afford excellent 
entertainment for all classes of visitors. 

There are over two hundred lakes in the vicinity of St. 
Paul and Minneapolis, the most important of which are 
lakes Como, Cedar, Harriet, Callioun, White Bear, Bald 
Eagle, and Minnetoyika ; the latter is twelve miles west of 
Minneapolis. It with the others, offers great attractions to 
those in search of health, pleasure and sport. It has large 
excellent first-class hotels, and is very popular as a summer 
resort. 

Several beautiful cascades lend interest to this section of 
country ; these are the falls of St. Antlicmy, Bridal Veil 
Falls, Silver Cascade, and the Minnehaha Falls made famous 
by the poet Longfellow. St. Anthony s Falls has lost much 



8o 

of its former wlldness and beauty by the inroad of manu- 
facturing interests by diverting its waters and by protect- 
ing its frontage at Minneapolis. 

In the north-eastern part of Dakota is Devil's Lake, but 
this can not be called a fresh-water retreat as it is a body of 
salt water about fifty miles in length ; its shores are wooded 
and picturesque while numerous promontories and islands 
add to its beauty. 

Minnewaukan, on its southern shore is a favorite summer 
place. 

FLAT HEAD LAKE, MONTANA. 

The next lake of importance as we travel westward is 
the Flat Head Lake in Montana, a beautiful sheet of water 
twenty-eight miles in length and located in the Rockies, a 
few miles north of the town of Missoula. The Pend d' Ore- 
ille river takes its rise in the lake, and passing hundreds of 
miles through mountain and valley, flows into the Lake 
Pend d'Orielle, which is located in the northern portion of 
the Pan handle of Idaho. This beautiful sheet of water is 
forty-five miles in length and really an opening of the 
Columbia River. 

Hope, Kootenai and Sand Point are places on the north 
shore, where visitors find accommodations and from which 
trips may be made into the surrounding country, which 
abounds in game. 

Lake Ccbut d'AIevte. — This is another lovely lake in Idaho 
some miles south of the former ; it is thirty miles in length. 
Its cool summer climate makes it a pleasant summer re- 
sort. Coeur d'AIene City, situated on the shores of the 
Lake, affords entertainment for visitors. 

The Great Shoshone Falls, of the Snake River, in the 
southern part of Idaho, a few miles southeast of Boise City, 



8i 

is a wonderful natural curiosity, and one of great beauty. 
Accommodations may be had in the vicinity of the Falls. 

In the northeastern portion of Washington Territory are 
the beautiful Spokane Falls, situated in the river of the same 
name. The town of Spohane Falls has a population of 
twelve thousand, is rapidly improving and affords good 
hotels. A short distance southwest is the peculiar body 
of water known as Medical Lahe ; as its name indicates 
its waters are used for medicinal purposes. A sanitarium 
is found at this place. 

On the border between California and Nevada, we find 
Lahe Talioe, the highest navigable lake on this continent, 
over six thousand feet above the level of the sea, situated 
in the Sierra Nevada Mountains and surrounded by snow- 
capped peaks which tower two and three thousand feet 
above its surface. It has a hotel which is open during the 
summer months. The lake is fourteen miles west of Car- 
son City, the capital of Nevada, and about an equal dis- 
tance from Truckee, California. It is thirty-five miles in 
length and its waters are clear and cool and have a depth 
of over sixteen hundred feet. It is plied by a steamer 
making daily trips. A stage line connects it with Lake 
Donner, another beautiful mountain lake in California, three 
miles from Truckee. 

Independence Lahe, sixteen miles from Truckee, is also 
located in the Sierra. Ten miles distant is Webber Lake, 
which has an altitude of six thousand nine hundred and 
twenty-five feet. The waters of these lakes abound in 
fish. 

The Blue Lakes, situated about twelve miles from Lake- 
port, with their beautiful scenery and ample hotel ac- 
commodations constitute one of the pleasantest summer 
and autumn resorts in California. . 



82 

In Utah we have another lake which does not belong 
to the fresh-water resorts. This is Great Salt Lake. It 
has an altitude of four thousand feet above sea-level, 
is about eighty miles long and fifty miles in width and has 
no known outlet. Its waters contain 13.8 percent, solid 
ingredients as compared with 3.5 per cent, found in ocean 
water. At its southern extremity is a pleasant place of 
resort known as Garfield Beach, which is eighteen miles 
south of the salubrious and well-known Salt Lake City, 
with its pure mountain water and irrigation streamlets 
running through its streets and gardens. It has a fine sand 
beach and affords excellent opportunities for bathing in the 
briny waters of the lake. 

In the southern States are several fresh-water resorts. 
In Louisiana, five miles north of New Orleans, is Lake 
Pontchartrain, forty miles long and easy of access from the 
city. Its banks are sites for hotels, gardens and sum- 
mer theatres. It is noted for game and fish. 

Florida has a number of lakes in the neighborhood of 
Tallahassee ; the more important of these are : Lakes Jack- 
son, Bradford and Lafayette. About thirty miles east is 
Lake Miccosukie, near the town of Monticello. Twenty 
miles or more to the east, in the neighborhood of the Suwa- 
nee river and near the town of Madison, are Lakes Mary, 
Francis, Rachel and Cherry, beautiful bodies of water. 

Some miles east of Tampa are several lakes, situated in 
a wild picturesque country where game and fish are found 
in abundance ; these are Lakes Hancock, Parker, Hamil- 
ton, and Maitland, and Kissimee. There is a group of 
lakes around the source of the St. John's river the names 
of which are, Lakes George, Monroe, Dexter' s, Harney, 
Saltee and Jessup, all of which afford sporting attractions. 



CHAPTER V. 

MOUNTAIN RESORTS. 

Climate of High Altitudes — The White Mountains — The Green Mountains — 
The Adirondacks — The Catskills — The AUeghanies — The Rocky Mountains 
— The Sierra Nevadas. 

The climate of mountainous regions possesses certain 
characteristics, such as diminished air pressure, decreased 
temperature, increased electric tension, dryness and purity 
of the atmosphere [freedom from dust and germs], as well 
as abundance of ozone and sunshine, which conditions 
combine favorably to affect some invalids physically ; while 
all who visit such localities are more or less affected men- 
tally if they enjoy the grand and inspiring scenery by which 
they are surrounded, which when bathed in sunshine looks 
as if 

'' Touched by a light that hath no name, 
A glory never sung ; 
Aloft on sky and mountain wall 
Are God's great pictures hung." 

The amount of air pressure at sea-level is fifteen pounds 
to the square inch, and as we ascend above this point, the 
pressure decreases at the rate of one pound for every two 
thousand feet. As the effect of this diminution, there is 
less oxygen contained in a given volume of air, hence re- 
spiration is increased in frequency to supply the amount of 
that element demanded by the system. This is associated 
with a corresponding increase in the frequency of the heart's 
action, which is sometimes a serious matter in cases of or- 
ganic disease of that organ. It may amount to the con- 
dition known as Mai de Montagne, in which the walls of the 

(83) 



^4 

blood-vessels give away and hemorrhage from the nose, 
ears, mouth, or other orifices of the body results. The at- 
mospheric temperature has been estimated to decrease at 
the rate of one degree for every three hundred feet of alti- 
tude. 

There seems to be a connection between the increased 
electric tension of the atmosphere of high altitudes and the 
presence of ozone in such air; and experiment has proven 
that pure, dry oxygen may be transformed into ozone by 
means of electricity. In fact it has been proposed to sub- 
stitute for its present name that of electrified oxygen. 

The dryness which accompanies the rarification of the 
atmosphere at high altitudes, is due to the loss of part of 
its humid contents which follows the chilling of the air, and 
its expansion. 

The numerous mountain resorts in this country each have 
their own peculiar attractions. The United States is di- 
vided from north to south by three systems of mountain 
ranges ; in the east is the Appalachian system, a little west 
of the centre are found the Rocky Mountains, and far west 
are seen the Sierra Nevadas. 

The Appalachian chain stretching from Maine to 
Georgia, affords great variety in mountain climate and 
scenery. It consists of detached clusters of mountain peaks 
and ranges which we shall briefly note. 

THE WHITE MOUNTAINS. 

The group located in New Hampshire, which is some- 
times spoken of as "The Switzerland of America," 
belongs to this system. These mountains rise from a 
plateau in the northern portion of the State, which 
has an elevation of about sixteen hundred feet above 
the sea-level ; and is forty-five miles in length and 



85 

thirty in width. There are about twenty individual 
peaks which range in height from four thousand to 
over six thousand feet ; these are divided into an eastern 
and a western group by a table land. The former is 
known as the White Mountains proper, or the Presidential 
Range ; and the latter as the Franconia Mountains. The 
highest peak is Mt. Washington [6,285 feet], which be- 
longs to the eastern range ; Mounts Adams [5,759 feet] ; 
Jefferson [5,657] ; Madison [5,405] ; and Monroe [5,349 
feet] also belong to this group. The highest of the Fran- 
conia Mountains is Mt. Lafayette [5,280 feet.] The peaks 
are separated by valleys and streams, cascades and 
picturesque lakes, which add greatly to the beauty of 
the mountain scenery. Entrance may be had to the moun- 
tain region on the east by the towns of North Conway 
and Gorham. They both afford good accommodations for 
the entertainment of travelers and are also favorite places 
of resort. 

On the west the mountains may be reached through the 
town of Bethlehem, New Hampshire, a popular resort, with 
good hotels and boarding places ; and on the north through 
the village of Jefferson, which place affords comfortable en- 
tertainment to visitors and a fine view of the mountains. 
There are excellent hotels found all about this region. On 
the direct summit of Mt. Washington there is a large, first- 
class hotel, chained to the rocky crest; at its base there is 
another hotel. N«ar the gateway of that famous mountain 
pass in the White Mountains proper, called the Crawford 
Notch, is one of the oldest and best known hotels 
in that region, accommodating several hundred guests ; it 
is situated on a plateau about two thousand feet above the 
sea-level. Five miles from this point, on the road to Beth- 
lehem, is another large hotel. Two others are in the 



same vicinity, and four miles further west is still another 
very popular stopping place in the Twin Mountain region, 
a locality that has considerable reputation for the relief of 
"hay fever " cases. 

In the Franconia range, probably the largest of these 
mountain hotels is located, one with a capacity for six hun- 
dred guests. It is in the neighborhood of the lovely Echo 
Lake, from the centre of which body of water quite a remark- 
able echo is heard, which was supposed by the Indians to be 
the voice of the Great Spirit, and near the "Profile" on 
the mountain cliff, seen as you drive down the gorge, and 
not far from the " Flume" — a peculiar fissure in one of the 
mountains. These places among the lofty hills are 
reached by means of railroads, stages and other con- 
veyances. The summer climate in this region is delightfully 
cool, pleasant and healthful. 

THE GREEN MOUNTAINS. 

These consist of a long narrow group of mountain ranges 
which extend from north to south through the western part 
of the State of Vermont. Their name is derived from 
the verdure of their wooded slopes. Their scenery, though 
of a somewhat different order from that of the White 
Mountains, is still beautiful. From elevated points on the 
west, Lakes Champlain and George may be seen, and still 
further west the Adirondacks loom up in their majesty. 
Mt. Mansfield [4,348 feet] is the highest peak of the Green 
Mountains. The next in order of height are : Camel's 
Hump, 4,188 feet ; Killington Peak, 3,924 feet, and Ascut- 
ney, 3,320 feet. 

Stowe, twelve miles from Mt. Mansfield, is one of the 
principal places of resort in this region. It has good 
hotels and is surrounded by fine scenery. Waterhury is 



8; 

another summering place, being a favorite on account of its 
nearness to Mt. Mansfield and Camel's Hump ; on the 
summit of the former peak there is a hotel. 

Rutland, seven miles from Killington Peak, is a fine town 
of twelve thousand inhabitants and a point from which 
excursions may be made to different places in the moun- 
tains ; its hotels are attractive. 

The continuation of the Green Mountain range into the 
State of Massachusetts is known as the Berkshire Hills. 
These cover an area of twenty miles in length by fifty in 
breadth. The highest peak is Greylock Mountain which 
attains an altitude of 3,500 feet. There are also a number 
of pleasant health retreats in this region. 

In Great Barringtmi and its vicinity there are desirable 
places of summer residence. The beautiful town of Stock- 
bridge is eight miles distant. About ten miles to the 
north is Lenox, much patronized by Bostonians and New 
Yorkers. Six miles above is found Pittsfield, with a popu- 
lation of sixteen thousand ; it has fine hotels and is pictur- 
esquely situated on a plateau surrounded by the Taconic 
and Hoosac Mountains. There are a number of interest- 
ing places near the city, to which excursions can be made. 

North Adams is a flourishing town surrounded by ro- 
mantic scenery and a commercial centre in the upper Berk- 
shire region, and it has good hotels. 

Williamstown is five miles westward ; it is the site of 
Williams College ; the town is situated in a valley sur- 
rounded by mountains. Two miles to the north there is a 
good summer hotel at a place named Sand Springs and 
the mineral waters of these springs have some repute. 
There are a number of attractive spots in the vicinity of 
Williamstown to which excursions may be made ; among 
these, considerable interest attaches itself to Flora's Glen, 



88 

where Bryant wrote " Thanatopsis," when a student at 
Williams College. 

THE ADIRONDACK MOUNTAINS. 

The mountains situated in the northeastern portion of 
New York State, between Lakes Champlain and George 
on the east and the St. Lawrence river on the north, 
consist of several separate ranges that rise from a plateau, 
having an altitude of two thousand feet above the sea- 
level, and covering an area of one hundred miles in width 
by one hundred and fifty miles in length. 

Mount Marcy [5,337 feet] is the highest peak; there are 
others of nearly as great an altitude, such as Mount White- 
face, Mount Seward, Mount Mclntyre, Mount McMartin, 
Dix Peak and Mount Pharoah. It has been estimated that 
there are five hundred individual peaks in these ranges ; but 
only a few of these have as yet received names. The 
ranges are separated by valleys in which streams and lakes 
abound and by means of which most of the travel through 
this region is accomplished in light canoes. The lakes, 
which are estimated to be about one thousand in number, 
range in size from those twenty miles in length to others 
with an area of only a few acres. The following are some 
of the most important : Long Lake, Raquette Lake, The 
Tupper, Fulton and Saranac lakes, Sanford Lake, Golden 
Lake, Schroon Lake, Lake Placid, and Paradox Lake. 

At various points along the lakes good hotel accommoda- 
tions may be secured, as many small villages have sprung 
up in these localities ; or, should the traveller prefer, he 
may camp out and enjoy nature in her primeval simplicity. 
The beautiful scenery of this region has been made famous 
by pen and brush. Entrance to the mountains may be had 
through various places, situated on the borders of this region. 



89 

which serve as gate-ways, and are themselves in many cases 
favorite summer resorts. On the east are Plattsburg, Port 
Kent and West Port on the shores of Lake Champlain ; 
Keeseville and Elizabethtown a few miles west of the lake ; 
and Caldwell at the head of Lake George. On the west 
Prospect, Remsen, Alder Creek, Boonville, Port Lyden, 
Glendale, Lowville, Carthage, Harrisville, Gouverneur, De 
Kalb Junction, Canton and Potsdam ; on the south Sara- 
toga, Gloversville, Devereaux, and Trenton Falls ; and on 
the north the mountains may be reached from Norwood, 
Moira, Malone, and Chateaugay. 

Gatshill Moimtains, also in New York State, are located 
on the west side of the Hudson River, following its course 
for twenty or thirty miles and separated from that stream 
by a valley ten or twelve miles in length. Some of the 
highest peaks are as follows : The Storking (4000 feet) ; 
High Peak (3804 feet) ; and Pine Orchard. This region was 
but little visited fifty years ago when Irving wrote his pretty 
tale of " Rip Van Winkle," in which the hero is represented 
as spending twenty years in a state of deep slumber in the 
heart of these hills. His description of them is so pleasing 
that we venture to insert a small portion of it: 

"Whoever has made a voyage up the Hudson must re- 
member the Kattskill Mountains. They are a dismem- 
bered branch of the great Appalachian family and are seen 
away to the west of the rivers, swelling up to a noble 
height and lording it over the surrounding country. Every 
change of season, every change of weather, indeed every 
hour of the day, produces some change in the magical hues 
and shapes of these mountains, and they are regarded by 
all the good wives far and near, as perfect barometers." 

At the villages of Catskill, Palenville, Tannerville, 
Haines' Corners, Hunter, Cairo, Windham, Prattsville> 



90 

Lexington, West Kill, Pine Hill, Big Indian, Shandaken, 
Phoenicia, Woodstock, Andes, Stamford, and many other 
spots in this region, there are good accommodations. Most 
of these places are situated on or between the mountain 
ran ores and in addition to these resorts there are several 
large, fine hotels, two of which are in the eastern Cats- 
kills, located at an altitude of twenty-five hundred feet 
above the sea, and commanding a fine view of the Hudson 
and its valley. One provides accommodations for one 
thousand or more guests, and is the oldest of these 
places of resort in the mountains. It is situated on Pine 
Orchard Mountain, from which point the view of the sur- 
rounding country is unsurpassed. Another large hotel, 
which is comparatively new, extensive and with the mod- 
ern improvements, is situated on the summit of the western 
Catskills at an elevation of two thousand feet above the 
sea. It is in the vicinity of the Storm King, and com- 
mands an extended view, including the head waters of the 
Delaware river ; its appointments are most luxurious. 

The Allegheny and Blue Ridge Ranges extend through 
several adjoining states, as Pennsylvania, Maryland, West 
Virginia, Kentucky, Tennessee, North Carolina and Geor- 
gia. There are a number of pleasant places among these 
mountains. In the eastern section of Pennsylvania is the 
Delaware Water Gap. At this point the Delaware river, 
after traveling two hundred miles through a romantic sec- 
tion of country, forces its way through an abrupt notch in 
the mountains. The scenery is grand and the hotel accom- 
modations are good. A few miles to the west is Lehigh 
Gap, a similar resort, which is not far from the old Moravian 
towns of Bethlehem and Easton on the Lehigh river ; the 
latter city at its confluence with the Delaware. These 
attract visitors on account of the mountains near at hand, 



91 

and their healthfulness and fine climate. Two miles from 
the latter place is Paxinosa Inn, a new summer resort 
situated on the summit of the Paxinosa mountains. 

Mauch CJiunlc is another eastern Pennsylvania town loca- 
ted in the midst of surrounding mountains. Many ex- 
cursionists visit this place to take a ride over the mountains 
on the celebrated swift-trained Switchback railroad. The 
scenery is fine, and hotel accommodations, for transient 
guests as well as for those who desire to spend a length of 
time, are good. Near at hand is a beautiful ravine, known 
as Glen Onoko, A few miles to the north-east is a small 
range known as the Pocono Mountains ; these attain an 
elevation of about two thousand feet, and contain several 
excellent places of summer resort, having good hotels and 
a cool summer climate. The names of these places are : 
Forks, Pocono, Summit, and Tobyhanna. 

A few miles to the south there is an attractive summer 
place known as Parkside ; it is situated on the Analomink 
river and has good entertainment. The mountain streams 
in its vicinity afford excellent fishing and boating. It is 
within a few miles of Prospect Ledge, Point Lookout, 
Silver Cascade and Red Creek Glen, at all of which places 
the scenery is very fine. The pretty village of Spraguer- 
ville is located amid the mountains in this neighborhood ; it 
has a number of summer residences and good hotels. 
Broadhead's Creek, upon which the village is built, affords 
excellent trout fishing. Stroudsburg is another place of 
resort situated on this stream, having good accommodations; 
the charming resort of Dingmans Ferry is reached from 
this point by a twenty-five mile stage ride. The scenery 
at this last named spot is very fine, there being several 
waterfalls in the vicinity. 

Some miles to the west is the beautiful Wyoming Valley, 



92 

noted alike in history and in song ; it is formed by two par- 
allel mountain ranges, and the Susquehanna river passes 
through the valley. In about the centre of the valley is the 
flourishing city of Wilkes-Barre, located in the neighbor- 
hood of some rich anthracite coal veins. It is a popular 
summer resort, although quite a city, A bridge connects 
it with Kingston on the opposite side of the stream. 
Harvey's Lake in this vicinity affords a fine place for guests 
and tourists. The lake is one thousand feet above the 
Susquehanna river, and a good hotel is located on its 
shores. Some miles north-west of Wilkes-Barre is Eagle's 
Mere, located twenty-two hundred feet above sea-level, a 
pleasant place, with fine scenery and supplied with suitable 
plans and good fare. 

Wemersville, ten miles west of Reading, a delightful 
resting locality, winter and summer, is situated in the 
midst of the mountains ; the scenery is excellent. There 
are several hotels in the village and its vicinity, and two 
sanitaria are delightfully situated upon a fine range of 
hills commanding beautiful valley scenery of cultivated 
lands charming to the vision, while the climate is particu- 
larly healthful. 

In the southern and western part of Pennsylvania there 
are a number of summering places in the Allegheny Moun- 
tains, a few of which we will mention. In the centre of the 
state and mountains is Carlisle eighteen miles west of Har- 
risburg. There are several localities possessing mineral 
springs which are also places of resort. Mount Holly 
Springs are seven miles to the west of the town ; Doubling 
Gap Springs are a few miles to the north-west ; Perry Warm 
Springs' are located ten miles to the north. 

The Bedford Springs are beautifully situated in the 
mountains some miles to the souch-west of Carlisle, at an 



93 

altitude of eighteen hundred feet above tide-water. Hotel 
accommodations are spacious and good at these springs. 

Gresson, on the summit of the Alleghenies, three thous- 
and feet above sea-level is a beautiful health-resort, easily 
accessible by many daily trains. The spacious hotel is 
well patronized, the scenery fine and the climate invigor- 
ating. Mineral springs are found here, some of which yield 
chalybeate water. 

Ehenshurg, eleven miles distant, is pleasantly situated and 
has an equable summer temperature. Its hotels are good. 

Ligonier, in the beautiful valley of the same name, situ- 
ated some miles southwest of Cresson, is a quiet, pleasant 
place with good accommodations. 

Altoona, the location of the Pennsylvania Railroad car 
works, is situated at the eastern pass of the main Alle- 
gheny range, twelve hundred feet above the sea-level, with 
its beautiful surroundings ; it offers many attractions as a 
resort, among which are excellent hotels. Kisldminetas 
Springs are located a number of miles west in a beautiful 
and healthful spot, affording comfortable entertainment to 
visitors. 

Kane is situated in the northern part of the State on an 
elevated table land ; it is on the boundary of a wild tract of 
country which affords sport for gunner and angler. The 
hotels at this place are fine. 

In western Maryland there are several places of resort 
among the mountains. Oakland, about two hundred and 
fifty miles west of Baltimore, is beautifully located amid the 
loftiest heights of the Alleghenies. There is a hotel at this 
place with a capacity for about five hundred guests ; it is 
located in the midst of enchanting scenery. Three miles 
east is another pleasant place called Mountain Lake Park^ 
where there is a large hotel surrounded by fine grounds 



94 

and cottages. Three miles to the eastward is Deer Park, 
which also has a large hotel and cottages. All of these 
places are located at an altitude of about three thousand 
feet above sea-level, amid lovely mountain scenery. 

The mountainous regions of Virginia and West Virginia 
contain many mineral springs, some of which have a wide 
reputation for medicinal purposes. These are found in the 
southern and western portions of the former State and the 
eastern part of the latter. At most of these springs there 
are hotels, bath-houses and cottages ; many of these local- 
ities are very popular places of resort. The individual 
springs with their properties are specified in the chapter 
on "Mineral Springs." 

The mountainous regions of North Carolina and the 
adjoining parts of South Carolina, Tennessee and Georgia, 
are known as the Piedmont Country. It has a delightfully 
salubrious climate with a cool, pleasant summer tempera- 
ture and mild winters. The climate is in many respects 
similar to that of the White Mountains. The general 
elevation has an average of two thousand feet above the 
sea-level, many of the peaks attaining a height of six 
thousand feet. The mountains in North Carolina attain the 
greatest altitude, one of these, Mt. Mitchell, (6,701 feet) 
being the highest mountain east of the Mississippi river. 

Asheville, N. C, is in the centre of this region. It is 
situated in the valley of the French Broad river, between 
the Blue Ridge on the east and the Alleghenies on the 
west. The town is two thousand, two hundred and fifty 
feet above the level of the sea. The hotels are desirable 
and the scenery very enjoyable. This is a favorite retreat, 
and suitable as a winter as well as a summer resort for 
persons desiring a cold, dry climate. Sulphur and chaly- 
beate springs are found near the city. Thirty-seven miles 



95 

west of Asheville are the Hot Springs of North Carolina, 
located in a lovely valley surrounded by towering moun- 
tains. The hotels and bath houses are very neat at this 
place, which is frequented throughout the year. 

Cloudland is a quiet summer retreat situated on the top 
of the Roan Mountains at an altitude of six thousand, three 
hundred and ninety-four feet above sea-level, the highest 
human habitation east of the Rocky Mountains, on the border 
line between the states of North Carolina and Tennessee. 
The summer climate is very genial, the hotels are good and 
the scenery superb. 

There are a number of popular places among the 
mountains of South Carolina ; one of the most fre- 
quented is the pretty village of Greenville, situated on the 
Reedy river, about two hundred and seventy miles from 
Charleston ; this is a pleasant summer resort with suitable 
conveniences for visitors. 

In northern Georgia there is a continuation of charming 
Blue Ridge scenery. Clarksville is a village among the 
mountains much resorted to during the summer by the inhab- 
itants of the low-lands of the State. Marietta and Atlanta 
are pleasantly located, the former at an altitude of over 
eleven hundred feet above the sea, and the latter, a flourish- 
ing city, at an altitude of over sixteen hundred feet. Marietta 
is a favorite summer spot with Southerners, but both 
places are now resorted to in the colder months by persons 
from the northern states. 

THE ROCKY MOUNTAINS. 

This lofty system of mountain ranges extends through 
the states and territories of Montana, Idaho, Wyoming, 
Nevada, Utah, Colorado, New Mexico and Arizona. They 
attain their greatest elevation in Colorado, where there are 



96 

many peaks having an altitude ranging from thirteen thous- 
and to fourteen thousand feet above sea-level, while sev- 
eral attain a height of three or four hundred feet more. In 
the midst of the towering mountains are found Color- 
ado's Natural Parks, four in number, which consist of ir- 
regular plateaus enclosed by mountain ranges. 

North Parh covers an area of two thousand, five 
hundred square miles, at an elevation of eight thousand 
feet. It is not so much ' frequented by visitors as the 
others. Middle Parh immediately south of the last named, 
has an area of three thousand square miles, with an alti- 
tude of seven thousand, five hundred feet above the sea and 
notwithstanding such elevation, the climate is equable and 
mild. In this place the Hot Sulphur Springs attract many 
visitors. South Parh is the most popular and beautiful 
of all these. Its area is two thousand, two hundred 
square miles, and its elevation is over nine thousand feet. 
The climate is delightful and the scenery very fine. Fair- 
play is the chief town of this region and a point from which 
excursions are made to points of interest. 

San Luis Parh, the largest of the parks is south of the 
last named, and has an area of eighteen thousand square 
miles. Its elevation is not over seven thousand feet above 
the level of the sea. There is a beautiful lake of the same 
name in the centre of the park ; the climate is very mild 
and thermal springs are found here. 

Hunting is excellent in all of the parks. Excursionists 
can procure outfits and guides at Idaho Springs, a pretty 
village, whose chief claim for attention comes from the 
presence of the mineral springs located at the place. The 
climate is fine and the hotel comfortable. 

Denver, on the South Platte river, is fifteen miles from 
the east base of the Rocky Mountains. It is built on a 



97 

series of plateaus facing the mountains and commanding a 
fine view. The population is over eighty thousand. It is 
the starting point for tourists making trips to the various 
points of interest in the State, being at the same time in 
itself a pleasant summer resort, as its climate is cool and 
exhilarating. It has numerous first-class hotels. 

Colorado Springs, seventy-six miles south of Denver, is 
a pleasant place six thousand feet above the sea. Its 
hotels and boarding places afford good accommodations, 
and its climate is pleasant during the entire year. From 
this point excursions may be made to several places of in- 
terest. Many incipient phthisis pulmonalis cases have lo- 
cated here and at Denver and recovered their health and 
vigor. 

Manitou Springs, at a distance of five miles, has been 
called the "Saratoga of Colorado;" the waters are soda 
and iron, the hotels and surrounding scenery excellent. 
Pike's Peak, (14,150 feet) is at a distance of sixteen miles 
from Manitou. The summit may be reached on horseback. 
A signal service station was for a long time located here. 
Qlen Eyrie, The Garde7i of the Gods and Monument Park 
are places of easy access and will well repay a visit. 

Pueblo, one hundred and seventeen miles south of Den- 
ver, has a population of eighteen thousand. Clark's Min- 
eral Springs are found here. The climate is pleasant in 
winter and the hotels are very good. 

In Arkansas, the Hot Springs, situated forty-five miles 
south of Little Rock, and Eureka Springs are favorite 
mountain resorts. At both places there are good hotel ac- 
commodations. 

In New Mexico there are several resorts among the moun- 
tains ; of these we will name Santa Fe, which is one of the 
oldest towns in the United States ; it has a population of five 



98 

thousand five hundred, and an elevation of seven thousand 
feet above the sea. It is a mining centre and a pleasant 
summer resort. 

Albuquerque, some miles south of Santa Fe, is situated 
on the Rio Grande at an elevation of about five thousand 
feet above the sea ; it has a population of three thousand, 
five hundred. 

Las Vegas, east of Santa Fe, is a town of fifteen hundred 
inhabitants. It is the centre of trade for the sheep ranches 
of the State. The hot springs of the same name are located 
about four miles from the town and have a very favor- 
able reputation. They are located at an elevation of six 
thousand, four hundred feet, and constitute a suitable place 
for a summer resort. The hotels are very good. The 
mountain valleys in the southern part of the State are more 
suitable for winter residence, than the places of resort here 
named. 

The Yellowstone National Park, a Rocky Mountain resort 
of much importance and interest, is situated in the north- 
west corner of Wyoming, extending into Idaho and Mon- 
tana. It is sixty-five miles in length and fifty-five in width, 
having an area of three thousand five hundred and seventy- 
five square miles, and an altitude of more than six thousand 
feet. The whole region shows the signs of recent volcanic 
action. There are about fifty active geysers, and thousands 
of mineral springs in the park, besides a beautiful lake and 
rivers. The best time to visit this region is during the 
summer and early fall months. The hotel accommodations 
are very good. It is under government control. 

THE SIERRA NEVADAS. 

These extend along the Pacific coast, through Wash- 
ington Territory, Oregon and California. Summit, Cal., a 



99 

pleasant Sierra summer resort, is the highest point on 
the Central Pacific Railroad. It has an elevation of seven 
thousand and forty-two feet. The surrounding scenery is 
grand and the air so very dry, that meat packed away will 
keep at any season. Soda springs are found at this place. 

Truchee^ Cal., is a handsome town of fifteen hundred in- 
habitants, situated high up among the Sierras, three miles 
distant from the lovely Donner Lake. A daily stage runs to 
Tahoe City, on Tahoe Lake, the highest navigable body of 
water on this continent, and a delightful place of resort. 

Yosemite Valley is one hundred and forty miles south- 
east of San Francisco, on the western slope of the Sierra 
Nevadas. It is a deep cut gorge six miles in length, 
wild and charming to the lover of bold scenery. Several 
lovely foaming waterfalls come rushing into the valley from 
the snow peaks near at hand. One of them, the Yosemite, 
aggregating in its three plunges about one-third of a mile 
in height, while some of the cliffs are one-half to three- 
fourths of a mile in altitude. This valley, or rather this 
immense chasm, is probably the most remarkable one on 
this continent, while towering about it lie lofty peaks of the 
rugged Sierra Nevada range, which runs parallel with the 
Pacific coast for many miles. The Merced river, made up 
of the waters which come in from these waterfalls, winds 
beautifully through the gorge, and abounds with mountain 
trout and other edible fish. 

The health-seeker can find in this valley ample oppor- 
tunity for rest and recreation, for a greater part of the 
summer, in exploring the gorges, climbing the cliffs and 
mountain sides, visiting the beautiful lakes, fishing, gunning, 
and roaming around among the scenes of beauty that here- 
about abound. There are several comfoi-table hotels in 
the valley. 



CHAPTER VI. 

TRIPS UPON OCEAN, LAKE AND RIVER. 

Benefits of Sea Air — British Maritime Provinces — The Bermudas — The West 
Indies — Alaska — The Sandwich Islands — The Great Lakes — The St. Law- 
rence River — The Hudson River — The Mississippi River — The Ohio River 
— The Columbia River. 

In some cases a change of scene is as much, if not more 
needed, than a change of climate, such persons are fre- 
quently much benefitted by a trip upon the water. Often- 
times a trip of this kind may be necessary as a means of 
reaching a desirable place of resort at a distance, or again, 
as in the case of an ocean voyage, it may be indicated as a 
form of climatic treatment. 

OCEAN TRIPS. 

The invigorating and curative effects, which the ocean 
climate has upon many sufferers, have long been more or 
less recognized. Pliny, Celsus, and Galen testified to its 
virtues. The exact modus operandi is not fully understood, 
but probably much of the improvement noted is due to the 
following causes, which have been so concisely stated, by 
an able writer on this subject, that we will give them in his 
own words : 

1. The entire change of scene and the enforced rest 
from customary occupations. 

2. The facilities for being constantly in the open air 
during the greater part of the twenty-four hours. 

3. The habitual respiration, when on deck, of the air 
free from organic and inorganic impurities and floating 

(100) 



lOI 

particles of dust and carbon that are met with in even the 
purest air on land. 

4. The greater equability of temperature at sea, 

5. The presence in the air of certain substances, such 
as saline particles, which may exert a specific beneficial 
effect upon the lungs and air passages, also probable differ- 
ences in the electrical conditions of the atmosphere and in 
the amount of ozone in sea air. 

6. The sedative influence exerted on the constitution 
by a comparatively humid atmosphere combined with a 
high barometric pressure. 

7. The bracing and hardening effect of almost constant 
sea-breezes, and of the changes of climate experienced in 
passing through the different "regions " of the ocean. 

It does not come within the limits of this work to refer 
to the longer ocean voyages which are made from one con- 
tinent to another, but rather to the short trips which may 
be taken along our own shores, or to the islands and other 
places of resort lying in their vicinity. 

BRITISH MARITIME PROVINCES. 

Very pleasant summer trips of this kind are those to the 
British Maritime Provinces, which may be made on the 
several lines of steamers that ply between the ports of 
these Provinces, such as Halifax and Yarmouth, Nova Scotia, 
St. Johns, Newfoundland, St. John, New Brunswick, and 
the more important cities, along the Atlantic sea-board as 
Charleston, Baltimore, Philadelphia, New York, Boston, 
Portland and Eastport. Such a trip is not only delightful 
in itself, but brings the traveller to the cool and pleasant 
summer climate of these northern lands which we will 
briefly describe. 

New Brunswick. — The province of New Brunswick lies 



I02 



upon the eastern boundary of the State of Maine. Its 
scenery is diversified by hill, valley, lake and river ; much 
of its area is covered with forests and its waters abound in 
fish. It is traversed by the St. John River, the largest 
stream on the Atlantic seaboard between the St. Lawrence 
and the Mississippi, which has a course of six hundred 
miles, mostly through forest and farm land, and is navi- 
gable for two hundred and twenty-five miles of its length. 
Very pleasant trips may be made upon this river. 

St. John situated at its mouth on the Bay of Fundy, is 
the chief city and sea-port of the Province, having a popu- 
lation of about fifty thousand, and affording comfortable hotel 
accommodations. Trips across the Bay of Fundy can be 
made to the celebrated Annapolis valley. The village of 
Rothesay in the vicinity of St. John is a favorite summer 
resort. Loch Lomond, lying eleven miles to the northeast, 
is likewise much frequented. 

St. Andrews. — The town of St. Andrews, situated some 
miles east of St. John, on the Passamaquoddy Bay, 
opposite Eastport, Maine, is a pretty place with good 
hotels. 

CampoheUo Jsland. — A few miles below St. Andrews, in 
the Canadian side of the bay, lies Campobello Island, which 
is a very delightful place of summer resort. It is nine miles 
in length and has good beaches, fine scenery and excellent 
hotels. 

Grand Manan. — South of this is another island known 
as the Grand Manan, located at the entrance to the 
Bay of Fundy. It is about twenty miles in length, and 
while its western shore presents towering cliffs and peculiar 
rock formations, its eastern shore is quite different in topog- 
raphy, its outline being formed by coves and beaches, 
where several villages have sprung up. This island is also 



I03 

a favorite place of summer resort, particularly frequented 
by artists. The entertainment is good. 

NOVA SCOTIA. 

The Province of Nova Scotia, the ancient Arcadia, con- 
sists of the peninsula bearing that name, lying south-east of 
New Brunswick, separated from it for nearly its whole ex- 
tent by the Bay of Fundy, and of Cape Breton Island, at 
the east end of Nova Scotia proper, but divided from it by 
the Gut of Canso. 

This province, like New Brunswick, is dotted with lakes 
and streams. The eastern arm of the Bay of Fundy ex- 
tends into the province from the north. On the southern 
shore of this inlet, which is known as Minas Basin, lies 
Grand Pre, the land of Longfellow's "Evangeline." 

On another inlet of the bay, some miles to the south- 
west are the towns of Annapolis and Dighy, points at 
which the steamers stop. 

Yarmouth, on the southwest coast, is a flourishing sea- 
port, a pleasant stopping place for tourists. 

Halifax, the capital of the Province, situated on the 
southeastern coast, is a fine city with a population of from 
thirty to forty thousand. This city has many good hotels 
and is made easily accessible by frequent steamers stopping 
there, and by railroads across to the Bay of Fundy and to 
the north and west. 

Pidou, on the northern coast, in the coal region of the 
province, is another steamer landing. 

CAPE BRETON. 

The Island of Cape Breton, one hundred miles in 
length and eighty-five in breadth, is a favorite place 
of resort, because of its fine scenery, salubrious climate and 



I04 

excellent sporting facilities. It contains an inland sea, 
called Bras d'Or, which nearly divides the island into two 
parts, and upon which very pleasant trips may be made. 
The chief town on the island is Sidney^ with good hotels. 
It has a fine harbor and is a stopping place for steamers. 

PRINCE Edward's island. 

This fruitful isle lies in the Gulf of St. Lawrence, north 
of Nova Scotia and east of New Brunswick, and is another 
place of resort. Its length is about one hundred and forty 
miles. The coasts present bold, red cliffs from twenty 
to one hundred feet in height. The climate is salubrious, 
and cool and delightful in summer, especially during July 
and August. Its capital and chief centre of trade is Char- 
lottetown, once very flourishing, but now a rather quiet 
place of about nine thousand inhabitants, having convenient 
quiet hotels. Summerside, Georgetown, Souris, Tignish, 
Cape Traverse, Rustico, Malpeque and other places on the 
island attract summer visitors, where they find comfortable 
entertainment, but not with the large hostelries of some 
of the cities and towns further south. 

NEWFOUNDLAND. 

The largest island of this region, Newfoundland, lying 
some miles to the northeast, has a cool, bracing summer clim- 
ate. The ocean cliffs, and crags of its rock-bound shores 
are charming to the vision. The summer tourist from the 
" States " almost imagines when he finds himself in the prin- 
cipal city, St. Johns, that he has gone back to the season of 
spring. However that may be, he is in a pleasant old town, 
situated on the eastern part of the peninsula of Avalon, with 
a fine, well protected, placid harbor, surrounded by cliffs 
which rise to a height of five hundred feet from the sea. 



I05 

Seal oil, and dried cod fish, and cod liver oil are some of 
its principal exports. An abundance of game of all kinds is 
found in Newfoundland. Steamers leave St, Johns fre- 
quently for Quebec, Baltimore and New York, also for the 
the western and northern coasts of Newfoundland ; like- 
wise for Labrador. The latter is a beautiful trip upon 
which the tourist enjoys magnificent rocky scenery and the 
opportunity of seeing the Esquimau at his home. Other 
trips may be made from one place to another in the prov- 
inces, by means of boat or railroad. 

Various short voyages may be made along the Atlantic 
coast of the United States from one city to another, such as 
from Norfolk and Newport News, Baltimore, or Philadel- 
phia, to New York ; thence through the Long Island Sound 
to Boston and other places on the New England coast. In 
colder weather the ocean voyager may travel southward 
on the various lines of steamers, visiting the many south- 
ern winter resorts. Delightful trips may not only be made 
to such places on our coasts as Old Point Comfort, Charles- 
ton, Savannah, Jacksonville, Mobile, and New Orleans, but 
also to points in Mexico, Central America or the various 
groups of islands lying in the Southern waters. There are 
a number of resorts particularly desirable as places of resi- 
dence during the winter months, located upon these islands 
which will be briefly alluded to in the following pages. 

THE BERMUDAS. 

This group of small islands lying about five hundred 
and eighty miles south-south east of Cape Hatteras, 
constitute the " still vext Bermoothes " of Shakespeare's 
"Tempest." They are formed upon a coral reef and are 
in number about three hundred and sixty-five, though col- 
lectively they measure only about eighteen miles in length 



io6 

and six in breadth. The individual islands are separated 
by channels which are as a rule narrow, but afford good 
bathing, boating and yachting. Only fifteen or twenty of these 
islands are inhabited. Their climate is humid and mild, the 
thermometer seldom rising above eighty-five or falling 
below forty, the average temperature being seventy de- 
grees Fahrenheit. Vegetation continues during the entire 
year, flowers and fruit growing in profusion and the scen- 
ery is very picturesque. 

The largest of the group is Bermuda or Long Island, 
sixteen miles in length and one and a half in width. The 
town of Hamilton, the capital of the group, is situated on 
this island. It has a population of about fifteen hundred, 
and has comfortable hotels and boarding houses. The cot- 
tage which the poet Tom Moore occupied and the calabash 
tree under which he wrote, during his residence in the 
Bermudas are in the vicinity of the town. 

St. George's Island is the second in size ; at its eastern 
end is St. George, which though the largest town, and chief 
port of the Bermudas, does not afford accommodations 
equal to those of Hamilton. 

THE WEST INDIES. 

The archipelago lying south-east of Florida and stretch- 
ing across the entrance of the Gulf of Mexico is called the 
West Indies. This is a collective name including about one 
thousand islands and islets which severally represent almost 
every European power. Their total length is said to be 
about three thousand miles and their area one hundred and 
fifty thousand square miles. Their climate varies with the 
location but it is usually pleasant and salubrious during the 
winter months ; the flora and fauna are tropical. 

They are divided into four groups, the names of 



I07 



the more important individual islands, appear in the follow- 
ing tabulated list. 



Bahamas. 



WEST INDIES. -I 



Greater Antilles. 



Lesser Antilles, 



f Grand Bahama. 

Great Abaco. 

Little Abaco. 

Andros. 

New Providence. 

Eleuthera. 

San Salvador. 

Rum Bay. 

Great Exuma. 

Watling Island. 

Long Island. 

Crooked Island, 

Atvvood's Key. 

Great Inagua. 
L Little Inagua. 

f Cuba. 
Hayti or San Domingo. 
Jamaica. 
Porto Rico. 

' St. Kitts. 
Antigua. 
Guadaloupe. 
Dominica. 



Caribbean Islands, ; Martinique 



OR 

Windward Group. 



St. Lucia. 
St. Vincent. 
Barbadoes. 
L Trinidad. 



Margarita. 
Dutch West Indies, ) Tortuga. 
OR Leeward Group. I Buen Ayre. 
t Curacoa. 



The simple description that follows only refers to those 
islands that are resorted to for health and pleasure. 

THE BAHAMAS. 

The first group, the Bahamas, lying off the south-east 
coast of Florida at a distance of about three hundred and 
fifty miles, are about six hundred in number ; of these 
fifteen are inhabited, with an aggregate of about forty 
thousand population. The climate is very similar to that 
of southern Florida, but slightly more equable, and as 



io8 

xhe islands are of coral formation, covered with a light sandy 
soil, they are free from marshy tracts. Their most import- 
ant place of resort is Nassau, situated on the northern side 
of the island of New Providence, the capital and seat of 
the government of the group. It is a pretty town, with 
good hotels and a salubrious winter climate. Dunmore 
Town, on Harbor Island, a few miles from Nassau, is a 
place of resort which has a very similar genial climate. 
Turk's Island at the southeast extremity of the group is 
also somewhat resorted to. Its climate is warmer. Neither 
of the last named places afford the accommodations that are 
to be found at Nassau. 

THE GREATER ANTILLES. 

Cuba, the largest and most important of the West In- 
dies, lies between the Caribbean Sea and the Gulf of Mex- 
ico, about one hundred and thirty miles south of Florida. 
It is traversed in almost its entire length, seven hundred 
and sixty miles, by a range of mountains. The climate is 
tropical, there being but two seasons, the wet and the dry. 
The best time to visit this island is between the first of De- 
cember and the last of March. The vegetation is luxuriant. 

Havana, the largest city and chief commercial port of the 
West Indies, is situated on the southwest coast of Cuba 
on the Gulf of Mexico. This is a beautiful and gay place, 
as well as furnishing ample hotel entertainment and amuse- 
ments for its numerous visitors. 

Matanzas, fifty-three miles east of Havana, is an impor- 
tant city also located on the coast. Its winter climate is 
rather more salubrious than that of Havana, being mild 
and even. The city is a desirable winter resort ; although 
the hills back of the city are preferable places of residence 
for many persons. 



109 

Santiago de Cuba, the second city in size on the island, is 
situated at the extreme southwestern part, and is resorted 
to on account of its warm winter climate, but it is not a 
healthful location on account of its proximity to marshes 
and its poor water supply. 

Puerto Principe is a city situated in the interior of the is- 
land. Its winter climate is very mild and free from some 
of the objectionable features of places along the coast. 

The Isle of Pines lies about thirty-three miles off the coast 
of Cuba, south of Havana. It has a very mild, salubrious 
climate in winter and one which proves beneficial to some 
classes of invalids, especially those who feel better in warm 
weather. The towns on the island are Nueva Gerona, 
Santa Fe, and Jorohado. 

Hayti or Santo Domingo is next in size to Cuba. It is 
four hundred miles in length, has a good harbor and is 
traversed by general mountain ranges. During November, 
December and January this island has a moderate rain-fall, 
but from February to April the weather is uniformly dry. 
The island does not afford such good places of resort as 
others of this group. The most desirable localities lie back 
among the mountains. 

Jamaica lies about ninety miles south of Cuba. Its 
climate is only suitable for invalids during the months 
of December, January, February and March, during which 
time the weather is delightful. Kingston, the chief city 
and capital of the island, is situated on the north coast. 
It is a pleasant town somewhat resorted to during the 
winter. 

Porto Rico, the most easterly and smallest of the group, 
has mild equable winters, comparatively free from rain. 
Its principal town and capital is San Juan de Porto Rico, 
situated on a small island off the northern coast. This place 



no 

has a population of about twenty-three thousand and 
provides suitable entertainment for visitors. 

The Virgin Group, lies off the eastern end of Porto Rico. 
Of these St. Thomas and Santa Cruz or St. Croix have a 
mild equable winter climate and several places of resort, of 
which Charlotte Amalie on the former, Christiansted and 
Fredericksted on the latter, afford the best accommodations. 

THE LESSER ANTILLES. 

" Those leafy isles upon the ocean thrown, 
Like studs of emerald o'er a silver zone " 

This group is crescentic in form, extending from Porto Rico 
to the mouth of the Orinoco River, (S. A.) It lies between 
the Atlantic Ocean and the Caribbean Sea. The scenery is 
fine, being somewhat mountainous in character. The 
climate is tropical and delightful the first four months of 
the year. These islands are reached by steamer from 
New York, in somewhat less than a week's time. 

Dominica and Martinique are the most beautiful of 
this group. They have bold cliffs and luxuriant tropical 
vegetation. Roseau is the chief town of Dominica and lies 
between the Caribbean Sea and the high sheltering hills. It 
affords boarding accommodations. St. Pierre is the chief 
city of Martinique, where hotels are to be found, and a 
few miles from town are some warm springs which are con- 
siderably frequented. Fort de France is the seat of gov- 
ernment and lies twenty miles north of St. Pierre. There 
is a statue erected at the former place in honor of the Em- 
press Josephine, who was born on this island. Warm 
springs are found near the town. 

The island of St. Vincent lies to the south. It has a 
warm, humid climate. Kingston, the chief town, is a pleas-^ 



Ill 



ant place situated on the southwestern coast, and has 
quite a reputation as a health resort. 

Barbadoes, the most easterly of the group, has a mild, 
salubrious, genial winter climate. There are several chaly- 
beate springs on this island. Bridgetown, the capital, has a 
population of twenty-five thousand, and hotels and board- 
ing houses. The most prominent resorts on the island are 
Hastings, two miles from the capital, and Bathsheha, sixteen 
miles distant. 

The island of Trinidad lies further south than the others 
of this group, being situated at the entrance of the Gulf 
of Paria, (S. A.,) and consequently has a warmer, more moist 
climate, while the flora and fauna of the island are truly 
South American. Its principal city, Port of Spain, is a fine 
place, from which trips may be made to the neighboring 
islands or to British Guiana, Venezuela and other South 
American ports. 

DUTCH WEST INDIES. 

The fourth group of West India Islands lies west of the 
Barbadoes, to the leeward, hence they have received the 
name, "Leeward Islands." They are located just off the 
coast of Venezuela. 

Curacoa, one of this group, has a hot, dry climate, and if 
not so far distant from the United States, would probably at- 
tract more northern tourists who are in search of health or 
pleasure. Its capital and principal town is WiUemsted, 
situated at the entrance of Santa Anna Harbor, on the 
southwest coast. 

ALASKA. 

Charming ocean trips may be taken along the Pacific 
shores of our country ; a delightful summer excursion is that 
from Portland, Or., Tacoma, Seattle or Port Towsend on 



112 



PuQfet Sound ; or from Victoria or Nanaimo on Vancouver's 
Island, British Columbia, to south-eastern Alaska, Regular 
trips are now made during the summer months by fast 
steamers and the travel to this distant part of our country 
is annually increasing. The coolness of the climate and 
grandeur of the scenery are more easily understood by a 
summer visit, than here described. As the calm and enjoy- 
able voyage is made through what is called the "inland 
passage," sheltered by islands lying all along the coast, the 
traveller beholds arctic scenery at every turn ; snow-capped 
peaks and ranges, ice-clad gorges, fields of glacial ice, 
outjutting glaciers, and sometimes ice-bergs, which to the 
inhabitant of temperate regions are as beautiful as they are 
strange, attracting the eye and engaging the mind in the 
most restful manner. After the arrival of the tourist in 
Alaska this interest is fully sustained, for the mining towns, 
Indian villages and the homes and habits of the natives will 
afford much entertainment and diversion. This great terri- 
tory, rich in treasures, good fish and charming scenery, is 
a wonderful section of country and is as yet but little ap- 
preciated by the great majority of Americans. The follow- 
ing brief descriptions of the points at which the steamers 
stop may be of interest to the reader. 

Fort Tongas. — Fort Tongas is the guarding point at the 
lower extremity of the dividing line between British Amer- 
ica and Alaska. The fast excursion steamers seldom stop 
at this place ; the smaller ones which carry more or less 
freight and have very good passenger accommodations, 
stop at this and all other points, even canneries, where pas- 
sengers are to be landed or freight is to be discharged. 

The Fort is located on an island in front of the harbor, 
formed by the water ways, which are very narrow, be- 
ing obstructed by reefs, so that only small vessels can en- 



113 

ter with safety. The anchorage is dangerous on account 
of these reefs, although the harbor waters are quite deep. 
There are several large Indian villages located on the main- 
land, which is well wooded and quite level. A tourist, un- 
less he desires a primitive mode of life, would hardly care 
to stop at this point. 

Fort Wrangell. — The next place of interest to the tourist 
is Fort Wrangell, situated at the mouth of the Stickeen 
or Stikine river. It derives considerable importance from 
the United States Military post, which was erected here in 
1867, on the northern headland near the entrance of the 
harbor. Baron Wrangell, in 1834, established a stockade 
post called St. Dionysius, which is now in ruins. Nearly 
one hundred thousand dollars have been expended in 
buildings in this locality. The commerce and gold findings 
amounted to nearly a million of dollars in 1867. In this 
vicinity is found a greater number of Totem Poles and 
Indian relics than in any other region, because there are a 
number of Indian villages in this neighborhood. Here is 
quite a little town called Wrangell, where a deputy collec- 
tor of customs lives ; also missionary establishments, two 
churches and a school for the Alaskans. But visitors will 
be more interested in the curios and carvings on the differ- 
ent poles which are found throughout the village, as well 
as what is contained in the Indian huts. The Indians have a 
great many silver and gold rings and ornaments for sale, 
and for money will part with almost any article laying 
about their houses or tepees ; moreover, they take care to 
make a thoroughly Yankee bargain in the transaction ; 
they call all white people "Boston men." 

All the steamers stop here and remain for several hours, 
giving tourists a good opportunity to see these primitive 
people and the articles that they have for sale. Except for 



114 

miners or sportsmen there is nothing to tempt a longer 
delay. 

Juneau. — Probably the most flourishing place in Alaska, 
and one with the best prospect of becoming a large city, is 
the mining town of the above name. It was originally 
called Harrisburg, but its name was changed in honor of one 
of the prospectors ; the harbor was formerly called Rock- 
well, after a naval officer. There were two men, Harris 
and Juneau, who established the first camp at this place. 
The district was named for the latter, and the town for the 
former, but the residents being troubled about their mail 
matter, held a meeting and adopted the latter name for the 
city, and the United States Government thereupon estab- 
lished a post-office at Juneau. The town is located at the 
base of a lofty and precipitous range of hills, back of 
which in the basin adjacent, have been found some very 
fine gold and silver mines, while others farther back in 
primeval forests are coming to light, making this a rapidly 
growing place in which a traveller, notwithstanding meagre 
hotel accommodations, may spend a few days very pleas- 
antly. A large number of Alaskan curios and northern 
furs may be found in the stores in this place. The popula- 
tion numbers about two thousand, with Indian villages 
adjacent. 

Douglas Island. — Directly across the Gastineau Channel 
is found the flourishing town of this name. Probably 
the most extensive gold and silver mine in the world 
exists at this place. The ores are mingled with 
galena and iron pyrites. Although it produces a small 
quantity per ton, the vein is inexhaustible, being 
in some places about four hundred feet wide and run- 
ning almost the length of the island. In visiting the 
mines and stamp mill, we found that there were one hun- 



115 

dred and twenty stamps running night and day the year 
round, and giving an average output of gold of about 
seventy-five thousand dollars worth per month, and at that 
time, 1887, the company were talking of doubling their ca- 
pacity. They were then adding a number of improved 
furnaces for roasting the ore. Other mining operations 
have begun there, and it will pay the traveller to lay over 
a week or two for the next steamer. 

Chilcat and Chilcoot Inlets. — The excursion steamer will 
sometimes run up to these most northern points, where 
there is nothing of interest except the native villages 
and a missionary post called Haines. The scenery up 
these channels is sublimely grand. Tall mountains and 
cliffs loom up on either side with many beautiful cascades 
and waterfalls, and it is these charming views that call the 
steamer to this point, for there is no stopping place for 
tourists until we reach Sitka, unless chey choose to camp 
out. 

The steamers pass two of the largest glaciers in 
Alaska ; the Davidson glacier, located on Seduction Is- 
let, which it is claimed has the widest outlet, but it is 
hidden by a narrow, dense jungle at the base, through 
which we groped and almost lost our way before we reached 
the stream which led up beneath the glacier. Some dis- 
tance to the south, after passing through Glacier Bay, in 
the waters of which were floating many beautifully tinted 
ice-bergs, we came in front of one of the finest glacial out- 
lets in the world, for the steamer is able to sail directly up 
to its base, so that the ice-crags frown down in majesty upon 
the seemingly tiny craft. It is said to be three miles in 
width, and from two to three hundred feet in height, strik- 
ing the eye of the beholder with amazement at its beau- 
tiful ice-cliffs, coves and caverns. The steamer usually 



ii6 

reaches there in the morning and remains until after- 
noon, to allow visitors time to climb over its crystal peaks 
and pinnacles and explore the crevasses, and listen to the 
crumbling ice as it breaks in thunder tones, and plunges 
down into the deep waters beneath. 

Sitka. — Sitka, the capital of Alaska, is the rounding 
point of this delightful voyage, by way of the inland pas- 
sage. It was formerly called by the Russians, New 
Archangel, the present name being native, probably 
derived from a tribe of Alaskans with a similar designation. 
Count Baranoff, the Russian Governor, founded the town 
in 1804, after the natives had destroyed the original set- 
tlement on Starri-Gavan Bay in 1800. It was the head- 
quarters of the Russian American Company, and has 
become the chief town of this portion of the country under 
the United States Government. The town is situated on 
the eastern portion of Sitka Sound. The steamer usually 
stops here over a day, and there are two or three small 
hotels where the tourist will find as fine accommodations as 
it is possible to obtain in Alaska outside of the cozy 
vessels. 

The town holds a number of objects of interest and 
there is an Indian village of perhaps a thousand inhabitants* 
running along close by the shore. There are probably as 
many more Russians and Americans, together with the 
troops stationed in the old Baranoff citadel situated at this 
place. It is the headquarters of the Governorship, Judici- 
ary and the residence of other government officials. The 
return voyage from this town is sometimes made by a 
shorter route through the channels, which is equally as 
enjoyable as that of the out-bound trip. 

Metlah-Kathla. — Sometimes the steamers will stop at the 
missionary town of Metlah-Kathla, on the coast of British 



117 

America, established by William Duncan about thirty years 
ago. As you approach it, it appears like a thriving American 
town with straight avenues and streets ; and as you meander 
on you will find that most of these frame houses indicate for- 
mer thrift but are now vacated, the converted and educated 
Indians having followed Mr. Duncan to an Island in the south- 
ern part of Alaska a ; large fleet of canoes were just leaving 
the day that we arrived at the place. The round trip by 
the fast steamer is accomplished in eleven days, but by 
smaller ones eighteen or twenty days may be consumed. 

Healthful and restful sea-water trips may be made along 
the Pacific coast from San Francisco northward and up the 
Columbia river to Portland, or direct to the various ports 
on Puget Sound, or through the straits of Juan de Fuca on 
to Nanaimo, Victoria, or Vancouver, B. C, or vice versa. 
Other ocean voyages can be made southward to San Diego 
or intervening ports from San Francisco. Australia, the 
Hawaiian Islands and South American ports, can be 
reached by steamer lines running regularly from the same 
port. 

Occasionally steamers or sailing vessels run north to 
Behring Sea, to the Seal Islands of St. Paul and St. George 
and to some of the Aleutian Islands, but there is no regular 
line. 

SANDWICH ISLANDS. 

A delightful voyage, particularly for the winter months, 
is that to the Sandwich, or Hawaiian Islands, the most north- 
erly group of the Polynesian Archipelago, which lie in the 
North Pacific between Mexico and China. There are 
twelve islands in the cluster having a total area of over six 
thousand square miles ; two thirds of which is included in 
the principal island, Hawaii, which gives its name to the 
group. The other islands are : Maui, Molokini, Kahoolawe, 



ii8 

Lauai, Molokai, Oahu, Kauai, Lehua, Niihau, Kaula and 
Bird. 

The trip from San Francisco has been described as fol- 
lows: 

"The voyage down to the islands lasts from eight to 
nine days, and even to persons subject to sea-sickness it is 
likely to be an enjoyable sea-journey, because after the 
second day the weather is charmingly warm, the breezes 
usually mild and the skies sunny and clear. In forty-eight 
hours after you leave the Golden Gate, shawls, overcoats 
and wraps are discarded ; you put on thinner clothing. 
After breakfast you will like to spread rugs upon the deck 
and lie in the sun, fanned by deliciously soft breezes, and 
before you are in Honolulu, even in winter, like to have an 
awning spread over you to keep off the sun. On the way 
you see flying fish, and if you are lucky, an occasional whale 
or a school of porpoises, but no ships. It is one of the lone- 
liest of ocean tracks, for sailing vessels usually steer farther 
north to catch stronger gales. But you sail over the lovely 
blue of the Pacific Ocean, which has not only softer gales, 
but even a different shade of color than the fierce Atlantic." 

The Sandwich Islands are the result of volcanic action 
and are mountainous in character. On this account the 
climate varies with the locality ; on the windward or eastern 
coast the rain falls more frequently and abundantly than on 
the lee side. The chief place of resort is Honolulu^ the cap- 
ital of the kingdom, which is situated on the south coast of the 
island of Oahu, at the base of towering mountains that shelter 
the town from the trade winds and rain storms. Its popula- 
tion is about fifteen thousand, a large proportion of which 
consists of foreigners, many of whom are Americans. The 
hotel accommodations are first-class, and the social advant- 
ages superior ; the residents being very hospitable, mak- 



119 

ing visitors feel most welcome. The climate is mild and 
equable, the winter range of temperature being from sixty- 
eight to eighty-one degrees. The annual rain-fall averages 
about forty-one inches, but is irregular and the moisture 
quickly disappears, as the soil is porous. The scenery 
surrounding Honolulu is purely tropical. Pleasant excur- 
sions may be made to neighboring places. The mountains 
in the vicinity are more suitable as a place of residence 
than the town, during that part of the year between May 
and September Lahaina, on the island of Maui, and Hilo, 
on the eastern side of the island of Hawaii, are towns that 
are more or less visited by invalids, but they do not afford 
such conveniences as are to be found at Honolulu. The 
former has rather a milder climate than that of Honolulu, 
while the latter, being on the windward side of the is- 
land, has an extremely humid climate, rain falling nearly 
every day. In the interior of the island of Hawaii is the 
little town of Waimea, with an equable and comparatively 
low temperature. It is a place of retreat from the damp- 
ness of the shore. A fine line of steamers is running. 

LAKE TRIPS. 

The Great Lakes. — Most enjoyable tours may be made 
during the spring, summer and autumn to and over the 
waters of the Great Lakes lying on our northern border. 
These five lakes, Superior, Michigan, Huron, Erie and On- 
tario, are the largest bodies of fresh water in the world. 
They are so connected that a continuous journey can be 
made through their entire length, with but one break which 
is caused by the great " Falls " of the Niagara river, which 
stream connects Lakes Erie and Ontario. The longest 
trip is from Duluth, or Superior city, Minn., at the extreme 
western part of Lake Superior, to Buffalo, N. Y., at the 



I20 



foot of Lake Erie, or vice versa, a distance of one thousand, 
two hundred and thirty-five miles, which is accompKshed in 
one week. The places at which landings are made are 
quite numerous. Those made on the trip down Lake Su- 
perior after leaving Duluth are : 

Bayfield, Washburn and Ashland, Wis.; Ontonagon, Ea- 
gle Harbor, Portage Lake, (Houghton and Hancock) 
and Marquette, Mich. From the last named place the 
steamer proceeds to Sault Ste. Marie and passing through 
the strait which is about sixty miles in length, comes to 
Lake Huron. In the passage over the waters of the last 
named lake it makes but one stop, which is at Detroit, 
Mich. The next landing is at Port Huron, Mich., at the 
head of the St. Clair river, thence it passes through the 
lake of the same name to the flourishing and beautiful city 
of Detroit, from which stopping place it resumes its jour- 
ney, passing through the Detroit river to Lake Erie, down 
which it sails to Buffalo, making landings at Sandusky and 
Cleveland, O., Erie, Pa., and Dunkirk, N. Y. 

A trip along the northern shore of Lake Superior is very 
delightful, starting from Duluth and sailing past the Palis- 
ades to Fort William, Ont., thence past Thunder Bay to 
Red Rock, Ont., and from this place to Sault Ste Marie. 

Another trip maybe made by starting from Chicago, 111., 
at the head of Lake Michigan, stopping at Milwaukee, 
Wis , thence passing over the entire length of the lake to 
its foot, through the straits of Mackinaw and down Lake 
Huron, stopping at Bay City on the way to Port Huron. 

A passage may be made over the waters of Georgian Bay 
(Lake Huron) from Sault Ste Marie to Collingswood, Ont. 

A voyage over Lake Ontario is accomplished by starting 
at Hamilton, Ont. Landings are made at Toronto, Port 
Hope, Cobourg and Kingston, all of the same province. 



121 



This is completed in a little less than twenty-four hours. 
The journey may be continued from the last stopping place, 
Kingston, down the St. Lawrence river to Montreal, Que- 
bec and other interesting places. 

RIVER TRIPS. 

In our journeyings by water we must not overlook those 
to be made upon some of the great rivers of our country. 

The St. Lawrence river. — This voyage is a very pictur- 
esque one. After leaving Kingston the steamer passes 
through that portion of the river known as the Lake of the 
Thousand Islands and through it passes along amid lovely 
islands and islets, stopping at Clayton and Alexandria Bay ; 
thence it proceeds down the river to Ogdensburg, N. Y., 
and Prescott directly opposite on the Canadian shore. 
Some miles below these places it passes through the first 
of the rapids. A number of miles further down the river it 
comes to Long Sault Rapids, nine miles in length, where 
the exciting experience of "shooting the rapids" is encount- 
ered. At the foot of these rapids the river begins to flow 
entirely through British soil, where it soon expands into 
Lake St. Francis. After passing through this the steamer 
makes its way through more rapids, then into another ex- 
pansion known as Lake St. Louis, below which comes the 
great Lachine Rapids, the descent of which is described as 
"an intense sensation, terrible to the faint-hearted, exhilar- 
ating to the brave." After pursuing its course for nine 
miles further, the steamer reaches the beautiful city of 
Montreal, the metropolis of British North America, situated 
on an island of the same name at the confluence of the Ot- 
tawa with the St. Lawrence, the head of ocean steamship nav- 
igation. Thence pursuing its course down the river forty- 
five miles to the town of Sorel, five miles below which place 



122 

the steamer passes into the expansion of the stream knowii 
as Lake St. Peter, below which it stops at the city of Three 
Rivers, located at the mouth of the St. Maurice river, and 
from there proceeds onward down to the historic city of 
Quebec where the regular tour of the St. Lawrence ends. 

The lower river is very interesting and a pleasant trip 
may be made upon it, thence through the Gulf of St. Law- 
rence around to Pictou, other points in Nova Scotia, or St. 
Johns, Newfoundland, or to intermediate stations, and from 
some of these places, if desired, the voyage may be contin- 
ued to Portland, Me. 

An enjoyable summer excursion may be made from Que- 
bec in one of the splendid steamers to and upon the beautiful 
Saguenay River, the largest tributary of the St. Lawrence, 
which enters that river one hundred and twenty miles below 
Quebec. It is navigable for sixty-five miles of its course. The 
scenery along the river is very bold and charming, the 
steamer passing between grand precipices which tower up 
on either side for many miles. 

Another of these trips may be made upon an affluent of 
the St. Lawrence, the Ottaicay, or Grand River, at the 
mouth of which lies the village of St. Anne, where Tom 
Moore wrote his beautiful Canadian Boat Song, beginning 
with the familiar lines : — 

Faintly as tolls the evening chime, 
Our voices keep tune and our oars keep time ; 
Soon as the woods on the shore look dim, 
We'll sing at St. Anne's our parting hymn. 
Row, brothers, row, the stream runs fast, 
The rapids are near and the daylight's past." 

THE HUDSON RIVER. 

A wonderfully picturesque though short trip of about 
twelve hours may be taken night or day on the historic and 



123 

noble waters of the Hudson, which has its source among 
the Adirondack lakes and serves as an outlet for a portion 
of their waters. It flows amid scenery more or less enchant- 
ing, till it enters New York Bay. The section of country 
through which it wanders is famous in romance and history. 
Some of the scenes of Cooper's "Last of the Mohegans," 
are laid at Glens Falls, a point about sixty miles north of 
Albany, where the river rushes through a ravine, making 
a descent of fifty feet. It is a spot of beauty which is 
much frequented by summer visitors. Many places along 
the river are inseparably associated in the mind with 
the writings of Washington Irving, while others serve as 
reminders of the days of the Revolution. The banks of 
the river are dotted with handsome residences and villas, 
thriving villages, towns and cities, many of which are 
pleasant and popular summer resorts. We will briefly de- 
scribe the larger and more important of these places which 
are passed in coming down the river from Troy to the 
great metropolis lying at its mouth. 

Albany, the capital of the Empire State, six miles below 
Troy, is the first landing the boat makes. Hudson, some 
miles below on the east bank, is a pleasantly situated city of 
ten thousand inhabitants commanding an extended view of 
the mountains opposite. CafsMll, one hundred and fourteen 
miles from New York, is on the west bank of the river. It 
is a pretty place and a point of approach to the mountains 
of the same name. Hyde Park, eighty miles from New 
York on the east bank is also a fine place, more or less fre- 
quented in summer. 

Poughheepsie, five miles south of the last named town, is 
the second city in size that we pass ; its population being 
over twenty thousand. It is situated at an elevation of 
over two hundred feet above the river and is quite an educa- 



124 

tional centre. New Paltz Landing, just across the river, is 
connected with Lakes Mohawk and Minnewaska by stage. 

Newhurg, some miles south on the same side of the river, 
is a city of eighteen thousand inhabitants. It has an ele- 
vation of three hundred feet, and has comfortable hotels and 
boarding places. Fishldll Landing, lying on the opposite 
bank is a small but pretty place. 

Cornwall is another cosy spot situated on the west bank 
and much resorted to in summer, as is also West Pointy a few 
miles further south where is located the famous national mil- 
itary school. The Highlands occur at this portion of the 
river's course and extend for sixteen miles southward, some 
of the peaks attaining an elevation of sixteen hundred feet. 
Garrison, situated about fifty miles from New York, nearly 
opposite West Point, is a favorite place with summer 
visitors. 

PeeJcsJvill, is located eight miles south at a bend in the 
river, in the midst of the finest and most commanding 
scenery. Sing Sing is situated on the east side of that por- 
tion of the Hudson known as Tappan Zee, on the Tappan 
Bay at a distance of thirty-three miles from New York. 
It is a charming village containing many fine residences. 
Tar7'ytown is pleasantly situated four miles to the south. 
This place is intimately associated with Irving's writings. 
Sleepy Hollow, where his remains are buried, being but a 
short distance from here. Nyach lies on the opposite bank. 
It is a pretty place located in a hilly region. 

Yonlcers, on the east shore, seventeen miles from New 
York, is a most delightful town containing many magnificent 
residences, and is in reality a suburb of the great city so 
near. For miles above New York, along the abrupt river 
banks, a great number of costly villas peer out from among 
forests, terraces, evergreen and summer foliage, adorned 



125 

with lawns of greensward, flower beds and many tinted 
borders and plateaus of artistically arranged plants. 

MISSISSIPPI RIVER. 

The tour of the Mississippi, the great "Father of Waters," 
is divided into two portions. That upon the upper river 
extending from St. Paul to St. Louis, and that upon the 
lower river, from St. Louis to New Orleans. The river 
is not navigable for the first thousand miles of its course ; 
that is from its source in northern Minnesota, near that of 
the Red river of the north, to the Falls of St. Anthony 
at Minneapolis. Below this point its surface is plied 
with fine steamers which afford excellent fare and good 
berths and state-rooms. The following are the principal 
landings made on the descent of the upper river : St. Paul, 
Hastings, Prescott, Red Wing, Winona, La Crosse, Lansing, 
Prairie du Chien, Mac Gregor, Dunleith, Dubuque, Galena, 
Fulton, Clinton, Davenport, Rock Island, Muscatine, Bur- 
lington, Nauvoo, Keokuk, Quincy, Hannibal, Louisiana, 
Alton and St. Louis. The scenery of the upper river is very 
beautiful as far as Alton, below which point it resembles 
that of the lower river, which is dismal and unattractive. 
The stopping places between St. Louis and New Orleans 
are : Cape Girardeau, Cairo, Columbus, New Madrid, 
Memphis, Helena, White River, Napoleon, Young's Point, 
Vicksburg, Natchez, Red River, Bayou Sara, Port Hudson, 
Baton Rouge, Plaquemine, and Donaldsonville. 

THE OHIO RIVER. 

The largest affluent of the Mississippi is the Ohio river 
which joins it at Cairo, after a course of one thousand miles, 
which is navigable throughout from its formation at Pitts- 
burg by the union of the Alleghany and the Monongahela 
rivers. The scenery along the river is never grand but it 



1 26 

is often quite fine. From Pittsburg to Wheeling, the trip is 
made upon packets ; from the latter point in large and 
comfortable steamers to Cincinnati, from which place fine 
steamers run down the river to Cairo. When the waters 
are high large steamboats of the flat-bottom style in use 
upon the western rivers, can ascend the Alleghany for a 
long distance at least as far as Franklin, and also up the 
Monongahela as far as Brownsville, Pennsylvania. 

THE COLUMBIA RIVER. 

In the extreme Northwest we find the beautiful Columbia 
river which is navigable, except at its rapids, for about one 
thousand miles of its course. The scenery of the lower 
two hundred miles is famous. This includes the Dalles 
and Cascades, where the river forces its way through the 
Cascade Mountains and runs for a distance of fifty miles 
between precipitous walls of stone and mountains. This 
portion of the river is not navigable, but a pleasant trip 
may be made from Portland, Or., on the Willamette river 
down to Astoria, near the mouth of the river, or up to the 
Dalles, a distance of about one hundred and twenty miles, 
where a train may be taken at two different points around 
the obstructions and the trip resumed up the river, through 
more or less inspiring scenery, to Wallula, about two 
hundred and forty-five miles from Portland. 

Quite a number of short excursions can be made upon 
the smaller craft that ascend such rivers as the Red, the 
Tennessee, the James, the Missouri, the St. Johns and a 
number of others in various parts of the country. These, 
however, have a local reputation only, and are suitable 
usually for those who reside in cities or towns on their 
banks, or individuals who may be visiting near them. 



CHAPTER VII. 

MINERAL SPRINGS. 

Medicinal Value known to the Ancients— Climate of the Locality — Classifica- 
tion—Mineral Springs of the United States — Therapeutics. 

The custom of employing the waters of mineral springs 
for medicinal purposes is universal, prevailing among the 
people of savage as well as civilized nations, and it has 
been so in all ages. The ancients were familiar with the 
medicinal properties of the waters of some of the now 
most famous and popular spas, which were in many 
cases, the sites of temples. Their waters were then, as 
now, highly prized as medicaments and were used internal- 
ly or in the form of baths. Until a comparatively recent 
date each spring or fountain was supposed to be presided 
over by a deity or spirit, through whose instrumentality 
cures were effected, and many fanciful legends grew out of 
this belief. 

Probably many of the mineral springs of our own coun- 
try were known and used by the Aborigines. As early 
as the fourteenth century, the High Rock of the Saratoga 
Springs was frequented by the Mohawk Indians and called 
by them "The Medicine Spring of the Great Spirit." 
There are about three thousand localities in the United States 
where mineral springs are known to exist, while the num- 
ber of individual springs is three times as great ; at many of 
the spas there are a number of springs which greatly vary in 
composition and properties. More than six hundred of these 
localities have been developed as health resorts. The loca- 
tion of a spring is a matter of importance, for undoubtedly 

(127) 



128 

much of the benefit accruing from a residence at the various 
spas, arises from the climate and surroundings, such as : alti- 
tude, temperature, atmospheric conditions, scenery, out- 
door exercise, sanitary and hygienic surroundings, nutri- 
tious food, pleasant amusements, congenial company, 
and other similar circumstances ; hence these adjuncts 
should be carefully considered in choosing such a place for 
the restoration of health. 

The actual value of mineral waters as therapeutic agents 
independent of the surroundings, has been a much mooted 
question ; but there can be no doubt that they possess medi- 
cinal virtue, varying in kind and degree with the ingredients 
of the waters. These ingredients are, in many of the min- 
eral waters, similar to the constituent salts and gases of the 
human body, and exist in a form which can be readily ap- 
propriated by the tissues ; moreover in many cases they 
stimulate the depuratory organs, skin, liver and intestines, 
to increased secretion. But had these waters no medicinal 
value, the course of treatment pursued at most of the spas 
must affect the patient suffering from a chronic dyscrasia, 
such as rheumatism, syphilis, or scrofula, in a favorable man- 
ner, as the frequent, long continued, thermal baths and inges- 
tion of unusually large quantities of water, thoroughly 
drench the system with that fluid, which must rapidly dis- 
place the water constituting two thirds of the human organ- 
ism, and cause pronounced tissue metamorphosis, and pro- 
duce changes in the system in a few weeks, which under 
ordinary conditions would require years to accomplish. 

It is needless to state that great care should be exercised 
in the employment of mineral waters ; when they are ad- 
vised, the prescriber should be familiar with their chemical 
constituents, therapeutic properties and the applicability of 
the individual spring to the individual case, and carefully 



129 ' 

direct as to the quantity, as well as the mode and time 
of use. 

Objection has been made to the use of mineral waters 
on the ground of polypharmacy, because of the multiplicity 
of their constituent elements, but in answer to this it has 
been suggested that the same is true of many of the medi- 
cinal substances of organic origin, so commonly employed 
in medicine. Again, it has been claimed that the waters 
are, in many cases, used empirically, their exact ingredients 
being unknown or the mode of their action not well under- 
stood, but this is a plea that might with equal force be 
brought against many accepted medical procedures. 

Mineral springs are variously classified ; the best classifi- 
cation for medical purposes is the chemical, which specifies 
a spring-water as belonging to a class indicated by the in- 
gredient which is most abundant or most active, as alkaline, 
saline, sulphur, chalybeate, calcic, sulphated, and simply 
thermal. Many springs produce waters which possess the 
properties of two of these classes, and are termed accord- 
ingly, alkaline-chalybeate, saline-sulphur, thermal-calcic, and 
so on. 

Alkaline. — The waters of this class are rich in alkaline 
carbonates, the chief of which is the carbonate of soda ; 
they usually contain a quantity of carbonic-acid gas. The 
use of the alkaline waters is generally considered by the 
medical profession to be indicated in catarrhal affections of 
the respiratory, digestive and genito-urinary organs ; in 
uric acid, diathesis ; malarial cachexia ; and diabetes mel- 
litus. The following are some of the springs of this class, 
found in the United States : Sheldon Springs, Franklin 
County, Vt, Welden Spring, St. Albans, of the same state 
and county ; Orkney Springs, Shenandoah County and 
Rockbridge Baths, Rockbridge County, Va. ; Capon Springs, 



I30 

Hampshire County, W. Va. ; Bladen Springs, Choctaw 
County, Ala. ; St. Louis Spring, Gratiot County, Mich. ; 
Congress Springs, Santa Clara County, and Borax Springs, 
Lake County, Cal. 

Saline. — The chlorides are the chief constituents of these 
waters, the chloride of sodium predominating ; traces of 
iodine and bromine are sometimes found. The saline wa- 
ters are considered to be valuable in the treatment of scrof- 
ula, syphilis, chronic gout, hepatic disorders, malarial ca- 
chexia and cutaneous and catarrhal affections. 

The famous Saratoga Springs of New York belong to 
this class, as do also the Ballston Spa, Saratoga County, of 
the same State. Michigan Congress Spring at Lansing, the 
capital of Michigan. Spring Lake Well and Fruit Port 
Well, Ottawa County, also of Michigan, are well-known 
spas of this variety. 

Sulphur. — In these waters the sulphur is in the form of 
sulphurets, the most prevalent and active being the sul- 
phuret of hydrogen ; this gas imparts its peculiar odor 
and taste to the water. Sulphur waters have been found 
particularly useful in correcting bad habits of the body, 
arising from chronic poisoning, as from metals, or specific 
animal poisons. They are also employed in treating 
chronic engorgement of the liver and its accompanying 
symptoms, catarrhal affections of the respiratory tract and 
diseases of the skin. 

A number of springs of this class are found in the Alle- 
ghany and Blue Ridge regions. In Virginia are the 
Yellow Sulphur Springs, Montgomery County ; Grayson 
Sulphur Springs, Carroll County ; Jordan's White Sulphur 
Springs, Frederick County ; White Sulphur Springs, Mont- 
gomery County ; Huguenot Springs, Powhatan County; and 
Buffalo Springs, Mecklenburg County. In West Virginia 



131 

the Greenbrier White Sulphur Springs, Greenbrier County ; 
Salt Sulphur Springs and Red Sulphur Springs, Monroe 
County; and in Pennsylvania, York Sulphur Springs, 
Adams County ; Carlisle Springs, Cumberland County ; 
and Minnequa Springs, Bradford County, are noted sulphur 
springs. 

The Green-cove Springs of Clay County, Florida, is a 
spring of this class much visited in winter. In Kentucky there 
are a number of sulphur springs : the Upper and Lower Blue 
Lick Springs, Nicholas County; Louisville Artesian Well, at 
Louisville ; Grayson Springs, Grayson County ; Paroquet 
Springs, Bullitt Count}^ and Big Bone Springs, Boone 
County. In New York State are found the Sharon Springs, 
Schoharie County; Avon Springs, Livingston County; Clif- 
ton Springs, Ontario County ; Richfield Springs, Otsego 
County and Massena Springs, St. Lawrence County. The 
Alpena Well at Alpena, Michigan, is exceedingly rich in 
sulphuretted hydrogen. There are some valuable springs 
of this class in Indiana ; of these the French Lick Springs 
and West Baden Springs of Orange County ; Indian Springs 
in Marten County ; Lodi Artesian Well, Wabash County, 
and Lafayette Well, Tippecanoe County, are the most im- 
portant. Near Sitka, Alaska, there are two thermal sulphur 
springs, which are much prized by the Russians and Indians 
who inhabit that region. 

Chalyheate. — In these waters the chief or most active 
ingredient is iron ; many of them are highly charged with 
carbonic acid gas which renders them more palatable and 
efficacious. The ferruginous waters are particularly indi- 
cated where there is a deficiency in the red elements of the 
blood, in cases of anaemia, chlorosis and reduced states of 
the system. The following are some of the best springs 
of this variety found in the United States : Rawley 



M2 



Springs, Rockingham County, Sweet Chalybeate Springs, 
Alleghany County, Rockbridge Alum Springs, Rockbridge 
County, and Bedford Alum Springs of Bedford County, 
Virginia ; Montvale Springs, Blount County, Tennessee ; 
Cooper's Well, Hinds County, and Ocean Springs, Jack- 
son County, Mississippi ; Oak Orchard Acid Springs, 
Orleans County, and Sharon Springs, Schoharie County, 
New York ; and Schooley Mountain Springs, Morris 
County, New Jersey. 

Calcic— l^n these waters the salts of lime form the most 
important ingredients. They occur most frequendy as the 
sulphate (gypsum) or the carbonate (limestone). The 
waters of these springs are useful in the treatment of 
dyspepsia and chronic cystitis with tendency to the forma- 
tion of stone or gravel. Such of these waters as contain 
an abundance of the alkaline carbonates have proved of 
value in treating diabetes mellitus. Some of the more im- 
portant spas of this class are the following : Butterworth 
Springs, Kent County ; Eaton Rapid's Wells, Eaton County, 
and Leslie Well, Leslie County, Michigan ; Clarendon 
Springs, Rutland County, Vermont ; Yellow Springs, Green 
County, Ohio ; Gettysburg Springs, Adams County, Penn- 
sylvania; Sweet Springs, Monroe County, and Berkely 
Springs, Morgan County, West Virginia ; and the Alleghany 
Springs, Montgomery County, Virginia. 

Sulpliated. — In these waters the sulphates predominate ; 
the sulphate of sodium (Glauber Salt) or the sulphate of 
magnesium (Epsom Salt) impart the bitter taste and purga- 
tive properties which characterize the waters. Good ex- 
amples of this class of mineral springs are : Estill Springs, 
Estill County, and Crab-orchard Springs, Lincoln County, 
Kentucky, and Bedford Springs, Bedford County, Penn- 
sylvania. 



Thermal. — The value of this class of waters depends 
more upon their temperature, which ranges from 85° 
Fahrenheit upward, than upon the presence of any 
particular chemical agent, although they may in that 
respect come under the several classifications above con- 
sidered. They are employed, as a rule, in the form of 
baths, and have for this purpose the advantage over arti- 
ficially-heated water, in that the temperature of all portions 
of the water is uniform and remains the same during the 
bath in the large natural pools found at many of the springs. 
These baths may, according to the needs of the case, be 
tepid (85° to 92° Fahrenheit), warm (92° to 98°) or hot 
(98° or above). They may last from fifteen minutes to an 
hour or more ; may be taken every day or less frequently, 
and continued from a few weeks to several months. Ther- 
mal waters are particularly indicated in the treatment of 
chronic rheumatism and gout with contractions and stiff- 
ness of the joints ; secondary and tertiary specific com- 
plaints ; paralysis and such diseases of the skin as psoriasis 
and lichen. 

The following are some of the mosc valuable of the 
springs of this variety ; Lebanon Springs, Columbia 
County, New York ; Hot Springs, Warm Springs and 
Health Springs of Bath County, Virginia ; Warm Springs, 
Meriwether County, Georgia; Warm Springs, Madison 
County, North Carolina; Las Vegas Hot Springs, San 
Miguel County, New Mexico; Idaho Hot Springs, Clear 
Creek County, and Middle Park Hot Springs, Grand County, 
Colorado, and Salt Lake Hot Springs, Salt Lake County, 
Utah. The Yellowstone Park, Wyoming Territory, con- 
tains thousands of springs, mostly calcic and silicious ; 
their temperature varies from 160° to 200° Fahrenheit. In 
addition to these springs, there are about fifty geysers. 



134 

which throw a column of water from fifty to two hundred 
feet in height. The waters of some of these thermal 
springs are employed for baths. Others of this class are : 
Hot Springs, Garland County, Arkansas ; Calistoga Hot 
Springs, Napa County ; The Geysers, Sonoma County, 
Paso Robles Hot Springs, San Luis Obispo County, and 
Santa Barbara Hot Springs, Santa Barbara County, Cali- 
fornia. 

MineraLwaters are cautiously prescribed for children and 
aged persons, also during gestation, and particularly in cases 
of organic disease of the heart, or other organs. When the 
water of a certain spring is selected as suitable for a case, 
it is the custom of the prescribing physician to advise that 
its use be persisted in and not changed for the water of 
another spring, as patients are not benefitted by vac- 
illating from spring to spring. When mineral springs are 
visited it is, as a rule, best to obtain local medical advice. 

The length of time the resident physicians at the springs 
usually suggest for treatment, varies from three weeks to 
as many months. When it is desired to overcome a morbid 
habit of the body, they generally consider it necessary for 
the patient to return to the spring several successive 
seasons for treatment. 

When the water is employed for internal use it should 
be taken moderately and slowly ; the stomach should not 
be overfilled. Frequently the patient is advised to take a 
pint or a pint and a half before breakfast, allowing fifteen 
or twenty minutes to elapse between drinking each glass 
and the same quantity in like manner before supper. 

The temperature of these draughts of water may vary, 
but if too cold (below 50° Fahrenheit), it is not so read- 
ily absorbed as when warmer. Experience has proven that 
it is not necessary to produce a disturbance of the system 



135 

or aggravation of the existing symptoms to effect an im- 
provement. Should such a condition result from the use of 
the waters, they should be discontinued or the quantity em- 
ployed diminished. While the treatment is being pursued, 
the diet should be plain, nutritious and free from excesses, 
and as far as possible the mind should be free from all care 
and anxiety. The food as well as the medicinal waters 
should be taken at regular definite hours and in special quan- 
tities fixed by rule. Many who seek restoration at mineral 
springs, have become invalids through the nervous and 
mental strain incident to business cares and responsibilities, 
as well as from the general custom of many men in 
hurrying through their meals and in drinking fluids too 
rapidly. 

When such an one sets out to recover his health it is 
necessary to observe the requirements laid down in works 
on the subject of Dietetics, and to live a life of thorough 
regularity. 

Medical men selecting springs for their clientele should 
use the same care in individualizing the symptoms of the 
case and adapting the latter to the special spring suit- 
able thereto. For instance, spring water that would help 
a scrofulus diathesis might not benefit a rheumatic or gouty 
patient, while a spring water that might cure a case of 
renal disease might seriously impair one where hepatic 
or cardiac symptoms are present. Then again an in- 
dividual with anaemia might require the prescription of 
drinking water that would contain properties calculated 
to improve the condition of the blood, and this might not 
be a mineral spring that would be of advantage to one 
suffering from a skin disease or a chronic ulceration. 



CHAPTER VIII. 
SUMMER RESORTS. 

Location and Latitude— Resorts of British America — Alaska — The Atlantic 
Sea-board — The Great Lakes — The Great Northwest — The Pacific Coast. 

The fJrst consideration of a suitable place of summer re- 
sort, is a cool, or moderately cool, temperature, and a location 
where there are daily air movements or currents combined 
with the other well-known healthful climatic and sanitary 
conditions, among which we would particularly emphasize 
purity of the air. For such places, it is natural to look 
to the northern section of our country, where, in fact, the 
majority of hot-weather retreats are located ; but we 
must also remember that the temperature of a place de- 
pends not only upon its latitude, but also upon its altitude, 
distance from the sea, and other circumstances. Hence we 
frequently find locations, having a delightful summer climate, 
much nearer the equator than would otherwise seem pos- 
sible. 

Another desirable feature in regard to such a place 
is, that it should be so located as to afford not only beauty 
of scenery, but also have much to attract, in the way of out- 
door amusement and sport. Consequently, most of our 
summering places are found among the mountains, beside 
the sea, or near some body of fresh water. As all places, 
of any note, so located, have been referred to in preceding 
chapters, it will be merely necessary in the case of many 
now under consideration to mention them by name, with- 
out entering upon any extended or particular description 
with regard to them. 

(136) 



137 

During the past half century the resources of the United 
States have been wonderfully developed in this direction. 
Each great city has its suburban villas and neighboring 
places of retreat from the urban heat, unsanitary streets 
and unpleasantness of the summer ; but these can scarcely 
be classed among the summer resorts we are here noting. 
Many of these latter have merely a local popularity, while 
others attract visitors from all portions of the land. 

These havens of retreat from the hot unhealthful atmos- 
phere of towns and large cities, are of inestimable value in 
the prevention of disease and the preservation of life. They 
afford the overtaxed an opportunity to lay aside the cares 
of business and social life for a time. Some of these places 
allow ample means, if one so desires, to return to the 
natural and primitive customs of out-door life, of which our 
higher civilization has so largely deprived us. 

The naming of any special limits of latitude regarding the 
location of summer resorts, is of necessity, more or less ar- 
bitrary ; however, we find the majority of such in this coun- 
try lying between the fortieth and fiftieth degrees of north 
latitude, a region including the British Maritime Provin- 
ces ; New England ; a portion of the Atlantic sea-board in- 
clusive of the northern half of the New Jersey coast ; the 
Great Lakes ; the lake-regions of New York, Ontario, 
Wisconsin and Minnesota ; and that truly remarkable por- 
tion of the United States known as the Great Northwest 
or "Wonderland." 

Other regions more or less frequented during the 
heated term, but lying north or south of the parallels 
named, are the Red river and Lake Winnipeg districts 
of Manitoba and vicinity, and the Alaskan Territory ; while 
those lying south of the lower limiting parallel are : the 
Atlantic sea-board of Southern New Jersey, Delaware and 



138 

vicinity, inclusive of Chesapeake Bay ; portions of the 
Alleghany and Rocky ranges ; and the Pacific coast neigh- 
boring San Francisco and stretching southward below 
that city. 

When one desires to visit a certain suitable resort, 
it may be necessary for him to take a long journey by rail 
or water to reach the locality ; but as traveling does not 
involveithe endurance of the hardships it did in days gone 
by, and as in many cases such a trip simply means residence 
for a few days or a week in a moving palace, the journey 
in itself may prove a source of benefit. Indeed, it so 
frequently does, as the traveler enjoys not only a change 
of climate but an accompanying change of scene, that we 
attach high value to such trips for many people. A visit 
by one residing in the "States" to a point in Canada or 
Alaska necessitates a journey of this kind, 

BHtisli Maritime Provinces. — Special mention has already 
been made of the British Maritime Provinces ; for this 
reason we will simply enumerate the most popular places 
therein, beginning at the eastern limit and proceeding to 
the westward. These are : St. Johns, Newfoundland, Sidney, 
Cape Breton Island ; Charlottetown, Prince Edward's Island; 
Pictou, Bali/ax and Annapolis, Nova Scotia ; and St. John, 
New Brunswick. 

Mushoha District. — In the Province of Ontario, north of 
Lake Ontario and east of Georgian Bay, is what is known 
as the Muskoka District or the "Highlands of Ontario." 
This comprises a group of some eight hundred lakes of all 
sizes, connected by streams. One of the largest and most 
beautiful of this group is Lake Muskoka, twenty-two miles 
in length. Its surface is dotted with several hundred 
islands, and thriving villages are located on its banks. 
This region is much resorted to during the summer, and is 



139 

probably one of the best places on the continent for fish- 
ing, hunting and camping. Its most important towns are: 
Bracebridge, MusTcoka Wharf, Beaumaris^ Port Carling and 
Port Rosseau ; the hotels located at these places, and at 
other points in this district, afford good accommodations. 

Manitoba. — In the Province of Manitoba and the sur- 
rounding territory we find the grand system of lakes and 
streams to which the Red River of the North, and Lake 
Winnipeg belong. This also is a fine region for hunting 
and fishing. 

British Columbia. — The Province of British Columbia 
separates the Territory of Alaska from the United States. 
The capital and chief city, Victoria, attracts more summer 
visitors than any other portion of the Province. It is 
located on Vancouver's Island at the south-western extrem- 
ity of the British Possessions ; the city has a population of 
about eleven thousand, affords good hotels and is a point 
from which trips along the Pacific coast may be made. 

Alaska. — The places of interest to tourists in Alaska, 
"The Land of the Midnight Sun," have already been men- 
tioned. The chief of these is Sitka, situated on the beau- 
tiful Baranoff Island, one of Alaska's Thousand Islands. 
This town is the capital of the Territory and has a popu- 
lation of about twelve hundred. Its climate is compara- 
tively mild and humid, the mean temperature being about 
44° Fahrenheit, the thermometer seldom falling to the 
freezing point ; the annual rain-fall varies from 65 to 90 
inches, as it rains from 200 to 285 days in the year. Min- 
eral springs in the neighborhood of the town are esteemed 
of much value by the Indians and Russians of the vicinity. 

New England. — Within the limits of the United States 
probably no region of equal area contains so many places 
for summering as New England. It has well been said: 



, I40 

"There is scarcely a village or hamlet in New England or 
the Middle States, twenty miles distant from a city, that is 
not more or less visited in summer, and to that extent a 
'summer resort' " This popularity of New England dur- 
ing the heated term is chiefly due to its generally pleasant 
summer climate ; also in part to its great extent of pic- 
turesque sea-coast, with excellent beaches and off-lying 
sea-washed islands ; and its attractive mountains 

" That like giants stand, 
To sentinel enchanted land." 

The individual places of resort found in this region have 
been described in preceding chapters ; hence at this point 
we need simply to recapitulate the names of the most 
important. Along the coast are : Eastport, Bar Harbor, 
(Mt. Desert Island), Bath^ Casco Bay, Old Orchard Beach, 
York Beach, New Castle, Isles of Shoals, Eye Beach, Hamp- 
tcm Beach, Gloucester Beach, Marhlehead, Swampscott, Nan- 
tucket, Martha s Vineyard, Newport, Narragansett Pier and 
Block Island. 

The mountainous regions attract many summer visitors 
by their pleasant climate and scenery. Among the White 
Mountains of New Hampshire are the villages of North 
Conway and Gorham, pleasant places of retreat, and several 
large hotels are also situated at different points in the 
mountains. The principal places of resort in the Green 
Mountains of Vermont are : Montpelier, Stowe and Rutland. 
Those among the Berkshire Hills of Massachusetts are : 
Great Barrington, Stockhridge, Lenox, Plttsfield, North Adams 
and Williamstown. Other attractive places during the warm 
season in this region are : Moosehead Lake and the Rangely 
or Androscoggin Lakes of Maine ; and Lake Winnipesaukee 
of New Hampshire. 

Atlantic Sea-hoard. — Although the summer climate of that 



141 

portion of the Atlantic Coast south of the region just de- 
scribed is not equal in coolness or salubrity to that of New- 
England, still many charming places are found along the 
shores of Long Island, New Jersey and Chesapeake Bay. 
The most important of those on the New Jersey coast are : 
Long Bruncli^ Ashury Park, SiJving Lalce, Atlantic City, and 
Ca])e May. On Chesapeake Bay we find Old Point Comfort, 
Newport News, and many other smaller places, principally 
visited, during the summer months, by residents of the 
southern states and in winter by northern people. 

The most popular mountain resorts of that portion of the 
Atlantic Highland, lying south of New England, are such 
villages as Saranac, Keene and Elizahethtoimi, and the in- 
dividual hotels located in the vicinity of a number of the 
lakes amonor the Adirondacks of New York State ; the vil- 
lages of CatsJdll, Paleyiville, Cairo and Phoenicia, and hotels 
at various points in the Catskill Mountains of the same 
State ; Delaware Water Gap^ Mauch Chunk, Cresson, and 
many other places among the Alleghanies of Pennsylvania; 
and Asheville in the heart of the Piedmont Country, which 
consists of the mountainous region of North Carolina 
and the adjoining parts of South Carolina, Tennessee and 
Georgia. 

In New York State there are a number of summer re- 
sorts located upon the shores or in the neighborhood of 
bodies of fresh water, as : Lakes Champlahi, George, 
Oneida, Cayuga, Seneca, Canandaigua, Keuka and Chautau- 
qua. A number of pleasant health retreats have sprung 
up about some of the mineral springs in the State, the 
most important of which is Saratoga, located about one 
hundred and eighty miles from New York City; it has a 
resident population of about eleven thousand, which in- 
creases to thirty thousand during "the season." The 



142 

springs, which are of the saline variety, attract visitors 
from all parts of the country. The hotel accommodations 
are first class. Some of the other spas of New York 
State are< Richfield Springs, Sharon Spiings, Clifton 
Springs, Balston Spa, Lebanon Springs and Massena 
Springs. Pleasant places for summer residence are found 
allvalong- the banks of the beautiful Hudson. 

The Great Lakes. — The Canadian and United States 
shores of the Great Lakes are dotted with summer resorts. 
At the foot of Lake Ontario are the Thousand Islands ; on 
the Canadian shore are Kingston, Toronto and Hamilton. On 
the southern shore are Sacketfs Harbor, Henderson Harbor, 
Lake View, Ontario Beach, Lakeside and Olcott. Between 
Lakes Ontario and Erie are Niagara Falls. Near the head 
of Lake Erie is Lakeside, a pleasant place, a few miles 
from which are the Putrin-Bay Islands. On the St. Clair 
river, near Lake Huron, is the village of St. Clair, a 
favorite spot. On the shores of Georgian Bay (Lake 
Huron) we find Parry Sound and a number of other 
pleasant places. At the head of Lake Huron is the beau- 
tiful Island of Macinac, a charming summer resort. On 
the shores of Lake Michigan are Petoskey, Cliarlevoix, 
Traverse City, Grand Haven, Highland Park, Lake Forest, 
Lake Bluffs, Waukegan, Sheboygan, Manitowoc. On Green 
Bay are : Menomhiee, Marinette, and Green Bay. On the 
shores of Lake Superior are : Au Train, Marquette, Ash- 
land, and Superior. These lake resorts are referred to at 
greater length in another chapter. 

Many delightful retreats are found among the lake re- 
gions of Michigan, Wisconsin and Minnesota ; these are 
described in the chapter before mentioned. 

The Rocky Mountains. — In the Rocky Mountains there 
are many enjoyable places ; of these we might mention the 



143 

Natural Parks, Colorado Springs, Idaho Springs, and Mani- 
tou Springs, of Colorado, and Santa Fe and Las Vegas of 
New Mexico. 

In the extreme north-western corner of Wyoming Terri- 
tory is the novel and curious geyser and warm spring 
region, known as the Yellowstone National Park, a delightful 
place to visit. Much might be written about it, but it 
should be seen to be appreciated fully. 

In Utah a pleasant summer spot is Garfield Beach, at the 
southern extremity of Great Salt Lake ; another pleasant 
place is Utah Hot Springs, situated about nine miles north 
of Ogden. 

The Northwest. — Though that section of the United States 
known as the Northwest cannot boast of the number of 
highly developed places of resort found in the older 
portions of our country, it contains many which will in 
time come to be justly famous in that capacity. In Idaho 
we find the Soda Springs at an elevation of five thousand 
seven hundred and seventy-nine feet above the sea-level ; 
situated in a pleasant locality, in the south-eastern portion 
of the Territory, in the midst of a fine hunting country ; 
which has a pleasant summer climate and comfortable hotels. 

Some miles to the southwest are the Great Shoshone 
Falls of the Snake river. Some miles to the north we find 
the Guyer Hot Spri^igs, a beautiful mountain resort, two 
miles from the attractive town of Ketchum, which is pret- 
tily situated at the head of the Wood river valley. The 
northern portion of the territory is mountainous and 
covered with forest, which affords excellent sport, while 
fine fishing is enjoyed in Lahes Pend d Oreille, Cceur 
d^Mene and Cocohla, and entertainment can be had at the 
towns on their shores and in their vicinity. 

In Oregon, at the Dalles of the Columbia river, is Dalles 



144 

City, an attractive place, situated in the midst of splendid 
scenery, Portland, on the Willamette river, fifteen miles 
from the Columbia, though not a summer resort, is beauti- 
fully situated amid the Cascade Mountains. From this city 
a fine view may be obtained of such towering peaks as 
Mts. Hood, Jefferson, Adams, St. Helens and Tacoma. 
Asloria is situated near the mouth of the Columbia river, 
where it is joined by Young's river. This town has a 
population of about six thousand. It is quite a place of 
summer resort with persons from the interior ; its hotels 
are good. 

In the eastern portion of Washington Territory are the 
Spokane Falls, formed by the waters of the river of the 
same name. The town of Spokane Falls has a population of 
about twelve thousand, and affords comfortable hotel accom- 
modations. It is situated in a fine section of country for hunt- 
ing and fishing, and is destined to be a large city. Sixteen 
miles southwest is a pleasant resort known as Medical 
Lake. 

On Puget Sound are several places which attract summer 
visitors, such as Olympia, Seattle, Tacoma, Fort Towns- 
end and Whatcom. The waters of the sound afford 
yachting, boating and fishing ; and the surrounding country 
good hunting. The climate is pleasant and the scenery 
very fine, as the sound lies between the Cascade Moun- 
tains on the east and the Olympian Range on the west. 

Pacific Coast. — On the Pacific coast are many charming 
summer resorts. The more important of these are Ilwaco, 
Clatsop Beach, San Rafael, Santa Cruz, Monterey, Pacific 
Grove, Santa Barbara, Santa Monica, San Diego and Goro- 
nado Beach. The most southerly of these are open to 
visitors during the entire year. 



CHAPTER IX. 

WINTER RESORTS. 

Intermediate Resorts — Resorts of Minnesota — Southern States — Southern 
California. 

The rigorous winters and trying weather of the early 
spring months in the northern sections of our country 
make it desirable and advisable for many invalids, as well 
as a goodly proportion of the feebler persons of the com- 
munity, to seek at that time a retreat under sunny southern 
skies amid mild and congenial chmatic surroundings. 

In addition to places which are suitable for the residence 
of this class, during the winter months, there is a middle 
ground, containing what might be termed Intermediate 
Resorts which are especially adaptable for spring and 
autumn. These are very desirable as stopping places for 
the northern invalid on his return home in the spring from 
his winter retreat. There is much danger, as a rule for 
him, if he comes north in the early spring, before the mild 
weather is well established. 

MINNESOTA. 

Contradictory as it may seem, for at least one class 
of sufferers, Minnesota lays claim to being a place of 
winter resort. The central, southern and eastern por- 
tions of the state which have an altitude of about twelve 
hundred feet above the level of the sea, have a cold, clear, 
dry climate which is suitable for some cases of phthisis, 
particularly where the disease is in its incipient stage. The 
principal places of resort are : St. Paul, the capital of the 

(145) 



146 

state, a fine city, with superior hotels, situated on the banks 
of the Mississippi river. Ten miles above, on this mighty 
stream, we find Minneapolis, located at a point in the 
river where St. Anthony's Falls occur ; its situation is less 
protected than that of St. Paul, but it is nevertheless as 
flourishing a city and is much frequented, and has very 
excellent hotels. Red Wing, forty miles below St. Paul, 
and Frontenac, fifty-one miles below, are situated on the 
expansion of the Mississippi river known as Lake Pepin ; 
they are sheltered by hills, afford comfortable entertain- 
ment, and are in all respects pleasant places to visit during 
both summer and winter. Winona, situated one hundred 
miles below St. Paul, on the Mississippi, is sheltered by 
high bluffs along the river, and has good hotels. Fairhault 
is an interior town about fifty miles south of St. Paul ; it 
has all the characteristics of a desirable Minnesota winter 
climate and resting place. 

SOUTHERN RESORTS. 

Along the Atlantic sea-board we find a number of winter 
health-stations, the more northern of which, properly 
speaking, should be called Intermediate Resorts. In the 
pine regions of New Jersey is a place known as Lahewood, 
its name being a hint of the topography of its surroundings, 
havinpf two lakes which are situated in the woods that 
encircle the town, and are miles in extent. This place, 
though new as a winter retreat, is of some local import- 
ance. It is easy of access to New York, and has a first- 
class hotel and appointments, every arrangement being 
made for the comfort of winter guests. Its temperature at 
that season generally registers ten degrees higher than 
that of New York. Its location amid the pine growth, 
and the soil being light and sandy renders the air somewhat 



147 

dry, while the balsamic emanations from the forests make 
it pleasant and healthful. Brown's Mills, also situated in 
New Jersey's pine belt, is a similar retreat, where one may 
enjoy the fragrance of the pine forests. Travelling south- 
ward, we find other places of this class. 

Southern Pines, N. C, is situated near the centre of the 
state, about fifty miles south of Raleigh, on a sandy ridge ; 
the air is impregnated with the perfume of the yellow 
pine. The hotels at this place are comfortable. 

Camden, S. C, lies in a section known as the "Sand 
Hills," in the central part of the state, "the veritable home 
of the long-leaf pine ; the atmosphere, which is saturated 
with the resinous exhalations of its immense forests, is of 
the purest and most invigorating character." Driving, 
riding and fox- hunting are some of the amusements the 
place affords visitors, who are well cared for in the way of 
entertainment. 

Summerville, S. C, is a small town situated amid the pine 
woods. Its winter climate is mild, equable and healthful ; 
and its boarding accommodations are suitable for invalids 
and the healthy alike. 

Aiken, S. (7., is a popular resort, situated in the south- 
western portion of the state, on a sandy plateau about 
six hundred feet above sea-level. The strata underlying 
the sand is gravel, so that after a rainy day the walks 
are dry again in a few hours. The atmosphere is pure, 
moderately dry and saturated with the balsamic properties 
of the pine forest. The winter climate is mild and genial ; 
and the hotels, sanitaria and boarding places are numerous. 

Augusta, Ga., about seventeen miles from Aiken, has a 
somewhat similar climate. It is a beautiful place situated 
on the banks of the Savannah river, two hundred and 
thirty miles from its mouth. It has ample and good hotels. 



148 

The section of the State of Georgia lying south of Au- 
gusta, Macon and Columbus, and in from the coast, has a 
light, sandy soil, which is heavily timbered with pine. A 
similar tract is found in the southern part of Alabama. 
Thomasville, Ga., is situated in what is regarded as the most 
desirable portion of this pine region. It is a pretty town of 
about five thousand inhabitants, situated at an elevation of 
three hundred and thirty feet above sea-level. Its hotels 
are good. 

The health stations along the coast we shall simply name, 
as they have been previously spoken of at some length. 
On the New Jersey coast are Atlantic City and Cape May, 
these are open during the entire year. Their winter tem- 
perature is somewhat higher than that of other places of the 
same latitude, as the Gulf Stream comes nearer the shore in 
their vicinity than elsewhere. On Chesapeake Bay are Old 
Point Comfort and Newport News, Va. Farther south are 
Charleston, S. C. ; Savannah, Ga. ; strictly speaking this 
beautiful city with its intermediate climate is not on the coast, 
but upon the river of the same name, eighteen miles from 
its mouth, its winter atmosphere is mild, genial and equable ; 
Brunswick, Ga., (Brunswick-by-the-Sea as it has been re- 
christened), Fernandina, Pablo Beach and St. Augustine, Fla. 

There are many wintering places among the islands lying 
in the southern waters, most important of them are : Ham- 
ilton, in the Bermudas ; Nassau, in the Bahamas ; Havana, 
Cuba ; Kingstcm, Jamaica ; and Bridgetown, Barbadoes. 

A number of cold weather retreats are found in Florida. 
This state has a mild, sedative, humid, equable, winter cli- 
mate ; numerous lakes and rivers, pine forests and a great 
extent of sea coast. Jacksonville, the largest city of the 
State, is situated on the St. Johns River, twenty-five miles 
from its mouth. Its resident population is about twenty-six 



149 

thousand, which is largely increased during the winter sea- 
son. Desirable accommodations are to be found in and 
about this pleasant southern city. 

Palatka, seventy-five miles up the river, is situated upon 
a fine, high plateau. Its resident population is about five 
thousand, but during the winter it becomes that of a good 
sized city ; tourists and invalids are well cared for here. 
Welaha is quite as pleasant a place, twenty-five mile s 
further up the river. Sanford is situated at the head of the 
steamboat navigation, on Lake Monroe, and is the metrop- 
olis of Southern Florida. It is a comfortable stopping place. 
Enterprise, on the opposite side of the lake, is a favorite 
spot ; its climate is warmer than that of Jacksonville. The 
hotel accommodations are all that could be wished for. 

South of Enterprise is an excellent hunting and fishing 
region among the forests, lakes, lagoons and bayous. 
Favorite places in this lake region are: Winter Park, Or- 
lando, Kissimee City, Barstow and Lakeland. There are 
several places of resort on Indian river, a large lagoon 
or arm of the sea on the east coast ; of these the most 
important is Titusvllle. On Halifax river, another lagoon, 
north of Indian river, are Daytona, New Britain and Port 
Orange. 

The most important health places on the Gulf coast 
are Key West, Tampa, Cedar Keys. AppalacJiicola and 
Pensacola. 

Middle Florida differs from the rest of the state ; its 
surface is hilly, and the vegetation, though abundant, is less 
tropical in character. Tallahasse, the capital of the state, 
is pleasantly situated on high ground. Lakes Bradford, 
Jackson and Lafayette are in the immediate vicinity. The 
hotels are not so large as at some other Florida localities 
but they are good. 



I50 

Quincy, twenty-four miles west, is a mountain village. 
Monticello and Madison^ respectively thirty-three and 
fifty-five miles east of Tallahassee, are pleasantly located, 
and afford good board for visitors. The latter is near the 
Suwanee river and not far from the beautiful group of 

(lakes, whose individual names are Rachel, Mary, Francis 
and Cherry, and whose waters abound in fish. Some miles 
to the south-east are Waldo, Lake City and Gainesville, 
desirable places, located amid the pine woods, which afford 
good entertainment. 

De Funiak Springs, in Western Florida, is a popular 
wintering place. It is a circular lake or spring without 
visible source of supply or outlet. Guests are well cared 
for at this place, where the " Florida Chautauqua " holds its 
sessions from February till April. 

Some miles west of Pensacola is the beautiful city of 
Mobile, »Ala., situated at the mouth of the Mobile river. 
It has a mild, equable winter climate and all needful hotel 
appointments. 

Texas, the "Lone Star State," the largest in the Union, 
presents a variety in climate which corresponds to its ex- 
tended area. Along the Gulf coast the climate is mild and 
humid, the most important places here being Galveston^ 
Indianola, and Corpus Christi. The climate grows dryer 
as we travel westward through the state. Austin lies in 
what is called the "Health Belt," among the foot hills of 
the Colorado Mountains. Its population is about twenty- 
five thousand ; its hotels are excellent. San Antonio, a few 
miles to the south-west, has a pleasant winter and early 
spring climate. There is much in the city and its vicinity 
to interest visitors. Its population is about forty thousand ; 
and visitors are made very comfortable. In the extreme 
western part of the state, on the Rio Grande, on the Mex- 



151 

ican border, is the town of El Paso' This place which 
has a dry chmate, an altitude of three thousand seven hun- 
dred and sixty feet above the level of the sea, and an average 
annual rain-fall of but eleven inches, is a suitable and 
pleasant winter resort. 

There are some places among the Rocky Mountains of 
Arizona, New Mexico and Colorado which are suitable as 
winter resorts ; these are at a moderate altitude and in a 
sheltered position. Santa Fe, N. M., Denver, Pueblo, Las 
Animas, and Trinidad, Col., are some of the most desirable 
places of this kind. 

SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA. 

A number of delightful places for a residence during the 
bleak season of the year are found in Southern California. 
Properly speaking, this region includes the five southern 
counties of the state, namely: Santa Barbara, Ventura, 
Los Angeles, San Bernardino and San Diego, which cover 
an area nearly as large as the whole of New England. Al- 
though California has two seasons, a wet and a dry, this sec- 
tion may be said to have but spring and summer. The wet 
season does not amount to any serious annoyance so far 
south, and the winter climate is that of spring. The 
average annual rainfall is about sixteen inches. 

"The climate resembles in general character that of 
Italy, but has not its objectionable effects of depriving the 
people of the disposition and power of energetic mental and 
physical exercise. The dolce far niente of Southern Italy, is 
unknown in California." Its climate surpasses that of the 
famous resorts of the Rivera in the matter of dryness and 
equability ; it is par excellence the chief of the salubrious 
localities of this country. No enervating heat, and no 
torpor-producing cold is ever felt ; but a genial, healthful cli- 



152 

matic influence prevails the year round. The regulator of 
the temperature is the Kuro-Siwo or Japan current of the 
Pacific Ocean, which is estimated to be a mile deep and five 
hundred miles wide off the California coast, and which never 
varies more than three degrees from its standard, fifty-six 
* degrees. This great body of water is sufficient to exert a 
warm influence in winter and a cooling influence in summer. 
The great interior deserts of California and Arizona doubt- 
less aid in rendering the atmosphere dryer than it might 
otherwise be in an ocean-bordered country. 

The climate of this favored region is mild, moderately 
dry, equable and salubrious. The scenery is very attrac- 
tive, presenting verdure clad mountains and plateaus tower- 
ing thousands of feet above the sea-level, separated by 
fertile valleys wherein a diversity of production is possible, 
the cereals, fruits and shrubs of the temperate regions grow- 
ing side by side with tropical plants and trees. The fruits 
which are found in the greatest abundance are the orange, 
grape, lime, lemon, pomegranate, olive, fig, citron, guava, 
banana, and many others of a semi-tropical nature. Flowers 
are in great variety, and blossom throughout the entire year. 
Some of the most desirable health-stations found in this 
beautiful country will be briefly described. 

Santa Barbara, in the county of the same name, is one 
of the oldest and best known of California's health resorts. 
It is located on the coast, about two hundred and seventy- 
five miles southeast of San Francisco, in a sheltered 
position, mountain ranges shutting off the cold northwest 
winds, and has a fine beach. This town has grown out of an 
old Spanish mission ; its present population is about six 
thousand, half of which consists of persons from the 
Eastern States. The hotels are excellent. The climate is 
very mild and equable. A few miles from the town, among 



153 

the mountains, are the Montecito Hot Sulphur Springs, 
which have an altitude of fifteen hundred feet and afford 
hotel accommodations for those who desire to try the med- 
ical virtues of these thermal waters. 

San Buenaventura, of Ventura County, is located on 
the coast, twenty-seven miles below Santa Barbara, at the 
foot of the Santa Clara and San Buenaventura valleys. 
Its scenery, which embraces mountain, valley and ocean, 
is very picturesque. Its population is three thousand and 
the accommodations for visitors are very comfortable. 

Los Angeles, one hundred and ten miles from Santa 
Barbara, in the county of Los Angeles on a river of the 
same name, is the metropolis of Southern California. Its 
population is estimated to be about seventy thousand. It 
lies in a valley sheltered by surrounding mountains, escap- 
ing the winds that are felt along the coast. It is the centre 
of the orange trade ; the valley is adorned by orange and 
lemon groves and vineyards ; its hotels are exceptionally 
good. The most beautiful suburb of the city is Pasadena, 
which is situated in the highest, most fruitful and picturesque 
part of the great San Gabriel Valley, having an altitude of 
five hundred feet greater than that of Los Angeles ; it 
is a popular and fashionable resort, with well appointed 
first-class hotels. Santa Monica and Long Beach are sea- 
side resorts easy of access from Los Angeles, with desira- 
ble hotel accomodations. 

About sixty miles east of Los Angeles is the town of 
San Bernardino, in the county of the same name, beauti- 
fully situated in a valley producing all the fruits of this 
region, above which Mount San Bernardino, the highest 
peak of the Coast Range, grandly towers. This is a fav- 
orite inland resort having a dryer atmosphere than most of 
the places on the coast. Its hotels are very fine. Coulton 



154 

and Riverside are beautiful places in the vicinity, which 
afford ample entertainment for visitors. 

San Diego, a prosperous city as well as a favorite health- 
station, is the capital of the county of the same name. It lies 
on the coast, four hundred and sixty miles southeast of San 
Francisco, and fifteen miles from the Mexican border. It has 
the finest harbor on the coast south of San Francisco. Its 
population is about twenty-five thousand ; its hotels are first- 
class. Its climate is remarkably dry, mild and equable. 

The spring-like winter months suit many an invalid who 
seeks this spot for recuperation, or recovery from pro- 
tracted chronic diseases. For a long while the town did not 
grow very rapidly, but within the last six or eight years it 
has rapidly increased in population and business thrift, and 
it is constantly filled with health-seekers and tourists. 

One mile across the San Diego Bay, situated on a tongue 
of land which forms the bay and separates it from the ocean, is 
the new and lovely resort known as Coronado Beach. This is 
a beautiful crescent-shaped beach, similar to Cape May, on 
the Atlantic coast. It is six miles long, of hard sand, and 
affords excellent bathing throughout the year. The climate 
is that of perpetual spring. One of the finest and largest 
first-class hotels on the Pacific coast, rivaling the palatial 
establishment at St. Augustine, Florida, has recently been 
erected and completed, with every convenience the most 
fastidious tourist might desire, while the surrounding adorn- 
ments are the most beautiful, and of a tropical character. 
The whole peninsula on which Coronado Beach is located 
was a barren waste three years ago. Now it is becoming a 
place of beauty and it is annually assuming more and more 
attractiveness, and when all the ornamental portions are 
finished, it will be quite like an earthly paradise as well as a 
resort for health. 



CHAPTER X. 

THERAPEUTICS. 

Effect of Climate — Out-door Exercise — Pulmonary Phthisis — Catarrhal Affec- 
tions of the Respiratory Organs — Asthma — Hay Fever — Neurasthenia — 
Debility — Rheumatism — Bright's Disease —Hepatic Disorders — Scrofulous 
Affections — Malarial Dyscrasia. 

So great is the impression made upon the human organ- 
ism by climatic influences that the sentiment expressed in 
the words — " Das Klima ist der Mensch," — may be said to 
be an axiomatical truth. Hence it is, that many pathologi- 
cal conditions are directly produced and others aggravated 
by such influences, while on the other hand many diseases 
may be entirely dispelled, and others of an incurable nature 
so modified, as to symptoms and progress, that the life of 
the invalid is prolonged in comparative comfort for a con- 
siderable period, sometimes for years. Hippocrates said 
that in chronic diseases, to change the locality was of 
much advantage. A modern writer on the subject says : 
"What climate chiefly does is to establish constitutional 
tendencies through molecular modifications which become 
permanent and morbific if its warnings are disregarded 
or opposed, but are often therapeutic and curative when 
intelligently comformed to and heeded." 

A desirable climate is one in which a large proportion of 
the time may be spent in the open air, in amusements and 
exercise, such as driving, riding, walking, gunning, fishing, 
boating, bathing, yachting, or botanizing, which occupy 
the mind pleasantly, while the physical exercise, if used 
wisely and in moderation will stimulate the functions of the 

(155) 



156 

respiratory and digestive organs and skin, and prove gen- 
erally beneficial in effect. It has been estimated that when 
one walks, at the sea-level, at the rate of three miles an 
hour, he inspires three times as much air as when in a state 
of rest. Dryden, realizing the value of out-door exercise 
said : 

' ' Better to hunt in fields for health unbought, 
Than fee a doctor for a nauseous draught ; 
The wise for cure on exercise depend ; 
God never made His work for man to mend." 

This quotation suggests another aspect of the subject, 
namely: That residence in a suitable climate is an import- 
ant factor in the practice of preventive medicine. One 
scarcely appreciated as yet, but whose value will be more 
and more recognized as time proceeds, and we realize that 
it becomes the high calling of the physician to prevent the 
development of a morbid process in the organism, rather 
than to permit it to develop and then attempt its cure. 

However, when a diseased condition exists, it is a matter 
of extreme importance that the climate in which the invalid 
resides should be well suited to his individual case, and that 
where a change in the same is necessary, it should be made 
at a period in the progress of his disease when there is a 
reasonable hope of recovery or improvement. It requires 
considerable acumen and diagnostic skill to untangle the 
network of symptoms present in some cases, and to under- 
stand the nature and importance of such at a sufficiently 
early stage in their progressive course, to decide upon a 
change of climate at a period when it may prove of real 
benefit to the sufferer. An equal degree of discrimination 
is necessary to arrive at a conclusion as to whether the 
disease has reached a stage too far advanced for climatic 
help. If so, it is much better for the invalid to remain at 
home, spending the last weeks or months of his life in 



157 

comparative ease, and decidely more comfort than he could 
derive from a trip, to a more or less distant health resort, 
which would entail upon him mental and physical weariness 
if not suffering. 

It has been truly said that "the trance-dream of the 
invalid is a climate of uniform temperature ; and in search 
of it he examines the claims of all the four continents and 
the five zones of the earth to find that it nowhere exists." 
With equal force another writer states : " There is some- 
thing wrong with the reasoning powers of an author who 
jumbles together climatic attributes so that his ' ideal cli- 
mate ' has no real counterpart among the known climates 
of the world." In short, an "ideal climate" has no exis- 
tence outside of the imagination of those who desire it. 
Nevertheless, though each climate has its own peculiar dis- 
advantages, many are sufficiently salubrious for all practical 
purposes ; and we are inclined to think that such climatic 
conditions are as often found in our own country as 
elsewhere. 

All persons suffering from the same malady will not be 
benefitted by the same climate ; choice of locality must 
vary with the temperament and physical state of the 
patient, the stage of his disease and the season of the year. 
We are not to forget the very important fact that the 
simple change from one climate to another produces in 
almost every individual a train of symptoms which con- 
stitute " acclimatization ; " the milder the process of be- 
coming acclimated the better, of course, it will be for any 
one who is seriously ill. 

The question which now presents itself is : What cases 
are benefitted by change of climate, and where shall such 
cases be sent? 

We do not attempt to give an exhaustive answer, but 



158 

briefly mention in the following pages some of the more 
important facts which this question brings out. 

PULMONARY PHTHISIS. 

Probably there is no condition for which the benefits of 
climate are so often prescribed and sought as in the case 
of that dread malady, the ravaging enemy of the human 
race, and the accompaniment of its higher grades of 
civilization — Pulmonary Phthisis. In many cases where 
there is a predisposition to this condition, or where the 
disease exists in its incipient stage, its development may 
be prevented by giving the sufferers the benefit of a favor- 
able climate, one which will afford them pure air, good 
electrical conditions, freedom from high winds, a comfort- 
able temperature, and plenty of sunshine, so that the 
greater part of the time may be spent out of doors. Since 
it is through the action of the inspired air, or rather of the 
oxygen contained therein, that the tissue changes, formative 
or destructive, which occur continually in the animal organ- 
ism, are carried on, it is a matter of importance that respi- 
ration should be supported under conditions which have the 
fewest disadvantages. Localities suitable for such cases 
are numerous, varying as they needs must with the peculiar 
requirements of each case and the season of the year. A 
cool climate should be chosen for the summer, so that the 
invalid may be spared the prostration incident to extreme 
heat ; while the winter should be spent in a place where 
out-door pleasures and exercise may be freely enjoyed. 

It has been the writer's experience that in the majority 
of cases a dry climate is desirable, and as a rule one not 
having a very high range of atmospheric temperature ; to 
these conditions may be added (for the patient not suffering 
from haemoptysis or feeble heart) that lessened barometric 



159 

pressure obtainable in high altitudes. In short, we believe 
that a pure, clear, dry, cool, rarified atmosphere with good 
electrical conditions and plenty of sunshine, is desirable for 
most phthisical cases. 

Purity of the atmosphere, which consists in freedom from 
dust, smoke, germs, etc., is one of the essentials of any 
climate for lung diseases. The purity of the air is greater 
in high altitudes where the temperature is cool and variable, 
than in a mild, moist, equable climate. 

Clearness or transparency of the atmosphere, is a proof 
of its purity, also of its freedom from moisture ; this is a 
peculiarity of the air of high altitudes, and accounts for the 
apparent nearness of distant objects. 

Dryness of the atmosphere causes a marked increase in 
lung excretion or the transpiration of aqueous vapor from 
the lungs. This renders the separation of carbonic acid 
easier and stimulates an absorption of catarrhal and other 
inflammatory products in the lungs. This property of the 
inspired air combined with coldness is opposed to the 
propagation of germ-life in the lungs, which requires heat 
and moisture for the support of its vitality. In dry climates 
the variability of the temperature range is 'greater than in 
moist climates ; but " it is the humidity of the air, which, 
through conduction of the heat from the body, makes a 
slight temperature change, with the air near saturation, 
equivalent to a much greater change with the air dry." 
The variability of temperature in altitudes has a stimu- 
lating influence upon one living there, also a purifying 
effect upon the air; "this happens through the alternate 
expansion by heat and the contraction of the air by cold, 
together with the nightly chilling and sometimes freezing, 
which regularly renders it inimical to germ-life." 

Coolness or cold is an element in the cHmate of high 



luO 



altitudes, the temperature decreasing at the rate of one 
degree for every three hundred feet of elevation; it is 
here associated with dryness ; moist cold is not desirable 
for enfeebled lungs. A dry, cool or cold atmosphere has 
a stimulating effect upon the organism ; it increases lung 
evaporation and lung expansion, as cold inspired air in- 
creases in volume in the lungs, on account of the higher 
temperature of the body, and expands those organs to their 
fullest extent. 

Rarity of the atmosphere accompanies the lessened 
barometric pressure which obtains at altitudes. This 
pressure, which is equivalent to fifteen pounds to the 
square inch at the sea-level, decreases at the rate of one 
pound for every two thousand feet of elevation ; conse- 
quendy the atmosphere at an altitude of six thousand feet 
is one-fifth rarefied. As a result of this, a volume of air 
contains more oxygen at the sea-level than an equal vol- 
ume does at an altitude ; hence, in the latter situation, an 
increased volume of air must be inspired in order to obtain 
the necessary amount of oxygen. This gives rise to an 
increased action of the lungs and heart ; respiration is 
accelerated and deepened. For some cases of phthisis 
this is a desirable condition, while for those suffering from 
the disease in its advanced stages, where there is much 
softening of the lung tissue, there is more or less danger 
of hemorrhage from the increased force and frequency of 
respiration. It has been decided that the preferable alti- 
tude ranges in the United States from fifteen hundred 
feet in the north, in winter, to ten thousand feet in the 
south, in summer. 

The electrical conditions are favorable in altitudes ; one 
writer on the subject of mountainous resorts says : "The 
changes in the atmosphere in consonance with the variability 



i6i 

of temperature of high climates, are in no small degree 
electrical. There is an increase of electrical tension and 
an easier and more frequent interchange between the posi- 
tive electricity of the dry air, and the negative quality of the 
ground and of the clouds, so that the condition is decidedly 
stimulating. This quality, in mountainous sections, is asso- 
ciated with light showers, especially in summer time, when 
most needed to clear the atmosphere. The simultaneous 
whirl of a light, rapid wind, often seen in high altitudes, 
purifies by its substitution of an unused and fresh supply 
of air for that which is contaminated." 

Sunshine in abundance is a desirable factor in climate, as 
it permits out-door exercise, stimulating to the spirits as well 
as to the physical functions. 

In support of the claims made for the climate of high 
altitudes, for phthisical cases, we would refer to the success 
which has attended the treatment of the disease in the 
Sanitaria established at various points (Davos, St. Moritz, 
Wiesen, Maloja, and others), among the Swiss Alps, where, 
for years past, invalids have spent the winter months, devot- 
ing a large part of their time each day to exercise in the 
open air. In further support of the claims made for moun- 
tainous resorts for this class of invalids, it has been most 
justly stated that it is but reasonable to consider the climatic 
conditions under which phthisis seldom or never occurs, 
as suitable for its treatment when it has originated else- 
where. The altitude of approximate immunity from phthisis 
in the United States has been estimated to be at an eleva- 
tion of about eight thousand feet in the south-western part 
of the country, to an elevation of about four thousand feet 
at the northern border. 

In winter the higher altitudes are not so comfortable for 
the invalid as the medium or lower elevations, the cold 



l62 

being more intense than at the sea-level; for though the 
heat of the sun is greater, it has less power to warm the air, 
on account of the diathermancy of the latter. 

As a rule invalids suffering from organic diseases of the 
heart and great vessels, emphysema of the lungs, acute 
inflammation of the lungs, or great involvement of lung 
tissue with extensive softening, do well to avoid the higher 
altitudes ; in case of weak heart the approach to the elevated 
region should be cautiously and slowly made. 

In selecting mountain resorts for phthisical casfes, places 
having a sheltered location should be given the preference. 
In the summer months these sufferers may find suitable 
places among the White, Green or Adirondack Mountains ; 
the Alleghanies in the region of Asheville, N. C, are also 
desirable. But the best resorts of this kind are found 
among the Rocky Mountains ; the most important of these 
are in Colorado, where the range attains its greatest 
height. Colorado Springs, Idaho Springs, Manitou Springs, 
Pagosa, Springs, Pueblo, Denver, and many other places 
in Colorado might be mentioned as suitable. In New 
Mexico many excellent places are found among the moun- 
tains ; of these probably Sa7ita Fe and Las Vegas are most 
frequented. 

Young persons with a hereditary tendency to phthisis 
or with the disease in its incipient form, frequently derive 
much benefit from out-door life, such as ranching, or 
cattle-raising, in these regions, where the general elevation 
is thousands of feet above the sea-level, where the heat is 
never sultry, and phthisis is unknown, except as occurring 
in persons who have contracted the disease elsewhere. 

Phthisical cases, for whom the climate of higher altitudes 
is not suitable, are frequently benefitted by other climatic 
conditions. 



i63 

A warm dry climate is especially to be recommended for 
cases at an advanced stage of the disease, where suppura- 
tive inflammation exists, as such an atmosphere facilitates 
the healing process. Such a climate is found in Western 
Texas, New Mexico, Arizona, and the interior of Southern 
California. Recently, attention has been called to a depres- 
sion in the eastern part of San Diego County, California, 
known as Sail Felipe Sink or Conchilla Valley. This basin 
is about one hundred and thirty miles in length, and attains 
a depth of about three hundred and sixty feet below the sea- 
level at its greatest point of depression. The air here is 
hot, dry and compressed and is claimed to be suitable for 
some cases of phthisis, which certainly seems very reason- 
able, as compressed air is highly esteemed in the treatment 
of that disease. The principal stopping places in this valley 
are Indio and Salton. The shores of the Dead Sea in Syria 
are about twelve hundred feet below the Mediterranean 
Sea level, giving greater depression by far than of the Con- 
chilla valley, and a man of means has already established a 
sanitarium in that distant land so difficult of access for the 
treatment of lung troubles. 

A mild and moderately dry climate is well adapted for 
some phthisical cases ; such a climate is found in Southern 
California amid the most delightful surroundings ; of all 
the charming places of resort in this region, perhaps San 
Diego and Goronado Beach, deserve to be mentioned first ; 
but Santa Barbara., Los Angeles, San Bernardino and San 
Luis Obispo follow in quick succession, and many others 
present themselves for notice. A mild and somewhat dry 
climate is also found among the pine regions of North and 
South Carolina and Georgia. The sandy soil of these dis- 
tricts is well suited to cases of this kind ; a clay soil which 
retains moisture being most unsuitable for this class of 



164 

invalids. The balsamic exhalations from pine forests, if 
not curative are at least soothing to diseased lungs. Aiken, 
S. C, and Thomasville, Ga.,' are pleasant resorts of this kind. 

A mild and moist climate, characterized by a soft and 
sedative atmosphere, is suitable for some of the more ad- 
vanced cases of the disease, as well as those in which there 
is considerable acute inflammation, indicated by a dry cough, 
accelerated pulse and general feverishness. The climate 
of Florida, the West Indies, and Hawaiian Islands is of this 
variety. The Floridian resorts are numerous, of which 
Fernandina^ St. Augustine, and Jacksonville are the most 
popular. In the West Indies are Nassau, in the Bahamas ; 
Havana, Cuba; Kingston, jamaicdi ; Bridgetown, Barbadoes, 
all much frequented. Honolulu is the chief place of resort 
in the Hawaiian Islands. 

A cold and moderately dry climate has a tonic, bracing 
effect, and is desirable in some cases of incipient phthisis ; 
also in some cases subject to haemoptysis, for hemorrhage 
is less apt to occur in such a climate than in a more relax- 
ing one. The south-eastern portion of Minnesota has a 
winter climate of this description. The general altitude of 
this region is twelve hundred feet. St. Paul and Minne- 
apolis are the principal places of resort, though some of 
the smaller towns have an equally suitable climate. 

Sea-side and ocean climate is often beneficial in its eflect 
upon phthisis, particularly in the earlier stages of the mal- 
ady. Repeated ocean voyages is a climatic prescription of 
great antiquity, but one which is as a rule contra-indicated 
when there exists a condition of acute inflammation or much 
of a tendency to haemoptysis. The seaside resorts most 
suitable for phthisical cases during summer months, are 
those on the coast of Maine, New Hampshire, Massachu- 
setts and Rhode Island, and the neighboring islands. The 



i65 

most important of these are : Eastport, Mt. Desert Island, 
Old Oi'chai'd Beach, Me ; Isles of Shoals, Rye Beach, N. H. ; 
Swampscott Beach, Manchester Beach, Hampton Beach, Nan- 
tucket and Martha s Vineyard, Mass. ; Newport^ Narra- 
gansett Pier, and Block Island, R. I. For the winter, the 
resorts of Florida and the ocean islands already mentioned, 
are most suitable. 

When a sufferer from phthisis has found a climate suitable 
for his individual case, and repaired to it, he should remain, if 
not permanently, which is the best plan as a rule, at least until 
his health is well established, and after leaving should he 
notice a return of his lung difficulty go back at once to the 
favorable climatic conditions. If this desirable climate is pre- 
scribed by his attending physician the prescription should 
be accompanied by a letter of introduction to a reliable phy- 
sician at the place of resort, which communication should con- 
tain information in regard to the patient, the history of his 
malady, past treatment, and other guiding points in the case. 

From considerable observation we are persuaded that as 
a rule, cases of pulmonary phthisis, that have reached the 
last stage of the disease, reap longer life, enjoy more com- 
forts, obtain more kindly care, and suffer less, by a con- 
tinuance at their home, if it be a comfortable one, than they 
do by a residence at an invalid resort, no matter how near 
at hand the locality may be. Not infrequently, where a 
number of such cases are stopping at the same hotel, they 
will greatly annoy each other; disturbing their rest at night 
by coughing, and add to each other's discomfort during the 
day by gloomy and depressing conversation. 

CATARRHAL AFFECTIONS OF THE RESPIRATORY ORGANS. 

Chronic nasal, pharyngeal and bronchial catarrhal inflam- 
mations are often favorably influenced by a change of climate. 



i66 

Some cases are benefitted by the dry, rare atmosphere of 
high altitudes which stimulate the absorption of inflammatory 
products. Other cases are relieved by having recourse to 
sulphur and saline mineral springs. Sea-air is especially 
applicable in some cases, particularly to those having a 
cough accompanied with considerable expectoration. The 
soothing and somewhat dry atmosphere of pine forests is 
very helpful to certain sufferers of this class. 

•ASTHMA. 

Few conditions are more favorably influenced by cli- 
mate than asthma ; but it is a malady presenting so 
many forms and personal idiosyncrasies that no definite rule 
can be laid down as to climate. Sometimes relief is experi- 
enced as the result of removal to a climate quite opposite 
in its characteristics to that in which the trouble originated, 
as for instance, changing from a moist to a dry atmosphere, 
or from an inland to a sea-side place of residence, and so 
on. Some cases, many in fact, are benefitted by residence 
in a high altitude, others by sea voyages ; many suffer less 
while residing in towns where the air is comparatively dry, 
deficient in oxygen and overcharged with carbonic acid. 
Dampness in many cases excites the paroxysms of oppres- 
sion. 

HAY FEVER. 

Sufferers, from the recurrent periodical attacks of this 
perplexing malady, are often much, if not wholly relieved 
by repairing to mountains or sea-side. On the supposition 
that these attacks are excited by the pollen of plants with 
which the air is impregnated in localities which abound in 
vegetation, it is suggested that the sea-side places suitable 
for such cases, should be protected toward the land by eleva- 
tions or hills, and have a tendency to sea-breezes. Invest- 



i6y 

igation has proven a singular immunity from this trouble in 
Southern CaUfornia ; and marked relief if not complete 
cure of those who have repaired to that region. The White 
Mountains are mostly resorted to, Bethlehem being the 
meeting place of the " American Hay Fever Association." 
Places of resort among the Rockies are very favorable to the 
relief of this trouble, 

NEURASTHENIA. 

The sufferers from this sadly common complaint, char- 
acterized by debility or impaired activity of the nerves, 
form a large proportion of the invalids who seek relief 
in a change of climate. In most cases where this con- 
dition is not complicated with any other malady, but is 
simply the result of overwork, excessive mental strain, and 
fatigue, worriment or confinement to business, mere absence 
from these wearying causes of mental and bodily discom- 
fort, combined with change of scene and rest, is sufficient 
to enable nature to react, the nervous system to rebound, 
the physical and mental functions to regain their equilib- 
rium, and recovery to follow. Consequently the climatic 
conditions are not of so much importance as in some other 
cases. The process of acclimatization which follows any 
decided change of climate, with its attendant physical dis- 
turbances, may produce the most radical change for the 
better, in the neurasthenic invalid. Mountain, seashore, 
and in fact all kinds of resorts have proved beneficial 
to such cases. Any of the trips, described in previous 
chapters, upon salt or fresh water, may be helpful, at 
least they will afford entertainment and amusement, with 
change of scene, and tend to divert the over-worked, mel- 
ancholic, or brain-fagged sufferers from thoughts about 
themselves, a matter of vital importance in the recovery of 
such*'cases. 



1 68 

DEBILITY. 

This trouble, as one writer has said, "though not in 
itself a distinct disease, is nevertheless a very definite con- 
dition." Probably it is more frequently due to anaemia than 
to any other cause, and is found in the over-taxed, the 
rapidly growing youth, the convalescent, and others. The 
same climatic conditions which prove of benefit to the 
neurasthenic invalid, will apply to the one suffering from 
debility, the tonic, invigorating air of mountain and sea 
usually proving most beneficial. The waters of some min- 
eral springs are sometimes used in the treatment of such 
cases. The chalybeate waters are generally preferred when 
anaemia is the cause of the condition, those waters being 
chosen which, on account of additional constituents, are 
suitable to the cure of the causes which have induced the 
anaemia. 

RHEUMATISM. 

The chronic rheumatic invalid needs a climate free from 
sudden changes of temperature, high winds, and dampness ; 
one with an abundance of sunshine, a sandy soil, and a 
mild atmosphere, in short — perpetual spring. Such a 
climate cannot be found in any one place during the entire 
year, the nearest approach to it exists in Southern Califor- 
nia. Some cases are benefitted by residing at the sea-shore, 
others at the thermal springs. Mountain resorts, at high 
altitudes, are as a rule, unsuitable for rheumatic cases. 

bright's disease. 

Much the same climate is desirable for sufferers from 
this as from the last named condition ; a mild, dry climate, 
free from sudden changes, especially sudden depressions 
of temperature in winter in cold climates. Persons suf- 
fering from this disease should avoid cold northern winters. 



169 

HEPATIC DISORDERS. 

Invalids suffering from disorders of this kind should not 
reside in low marshy districts, having a moist, warm climate. 
Residence at mountainous resorts and saline and sulphur 
springs are suitable for them. 

SCROFULOUS AFFECTIONS. 

Sea-air is most beneficial to sufferers with disorders of 
this class, as enjoyed either at the seashore or upon the 
ocean. Saline mineral waters (strongly charged with chlo- 
ride of sodium), are also helpful, when used internally and 
in the form of baths. 

MALARIAL DYSCRASIA. 

The bracing tonic air of the sea and mountain is suitable 
for chronic malarial troubles. The use of alkaline and saline 
mineral waters is also beneficial in the treatment of this 
cachexia. 

It seems fitting to sum up this whole subject in the com- 
prehensive and conclusive words of a well-known writer on 
Climatology, which are as follows: "After all that has been 
stated of the effects of the atmosphere in high altitudes, or 
at the level of the sea, the influence of forests and ocean, 
of sea-coasts and interior places, humidity and dryness, cold 
and heat, the winds, electricity and ozone, and no matter of 
what other conditions, the paramount consideration for the 
promotion of health are, an abundance of pure air, sunshine 
and out-door exercise. Without these no climate is promo- 
tive of health or propitious for the cure of disease, and with 
them, it is safe to say, the human powers of accommodation 
are such that it is difficult to distinguish the peculiarities of 
any climate by their joint results on the health and longev- 
ity of its subjects." 



CHAPTER XI. 

MEXICO AND SOUTH AMERICA. 

Mexico — Natural and Historical Attractions — Climate — Places of Resort — 
South America— Mountainous Resorts. 

There is a growing tendency on the part of Americans 
to visit Mexico during the winter season ; this increases as 
the railroad facilities improve. Although the hotels are 
not so numerous or commodious as those of the United 
States, comfortable accommodations may be obtained in 
some places. French and Spanish are the languages 
usually spoken at the inns. " Mexico, the land of mystery 
and romance, will in the future be the resort of the valetudi- 
narian, the pleasure-seeker, the tourist, the student, the 
artist and the speculator. No portion of the Western 
Hemisphere offers so many attractions for a short tour, or 
presents so wide a field for the acquisition of curious and 
scientific information. In her colossal pyramids and in the 
sculptured ruins of massive temples and palaces, ante- 
dating the dawn of veritable history, the archaeologist will 
find ample material for investigation. Comprising, as 
Mexico does, every variety of climate, and consequently 
producing every plant which is found between the equator 
and the north pole, the botanist no less than the general 
observer will delight in her matchless and gorgeous flora. 
Nowhere else, on the face of the globe, can the ornitholo- 
o-ist or the entomologist find, within a given space, so much 
to engage his attention. The beauty of her plains, gilded 
by an eternal summer ; the grandeur of her volcanoes, 

(170) 



I/I 

lifting their heads for thousands of feet into the region of 
eternal snow and ice ; the endless variety of her stupendous 
mountain ranges, her lovely lakes, and fertile valleys, all 
seen through an atmosphere of wonderful transparency — 
all these, while they will furnish incomparable subjects for 
the easel of the painter, will forever live in the memory of 
every lover of Nature who may behold them. The memo- 
rials of an extinct religious worship cannot fail deeply to 
interest the theologian, while the national archives in the 
capital are full of instruction for the historian and the 
ecclesiastical student." 

Mexico consists mostly of an elevated plateau, having an 
average altitude of six thousand feet. The country is 
divided into three zones which differ from each other in 
their altitude and consequently in temperature. Geogra- 
phers disagree as to their exact limits, but roughly speak- 
ing, the tiery^a caliente (or hot region) includes all that ter- 
ritory having an elevation of less than four thousand feet ; 
the tierra templada (or temperate region) between that and 
seven thousand ; the tierra fria (or cold region) all over 
seven thousand. The last named zone includes about half 
the surface of the country. The climate of Mexico presents 
great variety ; the atmosphere of the plateau is very rare 
and dry. The rainy season varies slightly in the different 
parts of the country, but always occurs in summer. 

The Republic of Mexico consists of twenty-seven States, 
one Territory and one Federal District, This country may 
be reached by rail from the United States or by steamer. 
Its principal seaport is Vera Cruz, an uninteresting and 
unhealthy place for the tourist, for whom it is not a suitable 
stopping point, the climate being unusually hot as the city is 
built on an arid plain. The stranger does well to push in- 
land at once to Jalapa^ sixty miles distant, or Cordoba or 



172 

Orizaba, situated at about the same distance from Vera 
Cruz, where he will be wise to remain several days till his 
lungs become somewhat accustomed to the rarefied air 
before he proceeds to the table-land. Puebla is a pleasant 
town lying about an equal distance from Orizaba and the 
City of Mexico ; it has a climate similar to that of the latter 
place being situated on a fertile plain at an elevation of 
7,201 feet. To the west is the noted volcano of Popocat- 
epetl (17,735 feet) which well repays a visit. The City of 
Mexicd, the capital of the Republic, is a beautiful place and 
has been called the Venice of the New World. It is situa- 
ted upon the Anahuac, an extensive plateau having an 
altitude of from six to eight thousand feet. There are six 
lakes in the neighborhood of the City, five of which are salt. 
The climate is trying to the unacclimated ; the temperature 
varies but little between summer and winter, the annual 
average is 62° Fahr., but the daily range is considerable, 
sometimes varying from 30° to 75° Fahr. The air is very 
dry and rare. 

In Central Mexico there are several towns which have 
more or less interest for visitors, of these the most import- 
ant are : Queretaro (one hundred and fifty miles from the 
capital), Guanajuata, Guadalajara, Zacatecas and Aguascal- 
ientes. The latter place derives its name from the numer- 
ous thermal springs in its vicinity, to which invalids resort 
considerably. 

The Republic may be entered on the north by rail either 
at Laredo, Eagle Pass or El Paso, towns on the Rio 
Grande river. About one hundred and seventy miles from 
Laredo is the city of Monterey, which has a large American 
element, and is something of a winter resort with invalids, 
its climate being warm, dry and healthful. It is on the 
isothermal line which passes through Canton, China, and 



173 

the Canary Islands. Chihuahua, a northern Mexican town, 
is situated in a rich grazing country. It has a healthful 
climate and is located at an elevation of 4,690 feet. Fifty 
miles from this place is the town of Santa Rosalia (4,022 
feet), one of the most popular health resorts of Mexico, 
famous for its thermal springs. 

SOUTH AMERICA. 

This is a neglected field, which is unfortunate, as many 
pleasant and healthful places for winter residence are 
found along the coast and in the interior of the country. 
In the Andes are towns located at great elevations, where 
cases for whom high altitudes are desirable may find ac- 
commodations ; of these we would mention the populous 
city of Quito, Ecuador (9,540 feet), which has a climate of 
perpetual spring; Bogota (8,650 feet), the capital of the 
United States of Columbia; Guzco (11,380 feet), the 
ancient capital of Peru, and the towns upon the shores of 
Lake Titicaca, which lies between Peru and Bolivia, at an 
altitude of 13,000 feet. 

Steamers run down the Pacific coast from San Francisco 
quite frequently so that the various ports in Western South 
America can be reached in comfort by a comparatively 
smooth voyage. From these points the various interior 
health resorts and especially those in the mountain regions 
have to be reached by a little travel. Vessels from ports 
on the Atlantic sea-board can be taken to places on the 
eastern coast. 

The old method of reaching the west coast of South 
America around Cape Horn is out of date and only a 
very few now go by that route. 



TRANSLATION 

Of that portion of Dr. Woeikof's "Die Klimate der Erde" relating- 
to North and South America and the Atlantic Ocean. 

From the German by S. Kauffmann, Philadelphia, Pa. 



CHAPTER XII. 

I. THE HIGH NORTH. 

In high latitudes the parallels occupy so limited an area 
that it is preferable to consider all the countries of that re- 
gion together. On the whole, therefore, the discussion in 
this chapter will comprise all the islands in the north of the 
three continents, Europe, Asia, and Africa, and the sta- 
tions on the continents will be adduced by way of compari- 
son only. The whole Arctic Zone is characterized by the 
absence of any very large and unbroken land and water 
areas, seas of moderate extent, covered with islands, being 
the prevailing feature. Only under and west of the meri- 
dians of West Europe do we find a more spacious and, at 
the same time, more elevated territory (Greenland), and, 
between it and Spitzbergen, a sea both broad and deep. 
The Asiatic continent, moreover, forms an exception by 
jutting out rather far into the Arctic Zone. 

The causes of the low pressure of the atmosphere in the 
Arctic Zone have already been discussed in chapter 17 ; it 
is not only possible, but probable, that the existence of a 
great continent round about the pole, would have materially 
altered the conditions of the atmospheric pressure, more 
especially would a higher atmospheric pressure have been 

(174) 



175 • 

found to prevail during the winter months. As it is, how- 
ever, the sea' predominating, and the mainland not being 
united into large masses, the pressure of the atmosphere 
during the winter in the Arctic Zone north of the continents, 
is nowhere perceptibly higher than 762 mm. 

It rises towards spring, and generally reaches its maxi- 
mum in May. This may be designated as an oceanic annual 
period, for it obtains likewise in the northern part of the 
Atlantic Ocean, and in that part of Europe and the neigh- 
boring islands which are most exposed to oceanic influences, 
(North and West Norway, Scotland, Faroe. Iceland). This 
high atmospheric pressure during the vernal months in the 
Arctic Zone, is probably due to the fact that the lowest 
temperature rules at that time in those regions, whilst it is 
rapidly rising in intermediate latitudes, especially on the 
continents. Accordingly the strata of equal atmospheric 
pressure ascend on the latter, bringing about a deflux 
towards the north pole regions, where, at this time, the ice- 
crust exists at its maximum, owing to the as yet unabated 
sway of the temperatures below zero, and to the dimin- 
ished force of the winds, as compared with those of the 
winter months. 

Regarding the annual course of the atmospheric pres- 
sure at the several stations in the Arctic Zone, it is most 
interesting to note the transition from the arctic maritime 
type proper, with its minimum of atmospheric pressure in 
winter and the maximum thereof in May, (Iceland, Spitz- 
bergen, Francis-Joseph's Land), to the Asiatic continental 
type, with a maximum in January and a minimum in sum- 
mer, May having withal a lower atmospheric pressure than 
the annual mean. 

This transition seems to be effected on the north coast 
of Siberia, for at Sagastyr the atmospheric pressure 



• 176 

reaches its maximum in March, whereas, in December and 
January, it is but little higher than the annual mean. At 
Ustjansk however, more southerly and at a greater distance 
from the coast, the East Siberian type of the atmospheric 
pressure is already developed, with maximum in January 
and minimum in summer, the pressure in May being by 
nearly 5 mm lower than the annual mean. 

From May till June the atmospheric pressure throughout 
the Arctic Zone undergoes an important change, whereby 
it is considerably reduced during the last month. The 
difference is greatest at the most northerly stations where 
man has, up to the present, passed the winter, to-wit : North 
Greenland and Grinnell Land. It is impossible not to think 
in this connection of the thermal conditions, which are every- 
where in the Arctic Zone where observations have thus far 
been made, so constituted that, beginning with the 2d half 
of June, the temperature rises above zero and the ice begins 
to melt rapidly, so that, in June, a compact air maximum can 
no longer be found in the Arctic region. The other months 
of the year are in the whole Arctic Zone marked* by no 
such significant peculiarities as those just considered. 

The low atmospheric pressure prevailing during the 
greater portion of the year in the North Atlantic Ocean, 
particularly near Iceland, is well known to have also two 
sectional minima ; the one in the West — in Davis Strait — 
is rather narrowly circumscribed, because the portion of the 
sea here generally open even in winter, is relatively small ; 
but towards the northeast and east this Atlantic belt of low 
atmospheric pressure stretches much farther, and here both 
its extent and the height of the atmospheric pressure seem to 
be very variable. At all events, the pressure of the atmos- 
phere, especially in autumn and winter, continues very low 
on a large part of the ocean which we may safely assume to 



177 

reach beyond Spitzbergen in the north, Francis-Joseph Land 
in the northeast, and Nova Zembla in the east. Nor does 
there exist here in winter a constant ice-crust, for the seas 
are expanded and exposed to strong winds, in consequence 
of which both the position and quantity of the ice are ex- 
ceedingly changeable. This may be gathered, for instance, 
from the drift of the Payer-Wyprecht expedition, which, 
fastened to the ice, floated about with it for nearly two 
years between Nova Zembla and Francis-Joseph Land. 

In all probability, the atmospheric pressure, like the tem- 
perature, of broad tracts, very largely depends upon the 
quantity of solid ice extant on this Europeo- Asiatic north- 
ern sea. Over a vast, continuous expanse of ice, the air 
can cool, as over a continent. This again will react upon 
the atmospheric pressure, which, under such conditions, 
will not be so low in the centre of the cyclones passing 
here, as in the case of their finding here much open sea. 
Anti-cyclones, on the other hand, find under such circum- 
stances more favorable conditions. 

The' more westerly part of this ocean, more especially 
the region west and north of Norway up to 75° N. Lat., is 
at all times free from ice, and its mean atmospheric pressure 
in December and January, very low, viz : about 750 mm. 
Farther north the observations are too short to admit of 
conclusions as valid as those concerning the region near 
Norway. It is certain, however, that the pressure of the 
atmosphere has been found to be higher in the north, and 
even in the east, than here. 

On the islands north of Europe, observations have been 
made, but, of course, no consecutive ones. They succeeded 
best on the western coast of Nova Zembla, where they 
have been conducted during five winters at an interval 
of ij4° latitude; three of these were pursued in the 



178 

Gulf of Malya Karmakuli and its vicinity ; the results 
of the remaining two (1882-1883) have, as yet, not become 
known. Observations have furthermore been made at the 
southeast and north shore of Nova Zembla, between the 
latter and Francis-Joseph Land (nearly two years), and on 
Spitzbergen, Jan Mayen, and Bear Island. The tempera- 
ture being very variable, and the observations having been 
very short, I here quote the means for the five months 
from November till March. 

Mean 

N. Lat. Mean Longitude. Temperature. 

71° 8° W. N. Jan. Mayen (1882-83). ' —6. 7 

71° 26° E. Gjasvar, Norway. — 3. 6 

75° 19° E. Bear Island. — 10. 5 

80° 16° E. Spitzbergen, Mossel Bay. — 15. 5 

71° 57° E. Kamenka Bay, (S. E. Coast). ] ^ —17. 5 

72° 53° E. Malya Karmakuli, (2) (W. Coasti. i | 2; —15. 3 

73/^° 55° E. MatotshkinSchar, (2)ShallowBay. (do.) j" a:| — 15- 

76° 54° E. Tobiesen Bay, (N. Coast). j ^ —23. 2 

79° 64° E. Bet. Nova Zembla and Francis-Joseph Land, 2). — 27. 6 

71° 64° E. Kara Sea. —20. 8 

72}4° 76% E. Gydaviken, (W. Siberia). —25. 

This table presents a fairly distinct index of the succes- 
sive stages of the temperature, and of its decrease in winter 
in an easterly direction. With the variability of the tem- 
peratures, even the means out of five months may vacillate 
from one winter to another. It suffices to state an example 
for the less changeable climate of St. Petersburg, where 
the mean temperature for the months from November till 
March was equal to — 2.1° in 1881-82, and to — 11.3° in 
1808-09; that is, during the latter period it was by 9.2° 
lower than during the former. 

I have also included in the above table the most north- 
erly station of Norway, which, as easily discernible, has 
the highest temperature. A little lower already are the 
temperatures on Bear Island and Jan Mayen, two small 



179 

islands in the European part of the Arctic Ocean. That 
even Jan Mayen has a colder temperature than Norway, is 
accounted for by the existence of more or less ice on the 
ocean contiguous to the former, whereas, near Norway, ice 
neither forms on the main sea nor does it find its way 
thither in the shape of drift ice. As on Iceland, so also on 
these two islands, the winds are predominatingly east and 
partly north, that is, such as may be expected to carry with 
them cold air. However, the temperature is determined 
by the quantity of ice on the ocean rather than by the wind. 

Jan Mayen is the station on the earth's surface where 
the largest cloudiness is found in the annual mean. At 
Gjasvar, while considerable, it is not equal to that on 
Jan Mayen. About the character of the clouds the follow- 
ing is to be observed. In the latter part of autumn and in 
winter it is not different from that in the northern parts of 
Central and Western Europe, and the northern and central 
parts of Russia. In summer, however, the fogs and lower 
stratus-layers prevail which are found on the seas and coast 
stations of the High North in general. The great cloud- 
iness found here is probably traceable, in the main, to 
the condensation of vapors, which is brought about when 
nearly saturated air-strata of different temperatures meet 
and permeate each other. This contrast in the tempera- 
ture is here conditioned by the presence of ice and clear 
sea-water. Under the influence of warm currents, the last 
offshoots of the Gulf Stream, in shallow places near the coast, 
but still more under the action of the solar rays, the water 
is warmed to a temperature considerably above o°. (In 
the vicinity of Nova Zembla io° have already been measured 
on the surface.) 

As far as broad areas of clear sea extend even in winter, 
and this is generally the case as far as the west coast of 



i8o 

Spitzbergen, there are, of course, sources of abundant pre- 
cipitations, especially at some elevation above the sea-level. 
Glaciers are formed, partly reaching to the sea-level, 
notably on the more elevated and extensive islands of 
Spitzbergen. 

Under the influence of warm winds, the temperature on 
Jan Mayen and Bear Island not infrequently rises in 
winter above o°. 

In the middle part of its west shore, the large double 
island of Nova Zembla has, considering the latitude, a rather 
high winter temperature, with variable winds, though south- 
east winds numerically predominate. The cloudiness is 
here considerable, though not to the extent of that on Jan 
Mayen, and, at times, winter months occur here with a 
cloudiness sufficiently small to approximate the conditions 
of Northern Siberia. Towards the north, in the direction 
of Francis-Joseph Land, and towards the east and south- 
east, 'the temperature of the winter months is considerably 
lower. 

Notwithstanding the prevalence of lower winter tempera- 
tures in the southern part of the islands, no glaciers are to 
be found there. They are first met with in the middle part 
of the west coast, where the mountains are higher and the 
aggregate snow-fall heavier. Francis-Joseph Land is full of 
glaciers, and but few parts thereof are free from snow and 
ice, even at the end of summer. Accordingly, the Austrian 
expedition found the snow-fall to be considerable in the 
vicinity of the islands. 

The mean temperature of the winter months on the 
European part of the Arctic Ocean has the remarkable 
peculiarity that January is much warmer than December, 
February and March, and nearly as warm as November and 
April. In the following table, A exhibits the mean temper- 



i8i 



ature on the west shore of Nova Zembla ; B the means at all 
the points of the preceding table, with the exception of 
Bear Island, Kamenka Bay, and the w^est shore of Nova 
Zembla, in both cases, however, without the observations 
made in 1882-83, and C, the means from A and B. 





Nov. 


Dec. 


Jan'y. 


Feb'y. 


March. 


April. 


A. 
B. 
C. 


—12. 8 
— 20. 2 
-16.5 


— 17- 
—24. 8 
— 20. 9 


—13- 3 
— 19. 2 
— 16. 2 


—18. 9 
—27. 9 
—23.4 


—15- 9 
—24- 5 
—20. 3 


—14. 2 
-18.3 
-16.3 



The result is thus shown to be the same, whether the 
west shore of Nova Zembla between 71^° and 74° north 
latitude is considered by itself, or in conjunction with the 
observations made N. W. and N. E. thereof; in either case, 
January appears remarkably warm in comparison to the 
preceding- and following months. The colder temperature of 
February, and even of March, might eventually be ascribed 
to the conditions of the maritime climate of high latitudes ; 
but, were this the only cause, December would necessarily 
be warmer than January, whereas, on the contrary, it is by 
about 3°, and even 5°, colder. 

The question arises, to what extent this phenomenon may 
be regarded as a general characteristic of the climate of the 
islands in the Arctic Ocean within the given limits. It is 
true, the means of but eight winters are given. But in all 
these winters January proved to be colder than February 
and December, and in but two of them was the temperature 
of March somewhat warmer, viz. by 2° and 1.2° respec- 
tively.- I selected from observations embracing 140 years, 
and conducted at St. Petersburg, eight winters in which 
the temperature of January exceeded both that of Decem- 
ber and that of February, and it was demonstrated that in 



182 



the mean for these winters December is by 3.7°, February 
by 6.8° colder than January, consequently by less than they 
are in the mean for all the winters above quoted. 

We cannot but draw the inference therefrom that it is 
in the highest degree improbable that such rare conditions 
were found at Nova Zembla, Spitzbergen, etc., every time 
that the winter was passed there. There is much more 
reason for assuming that the relative warmth of January is 
a distinguishing feature of the climate of the Arctic Ocean 
within the given confines. This probably arises from the 
fact that the centres of cyclones pass northward at a short 
distance from these points more frequently in January than 
before or after. Besides, a cold February and, partly, a cold 
March is a rather ordinary occurrence in the maritime climate 
of high northern latitudes, there being in these months more 
ice and less open sea than in January ; hence the consider- 
able reduction of the temperature, which the sun is as yet 
very little able to counteract. A relatively cold December is 
peculiar to the northern belt of West Siberia. At Beresow, 
according to many years' observations, December is even 
colder than January, at Jeniseisk, Turnchansk, and Bogo- 
slowsk, but little warmer. Possibly, and even probably, 
this phenomenon stands in a causal nexus with the paucity 
of cyclones on the Arctic Ocean in December, and their 
frequency in January. In West Siberia the severest cold 
usually occurs in calm and clear weather ; that is, under 
conditions favorable for a strong local refrigeration. The 
motion of the air is altogether not conducive to cold 
weather (v. Chap. 26. the temperature of the winds at 
Jeniseisk). During the passage of the cyclones past Nova 
Zembla, southern, i. e., warm winds, necessarily prevail in 
the northern belt of West Siberia. The fact that December 
is particularly cold as compared with January, especially 



i83 

at Beresow, strongly speaks in favor of my hypothesis, in 
view of the greater proximity of this point to the Arctic 
Ocean. 

Nor must it be wondered at that at Beresow, for instance, 
and still more at Jeniseisk, Bogoslowsk, etc., February is 
again warmer than January. This does not prove that 
during that month more cyclones have passed by Nova 
Zembla than in January, but it is due to the fact that in these 
latitudes, located as they are considerably south of the 
Arctic Circle, and with a continental climate, there must 
take place in the middle of the day, even with frequent 
calms, a pretty strong calefaction, which counteracts the 
nightly refrigeration. 

On the islands of the Arctic Ocean under the meridians 
of Europe, (Bear Island, Spitzbergen, west coast of Nova 
Zembla) the winter is not so much remarkable for its cold 
as such, as for the continuity with which the temperature 
remains below zero during periods ranging from about 
eight months on Bear Island, and seven on Jan Mayen, up 
to nine months on Spitzbergen and Nova Zembla. It is 
obvious that neither agriculture nor tree-growth are pos- 
sible under such conditions. On the slopes, however, 
notably those with southern exposures, quite a number of 
flowering plants are found. This is assignable to the fact 
that, in the far-north, both the condition of the soil and its 
inclination are of paramount importance. In level places 
the snow naturally melts more slowly, and the cold water, 
standing for a longer time, checks the development of 
vegetation. On dry slopes, especially when also somewhat 
stony, the water flows off more rapidly, and the surface 
of the soil is more easily warmed by the sun, all of which 
is, of course, favorable to vegetation. 

The temperature of summer chiefly depends on the quan- 



i84 

tity of ice in the environs of the place of observation. In 
the southeast of Nova Zembla, in Kamenka Bay, 2.4° is re- 
garded as the mean temperature of July, but in the Shallow 
Bay, 3^° more north, it is 5.3°. Even on Spitzbergen, 
July proves to be warmer. The region of Nova Zembla, 
and, in some years at least, even the Kara Sea, apparently 
have the coldest summer obtaining anywhere in the North- 
ern Hemisphere. The Danish expedition observed during 
its drift in the Kara Sea a mean temperature below 0° in 
June and August ; for the latter month this had hitherto 
nowhere been observed. At Gydawiken also, a June tem- 
perature of less than —1° was observed. 

It is well known that the seas around Nova Zembla and 
along the coast of Siberia, were, not long ago, regarded as 
almost, or completely, inaccessible to navigation. In 
specially bad repute stood the Kara Sea and the waters 
north of Nova Zembla. Regardless of the bold voyages of 
our Cossacks and Promushlenni, regardless, also, of the fact 
that Barent passed the winter in the northern part of the 
Kara Sea, etc. many scientists were inclined to assume 
these seas to be covered with perennial ice, until the pas- 
sages of the Norwegian seafarers clearly demonstrated the 
accessibility of the Kara Sea to such navigators as are 
equipped, even to a moderate extent, with the requisite 
special knowledge. 

The conditions of this sea are climatically very interest- 
ing. It is of rather small dimensions, protected from warm 
westerly winds, and, towards autumn, filled with brackish 
water, owing to the influx of large volumes of water from 
the Obi and Yenisei, and to the melting of the ice on the 
sea and the contiguous territories. In consequence of all 
this the formation of ice proceeds rapidly. At a compara- 
tively early season of the year the sea is almost solidly 



i85 

frozen over, and at the beginning of summer the ice attains 
a considerable thickness. As the egress of the ice is often 
impeded by northerly winds it usually remains solid till 
mid-summer. Many navigators, finding at this time of the 
year a large mass of ice, came to the conclusion that the 
Kara Sea is impervious to navigation. They did not con- 
sider that if conditions prevail in the Kara Sea conducive 
to the formation and stability of ice, others exist there also 
favoring its melting, which are not found elswhere in high 
latitudes, to wit, the emptying into this relatively small and 
not deep sea of such mighty rivers as the Obi and Yenisei. 
These introduce therein large volumes of comparatively 
warm water, their mouths being near 70° north latitude ; 
and this water is sufficiently potent in its effect to melt, 
towards the end of summer, all, or nearly all, of the ice in 
the Kara Sea, thus rendering the latter accessible to vessels 
at that time of the year. The period during which it is so^ 
is, of course, very short, since the freezing of the sea begins 
very early. But if the accessibility of the sea, though but 
for the space of one month and a half, is important from a 
practical point of view, it is a fact of particularly great 
moment for science that even here the masses of ice are a 
transitory and not a permanent phenomenon. 

The sea and the islands north of Siberia, and east of the 
meridians of the Yenisei, are, as yet, a ''terra incognita" 
to climatology. We can only draw conclusions as to the 
climate of these regions from quite brief naval observa- 
tions, and from such as were made on the north coast of 
Siberia. So much is certain, however, that neither strong 
currents nor strong winds predominate here to the same 
extent as on the sea near Greenland. This is proved for 
the eastern portion of the North Siberian sea by the ex- 
tremely short distance covered by the "Jeannette" during: 



1 86 

her drift in the ice. The direction of the latter was con- 
stantly varying, as was also that of the Payer- Wyprecht 
expedition north of Nova Zembla, and of the Danish expe- 
dition in the Kara Sea, so that the maps of these drifts 
present an exceedingly tortuous network. 

In the course of the "Jeannette" expedition, some small 
islands were discovered east of the New Siberian Islands, 
which are distinguished from the latter and from the con- 
tinent by being covered with ice to a remarkable degree. 
This certainly indicates a larger snow-fall and a cooler 
summer than occur on the continent. 

Observations were conducted for nearly two years at 
Sagastyr, in the Lena Delta. As was to be expected, both 
the winter and annual temperatures established by them 
were lower than under the same latitude in the east, and, 
during the winter months, higher than in the valleys and 
basins of East Siberia to about 60° north latitude. The 
direction of the wind in winter is here principally south, 
thus pointing to a higher atmospheric pressure in the 
valley of the Jana, where, indeed, the lowest winter 
temperature hitherto known has been found. At Pitlenkaj, 
under 67° north latitude, in the vicinity of Behring Strait, 
the winter is considerably warmer, the winds are much 
stronger, and predominatingly N. W., thus again pointing 
to the district of the Jana as the region of higher atmos- 
pheric pressure. The greater force of the winds at Pit- 
lenkaj finds its explanation in the comparative proximity 
of the low atmospheric pressure of Behring Strait. 

The atmospheric pressure found at Sagastyr is, particu- 
larly in the winter months, lower than could have been 
anticipated after former observations at Ustjansk. 

The cloudiness during the summer months is at Sagastyr, 
as at all other stations in the High North, very considerable. 



18; 

so much so, indeed, that it but rarely permitted an 
observation of the altitude of the sun to be made at noon. 
That this was not a peculiarity of the respective years, is 
proved by the circumnavigation of the "Vega," which also 
found it almost impossible to make observations of the 
altitude of the sun anywhere on these seas. 

As the winter months at Sagastyr, and particularly Feb- 
ruary, are characterized by a limited cloudiness, the annual 
course of this element already strongly resembles the one 
observed in the East Asiatic Monsoon regions. Quite 
analogous, however, the phenomena are not. The winds 
in winter, although preponderatingly south, i. e., blowing 
from the continent, have by no means the constancy of a 
Monsoon, nor are other winds rare. In summer, the pre- 
valence of east winds is somewhat greater than that of 
south winds in winter, yet not to the extent of a genuine 
Monsoon. The clouds of the summer months are, more- 
over, mostly lower stratus-layers and fogs, and not rain- 
clouds. The amount of precipitations in these parts is, as 
yet, unknown to me, but, according to kind communica- 
tions from Mr. Juergen, rains were by no means abun- 
dant in summer. The annual period of cloudiness at 
Sagastyr could perhaps be designated as high-northerly 
coast-type. 

Before proceeding to the American polar regions, it will 
be of interest to give a general view of the northern forest 
boundary. The observations in the coldest interior regions 
of East Siberia show that, for some forest trees at least, it 
is possible to form high and dense clumps, even where the 
mean temperature of the year falls below-i7°, and that of 
January below-5o°. During some months, of course, an 
adequate degree of warmth must obtain, as is indeed the 
case in the district of Werchojansk, where the tempera- 



i8S 

ture of the three summer months rises above 1 1 °, and that of 
July above 15°. On the chart of the mouth of the Lena 
and its environment, which is based on the surveys of the 
Russian Lena expedition, it may be seen to what extent 
the forest-boundary hinges upon the propinquity of the 
sea. On the Jana it reaches nearly to 71° north latitude ; 
beyond this it recedes considerably southward under the 
meridians of Borchaja Bay, which extends for some distance 
in a southerly direction ; again crossing 7 1 ° north latitude, it 
advances on either bank of the Lena to almost 72°, and is 
found farther west under about 71°. As both banks of the 
river are high, up to the delta, they afford protection against 
the cold winds and fogs of the coast, whilst the water of 
this mighty river itself is warmer than the air. At a not 
very great distance south of Sagastyr, the vegetation was 
altogether much more rich and varied, owing mainly to 
a greater amount of sunshine. 

The influence exerted by the nearness of the Polar sea 
upon the northern forest-boundary is equally perceptible 
farther to the west. As far as known, this boundary 
reaches on the Taemyr peninsula as far north as on the 
Lena. Only in the most northerly part of Norway, how- 
ever, does it extend to the shores of the Arctic Ocean, the 
action of which is here very far from being as inimical 
to vegetation as in other regions, and this simply because 
of its being free from ice. 

On "Point Barrow," the most northerly headland in the 
west of the North American Continent, observations have 
been made showing a higher annual and winter tempera- 
ture than is found under the same latitude (yi}4°) on the 
northern coast of Asia. Farther east, we have in North 
America a distribution of stations for observations which is 
most peculiar. On the shores of the islands of the North 



1 89 

American Archipelago in the High North, numerous, 
though short, observations have been made in the course 
of the many expeditions for the discovery of the north- 
western passage, and during that for the lost FrankHn 
(i8i 8-1854). Subsequently, EngHsh, American, and Ger- 
man north pole expeditions have penetrated still farther 
north, viz. : to the most northerly sections of Greenland 
and Grinnell Land. Southward, however, on the North 
American Continent, almost to 50° north latitude, the 
number of stations is exceedingly limited. Here, there- 
fore, the separation of the High North from the remain- 
ing part of America is necessitated by the nature of the 
material. 

On the islands north of America we find a region of 
a very low winter and annual temperature, which is, how- 
ever, climatically essentially different from the coldest 
reofions of Siberia. 

The difference is most marked in this, that the low tem- 
perature is found here in parts where no high atmospheric 
pressure prevails in winter. The pressure of the atmos- 
phere diminishes towards the south-east in the direction of 
the depression in Davis Strait, and is higher at the most 
northerly stations of Greenland and Grinnell Land. In the 
annual period, it is highest in May, partly also in April, but 
even then not higher than 765 mm. ; in summer it is again 
lower. The low atmospheric pressure in the south-east is 
probably the cause of the predominating north winds in the 
Polar Archipelago, and at the northern extremity of 
America. 

In the following table, "a" represents the direction of 
the wind on the peninsula of Boothia Felix; "b" that in 
Pt. Kennedy, where, moreover, the force of the wind has 
been taken into consideration. 



190 

WINTER. 



• 


N. 


N. E. 


E. 


S. E. 


S. 


s.w. 


W. 


N. W. 


a 
b 


22 
2 


8 
15 


12 



7 



5 



4 
2 


9 
13 


33 
68 


SUMMER. 




N. 


N. E. 


E. 


S. E. 


s. 


S W. 


w. 


N. W. 


a 
b 


7 
3 


13 
21 


8 
6 


10 

•4 


9 
•5 


11 
4 


12 
12 


20 
53 



Owing to the shortness of the periods of observation on 
the Archipelago, exclusive of Greenland and Grinnell Land, 
owing, further, to the variability of the temperature and the 
not always accurately known corrections of the alcohol ther- 
mometers, the mean temperatures are left somewhat indefi- 
nite. Still, the obseryations agree in the main ; at all 
stations there was at least one month colder than-29°, and 
at most of the stations north of 70° north latitude, one month 
colder than-35°. The absolute minima are in most cases 
below-40°, but not so low, by far, as in the interior of East 
Siberia. Nine months have a temperature below 0° ; the 
summer is cool, and the differences between the various 
stations during the latter season are inconsiderable. Only 
atone point does the mean temperature of July rise to 5.8°, 
the highest in this region. It was observed at one of the 
northerly stations, Winter-Haven, under 75° north latitude, 
whilst the most southerly station. Winter Island, under 
66° north latitude, showed the lowest July temperature, 
(2.6°.) It is therefore not the influence of the latitude, 
but the large quantity of ice on the ocean which accounts 
for the low summer temperature. The absolute maximum 



191 

at any one of the stations is but i6°, and the mean temper- 
ature of the year is mostly below -14°. 

Such a climate is, of course, exceedingly unfavorable 
to vegetation, and trees are entirely out of the question. 
Yet, neither perpetual snow nor glaciers are to be found 
there, for the snow, which falls in but limited quantities, 
thaws pretty rapidly in summer. On the bays and sounds 
between the islands, more or less ice usually exists ; even 
this, however, is not permanent, but is broken up almost 
every year by winds and currents, and, after a time, finds 
its way into Davis Strait. The accumulations of ice-masses 
occasionally found, do not, by any means, consist of very 
old ice, but have been piled up through the pressure of 
vast quantities of ice on the windward side of the land. 
On Grinnell Land, a large island west of Smith Sound, the 
most northerly meteorological observations on the earth 
have been made (up to 82^^° north latitude), partly by the 
two English expeditions under Nares, and partly by the 
American expedition under Greeley, the latter of which 
extended over three years. The mean temperature of the 
year is here the lowest on the earth, whilst winter is not so 
cold as at the valley stations in the interior of North- 
eastern Siberia ; February has here the lowest mean tem- 
perature, i. e., 40.1°, and as this represents the mean out 
of five years, it is highly probable that the mean out of any 
number of years would coincide therewith. Such a result 
is naturally to be expected under this high latitude, where 
during nearly the whole of February the sun remains under 
the horizon. The stations of the North American Archi- 
pelago south of Grinnell Land, also, frequently show the 
lowest temperature in February, but, owing to their short- 
ness, the observations have, no doubt, been largely affected 
by non-periodical fluctuations. The absolute minimum on 



192 

Grinnell Land is -56°, which is the lowest temperature ob- 
served on the earth outside of the coldest stations of Siberia. 

Greenland, the largest island on the earth, deserves 
special consideration also at the hand of the climatologist. 
In all probability, the whole interior is covered with a layer 
of ice, one of those continental accumulations traces of 
which have been found by geologists both in Europe and 
America. Only a comparatively narrow tract along the 
coast, up to about 600 m. above the sea-level, is in summer 
free from snow and ice, and even this not entirely, since 
the large glaciers, the spurs of the ice-masses in the 
interior, extend to the sea. 

As far back as the fifties. Rink has expressed the opinion 
that the excess of precipitation over evaporation is in Green- 
land conveyed into the sea by glaciers, instead of by rivers, 
as in other countries. In addition to this, however, much 
water is carried into the sea in a fluid state, by means of the 
glacier-streams, which flow even in winter. The coast of 
Western Greenland has a permanent population and me- 
teorological stations, and various expeditions have recently 
visited the inland-ice (Jensen, Kornerupp, Payer.) As a 
general result, it has been ascertained that the angle of in- 
cidence of the ice is less than i °, and that only a few peaks 
rise above the ice. The expedition of Nordenskjold ad- 
vanced from the west coast into the interior to a distance ot 
about 350 km. At the farthest point reached, the altitude 
was about 7000' (2100 m), and the inclination of the ice 
between the altitudes of 1500 m. and 2100 m. was only j^°. 

Greeland extends over more than 20° latitude, and the sum- 
mer is cool, even in the extreme south. Thus, at Lichte- 
nau, under 6o}4° N. latitude, July has a mean temperature 
of 8° ; nearly the same (7.7°) is found at Jacobshaven un- 
der 69° N. latitude, whilst at Godthaab, lying between the 



193 

two points mentioned, it is only 5.5°, and at the northern 
station of Polaris Bay, under 8i^° N. latitude, 4.7°. Con- 
sequently, the whole decrease of the temperature from 
Lichtenau to Polaris Bay amounts to only 15° per degree 
of latitude. 

In winter, however, the decrease of the temperature 
towards the north is very rapid on the west coast up to 
79° north latitude, where the island is broadest. The 
months from December to March have here mean temper- 
atures below —30°, while at Lichtenau the temperature in 
January falls no lower than -5.5° and Fredericshab, under 
62° north latitude, no lower than -9.6°. The decrease of 
the temperature in January between 6o}4° and 77}4° north 
latitude, is equal to 1.5° per degree of latitude, and is, 
consequently, ten times as great as in July. In the annual 
mean, the decrease of the temperature between these limits 
•equals 1.02° per degree of latitude, being a nearer approach 
to that of the winter than of the summer. Accordingly, 
eight to nine months of the year have in Greenland the 
•character of winter months. 

In winter, as during the greater part of the year, Davis 
Strait has a partial minimum of the North Atlantic 
•cyclones, wherefore Southern Greenland often receives 
warm, moist winds from the main sea. Farther north, the 
atmospheric pressure is higher during the greater part of 
the year ; north-east winds predominate, carrying with 
them cold air. On the east coast of Greenland, also, under 
75° north latitude, the German expedition observed during 
the nine colder months a decided predominance of fre- 
quently very strong north winds. The influence of Ice- 
landic cyclones, which are attracted by the air in the 
interior of Greenland, is here already clearly discernible. 

A comparison between the winter temperatures ot 



194 

Greenland, Grinnell Land and the North American Archi- 
pelago on the one hand, and that of North-east Siberia on 
the other, reveals, as the principal difference, the prevalence 
of calms in the latter, and of strong winds in the American 
region. While this is less favorable to an intense local 
cooling of lower air-layers, and to extreme low tem- 
peratures, it is well calculated to promote the refrigeration 
of vast layers of air, both with regard to area and, more 
especially, with regard to elevation. Not only more cold 
air, but also larger quantities of sea-water and ice are sent 
forth from the high latitudes north of America. In the 
east and, particularly, in the west of Greenland, much 
ice is moved directly south by the largely preponderating 
high north winds, and by the strong constant oceanic 
currents. This is demonstrated, also, by the drifts on 
ice-fields, such as made by the ice-imprisoned ships 
" Resolute " and " Fox," by the crew of the German expedi- 
tion of 1870, etc. They all drifted rapidly south, whilst 
for the European and Siberian northern seas, I had to 
record slow drifts only in varying directions. 

Greenland has also its " Fohns." (Meteorology of 
Arctic Regions, Vol. I, Hoffmeyer, " Fohn du Gronland.") 
On the west coast they come from southeast. During 
their continuance, temperatures of 6° and 7° occur 
under 69° N. latitude, which is by 24° to 25° higher than 
the monthly mean, the air being, meantime, very dry, and 
the snow melting very rapidly. According to Hoffmeyer, 
the west coast has " Fohns " only when the atmospheric 
pressure is very high near Iceland, and low in Davis Strait. 
Under such circumstances the east slope of the island has 
abundant precipitations, the decrease of the temperature 
becomes more gradual, and the descending air reaches the 
west warm and dry. 



195 
2. MIDDLE LATITUDES OF NORTH AMERICA. 

Regarding the High North I have already had occasion 
to observe that the cHmate of no part thereof, barring the 
northern part of Norway, is so well known to us as that of 
the Polar Archipelago of North America, and this owing to 
the wintering in those regions of many scientific expeditions, 
and to the one sent out for the search of Franklin. But 
south thereof, down to 55°, our knowledge of the climate 
exhibits a large gap, which is but inadequately filled up by 
short observations. In the region east of the Rocky 
Mountains, the temperature resembles in some measure 
that of the same latitudes of Central Siberia in the region 
of the Yenisei. The following table presents a compari- 
son of the two regions. 

N. Lat. Jan. Ju'y- 

Ft. Simpson, N. A 62 -28.2 15.7 

Ft. Chippewyan, N. A 59 -22.8 17.2 

Turuchansk 66 -28.2 15.7 

Jeniseisk 58 -23.5 19.6 

The foregoing table shows that this interior region of 
North America also has a warm summer. In consequence 
of this, the forest boundary extends here likewise far north, 
viz., to 70° north latitude on the Mackenzie river, which is 
nearly as far as on the Yenisei and Lena. It is probable 
that the continental reofions of North America have 
neither such low winter temperatures nor such a high 
atmospheric pressure as the interior of East Siberia. Pre- 
sumably, however, the highest atmospheric pressure 
obtains on the American continent in winter. The weather 
in winter is here in a high degree "anti-cyclonic," that is, 
calms and moderate variable winds predominate, with 
mostly clear weather, although it is probable that warm 
winds also occasionally occur in winter. The Rocky 



196 

Mountains are in these parts rather distant from the 
ocean, and west of them Hes the extensive basin of the 
Yukon river, which stretches over the western part of 
Canada and the whole interior of Alaska. This river 
empties into the Behring Sea, which already partakes ot 
the character of a polar sea. 

According to Dall, it is true, this applies more to the 
coasts of Asia than to those of America. Near the shore 
there are no forests, owing to the cold summer, but very- 
extensive ones are found in the interior. The climate is 
here decidedly continental. Fort Yukon, for instance, 
under 66^° north latitude, has in winter a mean tempera- 
ture of -31°, and in summer, one of 13.7°. Considerable 
quantities of snow and rain fall respectively in winter and 
in summer. At Ikogmut, on the lower Yukon, there is a 
temperature of -17.3 in winter, and of 9.7° in summer. 

Most important are the observations on the island of St. 
Paul in the Behring Sea, under 57° north latitude. The 
air is here very humid throughout the entire year ; the 
atmospheric pressure is low, especially in winter, and the 
minima are at times north and at others, south of the 
islands. Storms are frequent in winter, but comparatively 
rare in summer, when dense fogs predominate instead. 
The mean temperatures are : winter, -2.6° ; spring, -1.6° ; 
summer, 6.7° ; autumn, 4.2°. The climate is, therefore, of 
a pronounced oceanic type, with a limited annual range 
and considerable retardation of the temperature extremes. 
How much the temperature is lower on the North Pacific 
than on the North Adantic is evidenced by the fact that on 
the small island of Grimsey, situated north of Iceland 
under the Arctic Circle, the temperature is nearly the same 
as on St. Paul, to-wit ; winter, -1.8° ; summer, 6.4°. 

Observations have also been made on Unalashka, one of 



197 

the Aleutian Islands, under 54° north latitude. The temper- 
ature is here about 2° higher than St. Paul, whilst its 
annual course is the same. Here also, therefore, we find 
a mild winter with low atmospheric pressure and frequent 
storms, and a decidedly cool summer with predominating 
dense fogs. 

The remaining middle latitudes of the North American 
continent must geographically be divided into three regions ; 
to-wit : I. A narrow coast-belt in the west, between the 
Pacific Ocean and the high mountains ; 2. A region of 
mountains and plateaus stretching in an easterly direction 
across the Rocky Mountains to about 100° west longitude ; 
3. The remaining part of the continent, comprising the ter- 
ritory of the Mississippi (exclusive of the upper sections of 
its right tributaries), the Atlantic coast-belt, and the region 
of the Great Lakes, up to Hudson's Bay. 

Both of the American continents lack extensive mountain- 
ranges trending in the direction of the parallels ; all higher 
mountains have approximately the direction of the meri- 
dians. Owing to this arrangement of the mountain chains, 
which does not separate the degrees of latitude, the air cur- 
rents have free scope north and south. In the part of the 
North American continent situated east of the Rocky 
Mountains, this condition receives additional strength, 
firstly, from the exceptionally great variation in the tempera- 
ture with the degrees of latitude, and secondly, from the 
frequency of cyclone centres, especially in the Lake 
region. 

The west slope of North America is in this respect differ- 
ently conditioned, being protected from the cold winter 
winds by high mountains, in the north and east. This 
region has in California a breadth of no more than about 
200 km. and farther north it is still narrower. Climati- 



198 

cally, it includes also several larger mountainous islands, 
like Vancouver, Sitka, Kadiak, and many smaller ones. 
West winds are here prevalent everywhere, with the ex- 
ception of the coast of Alaska, where frequent, though not 
violent, east winds occur. 

On the Pacific Ocean, in the vicinity of the American 
shores, we find a region of high atmospheric pressure 
(anti-cyclones) ; in summer it is somewhat more north and 
more distant from the coast than in winter, and the atmos- 
pheric pressure in its centre is higher (767 mm.) North 
thereof is found, also, a region of low atmospheric pressure, 
particularly in winter near the Aleutian Islands ; in summer 
however, the atmospheric pressure in the valleys of the 
Sacramento and the Columbia is considerably below that 
of the coast, whilst to the north the low atmospheric pressure 
continues unchanged. (In June, 757 mm., near Unalashka.) 
On the west coast, and on the islands of Alaska, the winds 
are west and south-west, whilst California has in winter a 
predominance of southwest winds, and in summer, under 
the influence of the barometric depression in the interior, 
equally predominating west and northwest winds. The 
latter exceed the others in force ; at San Diego, 55 per 
cent, of the entire motion of the air comes from northwest, 
taking into consideration the force of the winds. 

In summer, a rather cold maritime current passes along 
the coasts of California. The predominant direction of 
the wind being from the ocean, the coast of California has 
a colder summer than any other part of these latitudes, not 
even excluding the Southern Hemisphere, generally noted 
for its cold summer. The summer temperature at the 
elevation of the pass across the Sierra Nevada (2140 m.), 
is nearly the same as on the sea-shore at San Francisco, 
whilst at the latter place it is by 16.8° colder than at 



199 

Fort Miller, situated in the broad valley of the San 
Joaquin at a distance of no more than 200 km. from San 
Francisco. 

Such a difference between the summer temperatures 
within so narrow a compass, is nowhere repeated on the 
earth, and yet the broad longitudinal Sacramento-San 
Joaquin valley is separated from San Francisco by a not 
overly high mountain range. These rivers empty into the 
Bay of San Francisco, and the temperature in the valley, 
in the vicinity of the gap, is considerably lower than south 
and even north thereof, as is shown by the following 
table : 

Mean Temperature in July. Location. 

Fort Miller, 37° north latitude, 30.6°. South of the gap. 

Sacramento, 38^^° north latitude, 22.7°. Near the gap. 

Marysville, 39° north latitude, 25.4°. North of the gap. 

Union Ranch, 39>^° north latitude, 27.4°. North oi the gap. 

Owing to the cold summer winds above referred to, the 
difference between the summer and winter temperatures 
on the west coast is very slight. The highest temperature 
obtains here in September, when the sea-winds begin to 
abate. According to Scott's computations, the 23rd of 
September has at San Francisco the highest temperature 
and the 9th of January, the lowest, so that the period of the 
rising temperature extends over Zyi, and that of its fall over 
3% months only. Farther north, where the sea-winds are 
not so strong, the July temperature is even somewhat 
higher than in California. Still farther north, the summer 
is again cooler. On the west coast, as well as on the is- 
lands of Alaska, a genuinely oceanic climate prevails, with 
a mild winter, but cool summer, rendering agriculture a 
matter of impossibility. The mean temperature is here 
materially higher than on the east coast of America, 
but yet lower than under the same latitude on the west 



200 

coast of Europe, as may be seen from the following 
table : 

Year. January. July. 

Sitka, Alaska 6.3 -.4 13.2 

Dunwegan, Island of Skye 8. 41 13.1 

The interior of California, being sufficiently protected 
from cold winds, has also a warm winter. The summer is 
much warmer than on the coast, and the climate strongly 
resembles that of South Italy, and this not merely in the 
temperature, but also in the distribution of precipitations. 
Excepting the mountains, the summer is here absolutely 
rainless, the rainy season lasting from November till 
March. Summer and early autumn are so dry that the 
grain, after being cut, often remains in the field from June 
till the end of October without being exposed to injury. 

The similarity of the climate with that of Southern 
Europe has led to a similar cultivation of the soil ; here, as 
there, the principal products are wheat and barley, which 
are sufficiently fostered by the rains of winter and spring, 
whilst maize requires here artificial irrigation. The culti- 
vation of European species of fruits is likewise extensively 
carried on here, in particular, that of the grape vine, and 
in Southern California, besides, that of oranges and citrons. 
Altogether, the winter minima in California are not low, 
for neither in the coast region nor in the large interior 
valley does the temperature ever fall below 0°. 

A subtropical distribution of rain, i. e., great rain deficiency 
in summer, and copious rains during the colder months, 
reaches in Western America much farther north than any- 
where else on the earth. It prevails up to 48'' N. latitude, 
and the rainfalls along the coast are so profuse as to place 
the west slope of America between 45° N. latitude and the 
peninsula of Alaska, amongst the most rainy regions of the 



20I 

earth. The neighboring islands, also, abound in rain, the 
annual fall on Sitka being equal to 225 cm., and at Fort 
Tongas, even to 292 cm. Under 53%° N. latitude, a 
glacier extends to the sea, the most southerly on the North- 
ern Hemisphere. The abundant precipitations, and the cir- 
cumstance that they principally occur in the latter part of 
autumn and in winter, are highly conducive to the accumula- 
tion of snow in the elevated regions, and, consequently, to 
the formation of glaciers. Under 48° N. latitude, the rain- 
fall on the coast amounts to over 300 cm., whilst east of the 
Cascade Mountains, in the plains of the middle course of 
the Columbia river, it is less than 50 cm. Southern Cali- 
fornia, on the other hand, has but little rain, even on the coast. 

In considering the decrease of warmth with the latitudes 
on the Pacific coast, we readily find the same to be greatly 
retarded between 36° and 49° N. latitude ; that is, in the very 
latitudes where, in Europe and Eastern North America, it 
proceeds at a rapid rate ; in the Atlantic States, for in- 
stance, between 36^° and 4S}i° N. latitude, it is equal to 
1.26° per degree of latitude. 

This retarded decrease of warmth on the Pacific coast is 
unquestionably due to the cool spring and summer of Cen- 
tral California. Following is the decrease per degree of 
latitude: 

January. July. Year. 
Southern California. 

(S. Diego to Monterey). .49 1.72 .94 

Middle and Northern California. 

(Monterey to Ft. Umpaqua). .48 .07 .26 

Oregon and Washington. 

(Ft. Umpaqua to Camp Steele). .75 -.26* .27 

British Columbia and Alaska. 

(Camp Steele to Sitka). .47 .46 .52 

* This is an increase in warmth with the latitude. Camp Steele itself, being 
protected, in a measure, from the open sea, is somewhat colder in winter, and 
warmer in summer than would otherwise be the case. 



202 



For the study of the variation of warmth with the altitude, 
California is a barren field. The coast stations are not 
available as a basis, because of their abnormal temperature. 
Altogether, I could utilize in this case Fort Miller and Camp 
Independence only, the difference in the altitudes of which 
is considerable, and which are sufficiently close to one 
another. The decrease of warmth is very slow, viz : per 
lOO meters, annually ^t,°, winter 41°, summer 23°. In the 
absence of any details respecting localities or other circum- 
stances, I must, of course, refrain from further conclusions. 
A considerable section of the United States, bounded by 
the Sierra Nevada in the west and the Rocky Mountains in 
the east, is made up almost completely of plateaus, here 
and there culminating in mountains. Owing to the aridity of 
the air, and the entirely inadequate quantities of precipita- 
tion, the water-courses, as a rule, do not reach the sea. The 
Colorado with some of its tributaries, which arise in more 
humid mountain regions, form an exception. The great arid- 
ity gives rise to a considerable daily range, amounting, for 
some points in these regions, to a mean of over 18°. This 
wide range obtains both in the valleys and on the plateaus. 
Some of the southern districts of this region are situ- 
ated below the sea-level ; as, for instance, the " Desert of 
the Colorado" and the "Valley of Death," in California. 
Here, as in the lower valleys of the Colorado and Gila, 
the summer is scarcely less hot than in the Sahara and in 
Northern India. The mean temperature of July exceeds 
34°, and the absolute maxima rise to 50°. 

The lower valleys and the less elevated plateaus are ex- 
ceedingly dry, and compare in this respect with the Aralo- 
Caspian Plain and East Turkestan in Asia. Cultivation of 
the soil is, of course, impossible here without artificial irri- 
gation. On the higher plateaus it is somewhat less dry. 



203 

and there is more precipitation, particularly in summer on 
the mountains, wherefore luxurious grass plots, and even 
forests, are found there. 

With reference to the periods of precipitation, the follow- 
ing is to be observed : The Sierra Nevada constitutes in this 
regard a climatic boundary line ; on its western slope and on 
its crest, copious precipitations — in the shape of snow, of 
course — occur in winter ; farther to the east, in the lower val- 
leys and in the desert, it is dry during the whole year ; 
north thereof, on the higher plateaus of Utah and Nevada, 
somewhat larger quantities of water are here and there 
precipitated, with maxima in December and May, whilst 
summer and autumn are very dry. In New Mexico and 
Arizona, however, most of the rain falls in summer, 40 per 
cent, of the annual rainfall occurring in July and August. 

The plateaus and low deserts are so exceedingly arid, 
that the rivers traversing them not only lose much water 
by evaporation, but receive no afflux for long distances. 
They all obtain their waters from the mountains. These 
rivers are remarkable for the extraordinary depth of their 
channels, so-called canons, which are in some instances 
1800 m. deep, with mostly perpendicular sides. The latter 
circumstance is an additional proof of long continued ari- 
dity, without which atmospheric disintegration would have 
caused the sides of these chasms gradually to assume a 
somewhat sloping direction. 

Owing to the elevation of these territories and to the 
absence of precise data concerning the altitudes, we are 
yet in some doubt as to the height of the atmospheric pres- 
sure. Loomis and Hazen have found the isobare on the 
plateau of Utah to be 768 in January, and 757.5 in July. 
Even without reduction to the sea-level, the atmospheric 
pressure is here materially higher in winter than in sum- 



204 

mer, although the difference is not so great as on the almost 
equally high plateau of East Turkestan in Central Asia. 
At Yarkand In East Turkestan, 1257 m. high, the differ- 
ence amounts to 14. i mm., more than double the difference 
found at Salt Lake City. 

The disparity in the elevation, and the numerous moun- 
tains of these regions, naturally operate as strong local in- 
fluences on the direction of the wind. The condition of the 
atmospheric pressure, however, is such as to cause, south 
of 42° nortli latitude, a 'preponderance, in the main, of north 
ivinds in winter, and of south winds in summer ; that is, in 
winter there is an aii'-carrent from the plateaus to the gulfs of 
California and Mexico, and in summer, vice versa. (Coffin 
"Winds of the Globe" p. 682 to 685, Supan "Statistics" 
p. 188 to 193). 

The whole western plateau region of the United States, 
together with the low deserts and valleys located therein, 
is very warm, with a reduction, for the plateaus, of course, 
to the level of the sea ; the mean annual temperature of this 
region, to 35° N. latitude, exceeds 23°, which is higher than 
anywhere else on the earth in these latitudes. Even the 
regions on the Mediterranean Sea, so much favored in this 
regard, are colder, for the isotherme of 20° is found south 
of the Mediterranean under 33° N. latitude, and only in the 
Algerian Sahara does it advance to 35° N. latitude. Lissabon, 
on the west coast of the Pyrenean Peninsula, under 38° N. 
latitude, lies on the isotherme of 16.2°, whereas Salt Lake 
City in Utah, under 41 ° N. latitude, is located on the isotherme 
of 18.2°. Presumably, the explanation for this phenomenon 
is to be found in this, that the aridity favors a strong cale- 
faction in summer, even at considerable elevations, whilst 
in winter, the cold winds are warded off by mountains. 
The high plateaus extend also east of the Rocky Moun- 



205 

tains to about midway between the latter and the Missis- 
sippi river, and descend very gradually to the eastern 
lowlands. Having little or no protection against the cold 
winds, these eastern table-lands have, on the whole, a cooler 
climate than those in the west ; yet, with reduction to the 
level of the sea, they are warmer, when compared to the low- 
lands lying east of them. In some instances, the temperature 
on the plateau is even higher than in the same latitudes on 
the plain, as exemplified by a comparison of Ft. Laramie with 
Dubuque, and of Muscatine, Iowa, with Winnebago, Illinois, 
etc. The case is here all the more siornificant as lowland 
and plateau are separated by neither mountain nor pre- 
cipitous declivity, the protection of which against the colds 
of winter, like that afforded by the Rocky Mountains to the 
western plateaus, could be looked upon as an explanation. 
Under present circumstances we can but assume that 
plateaus of vast extent are already under about 40° latitude 
considerably warmer at the same altitude than the open air, 
or mountains, and that the laws governing the variation of 
temperature with the altitude, are much more easily de- 
termined in the case of isolated peaks than on plateaus, 
more especially, where, as in the case under consideration, 
a very gradual ascent augments the vertical difference by a 
horizontal one. 

The heating of the plateaus at the eastern base of the 
Rocky Mountains being an anomaly, both with regard to 
latitude and to altitude, the regions contiguous thereto pre- 
sent, of necessity, a rapid decrease of the temperature with 
the altitude, as demonstrated by the valuable observa- 
tion on Pike's Peak (4300 m. high). It is this high temper- 
ature, notably of the summer months, which produces in 
the Rocky Mountains a rather luxuriant vegetation at 
heights which in other mountains of the same and even 



206 

lower latitudes, are bare and desolate because of the cold. 
Thus, there are forests on Pike's Peak up to the height of 
3600 m. 

Even under the tropics, forests of high-grown trees are 
not found at so great an elevation. .The summer is here 
actually as warm as at the same elevation on the equator. 
Reducing, for instance, the temperature of Pike's Peak to 
the altitude of the " Dairy of Antisana" (}4° S. latitude, 
4060 m. above the level of the sea), we obtain for July a tem- 
perature of 6.4°, whilst the warmest month at the latter 
point has a temperature of 6.2°. At the elevation of the 
forest-boundary on Pike's Peak, the conditions are prob- 
ably still more favorable as compared with those of the 
tropics. Apart from the temperature, it is essential 
to the forest vegetation that the rainfalls in summer 
are adequate, and that the principal chain of the Rocky 
Mountains affords protection from the strongest (W.) 
winds. 

Pike's Peak is the highest meteorological station on the 
earth, and its isolated location is exceedingly favorable to 
observations. To the east of it lies a plateau 1800 m. 
above the sea-level ; to the south, another table-land, from 
2200 to 3000 m. high, separates it from the principal chain 
of the Rocky Mountains. In the American Journal of Sci- 
ence (January, 1878), Loomis has stated the number of 
strong winds, i. e., such as have a velocity of more than 30 
English miles per hour, or 11.6 m. per second; 25 per 
cent, of the observations determined winds of such force, 
which is certainly very moderate for so considerable and 
so isolated a height. Observations at 7^ A. M. and at 

II P. M. established for either of these hours 27 per cent, 
of such winds, whilst those made at 4^ P. M. yielded but 

21 per cent., tJins proving here also the prevalence of Jess 



207 

strong winds in the middle of the day. Also a much 
more clearly defined annual period manifests itself, for 
January had 45 per cent, of such strong winds, and 
July but 2 per cent. The direction of the wind was as 
follows : 





N. 


N. 


E. 


S.E. 


S. 


S. W. 


w. 


N. W. 


Per cent, of strong winds (more 
than 1 1.6 m. per second). 
( Winter. 
Direction of Wind. \ Summer. 
. Year. 


7- 
14 
10 
12 


1.2 
8 
II 
9 




I 
4 
3 


•3 

2 

3 
2 


5 
5 
8 

5 


31 
19 

32 
27 


42 
28 
18 
14 


13 
23 
14 
19 



This table shows, in the main, the predominance of west 
winds, with a tendency in winter to north, and in summer 
to south. This predominance*of west winds is even greater 
amongst the strong winds, 86 per cent, of which are 
S. W., W., and N. W., whilst but i^ per cent, thereof 
are N. E., E., and S. E. 

Loomis has also cited instances in which Pike's Peak 
was about 25° colder than Denver, i. e., where the 
difference in the temperature of the two points corres- 
ponded to the unstable equilibrium of the vertical ; and 
others, again, in which Pike's Peak was warmer than 
Denver. 

In rate per cent, of the observations the following num- 
bers of cases occur : 

DENVER COLDER THAN PIKE'S PEAK. 





Nov. to Feb.* 


January. Year. 


7 a. m. and 9 p. m 


6 
3 
5 


13 

9 

II 


1.8 


2 p. m 


I 


Mean 


1.6 







Not one instance from March till October. 



208 



DENVER BY 25° WARMER THAN PIKE's PEAK. 



7a m.andgp.m, 

2 p.m 

Mean 



Dec. to 


March, 


May. 

3 


June, 


August, 


October, 


Feb. 


April. 


July. 


Sept. 


Nov. 





1.6 





.8 


I.I 


1-7 


23 


53 


29 


16 


12 


.6 


9 


20 


10 


6 


5 



Year. 



.8 



18 
7 



Thus one in every nine observations in January shows a 
higher temperature on the mountain, a further proof that 
the temperatures in winter are by no means extraordinarily 
low on high mountains. Cases in which the decrease of the 
temperature with the altitude is so great as to correspond 
with the unstable equilibrium, are rather frequent in spring 
and summer, and very rare in winter. They are most fre- 
quent in May, for the reason, probably, that considerable 
warmth has already been imparted to the plateau, while 
large quantities of snow still exist on the mountain. 

In summer there are also found on the Peak "open 
places." These cases, however, the number of which is 
diminishing, are exceedingly rare in the morning and in 
the evening, being at all seasons almost exclusively con- 
fined to the warmer hours of the day. 

The eastern part of the North American continent in 
middle latitudes, stands under the influence of the low at- 
mospheric pressure of the North Atlantic Ocean, especially 
of that partial minimum thereof which is found in Davis 
Strait ; in winter, in the latter part of autumn, and in the 
early part of spring, when these cyclones have reached a 
particularly strong development, the winds north of 42° 
N. Lat. are more N. W. than S. W. This fact has an 
important bearing on the temperature, because the cold 
and dry air from the interior of the continent is thereby 
carried far south and east. 



209 

Of the regions of high atmospheric pressure, those es- 
pecially are of great influence in winter which are located, 
on the one hand, at the eastern base of the Rocky Moun- 
tains, and, on the other, in the Southern States, None of 
these anti-cyclones, however, is as constant as that found 
in the eastern part of the Atlantic Ocean at the northern 
limit of the trade-winds, and, above all, as the one obtain- 
ing during the colder months in the interior of East 
Siberia. None, therefore, is equal to the latter in the po- 
tency and uniformity of its influence on the climate, so that 
variability, both of atmospheric pressure and of tempera- 
ture and cloudiness, forms a leading feature in the climate 
of the Eastern United States. More especially do great 
and rapid changes take place in conjunction- with the 
cyclones so frequently traversing the northern part of 
the United States from the Upper Missouri to the 
St. Lawrence, moving thence in the direction of Nova 
Scotia. 

Nowhere on the earth are cyclones of more frequent 
occurrence than right here. The velocity of these cyclones 
is, even in the mean, twice as great as in Europe, and the 
attendant changes of the weather are, consequently, singu- 
larly abrupt. The fluctuations in the temperature are 
greatly increased by the unparalleled variation of the temp- 
erature with the latitude, which is caused by the existence, to 
the south, of the Gulf of Mexico, the temperature over which 
is higher than over other seas of the same latitude, whilst 
under 50° north latitude the temperature is lower than in 
other countries of the same latitude, with the exception of 
East Siberia. 

In summer the cyclones are less frequent, although the 
track along which they principally travel remains the same ; 
but at that season of the year, the atmospheric pressure in the 



210 

interior is lower than at the Gulf of Mexico, in consequence of 
which south winds predominate in summer throughout the 
south of the United States. In Texas they are S. E., and 
further to the east and north, S. and S. W. Even on 
Pike's Peak this veering to the south is noticeable in sum- 
mer. 

In preparing the comprehensive material collected by 
Coffin, concerning the United States, I advanced the fol- 
lowing opinion : 

An extensive part of the United States, embracing about 
one-third of the whole exclusive of Alaska, shows, not- 
withstanding the diversity of the topographical conditions 
of the country, a nearly uniform annual period of winds. 
The latter are throughout this region in winter chiefly N. 
and N. W., and in summer S. E., S., and S. W., with a 
great resultant in the south, and a diminishing one towards 
the north. This region extends from the Sierra Nevada 
in the west to the Mississippi in the east, and from the 
Gulf of California, the valley of the Rio Grande, and the 
Gulf of Mexico, in the south to 40° north latitude in the 
north. 

Following are some figures setting forth the direction of 
the wind east of the Rocky Mountains : 



Territory of the Middle Missouri 
(Kansas and Nebra-ka) 

Territory of the Mississippi (be- 
tween 38° and 43° north latitude).. 

Territory of the Upper Mississippi... 

Indian Territory 

Central Texas 

Lower Rio Grande 



N. NE. E. SE. S. SW. W. NW 



9 
7 

20 
29 
16 



9 
ir 
22 
II 



15 
16 

15 
14 
20 



15 

12 
II 
12 
8 
15 



13 

15 

9 

6 

5 



18 

14 

10 

6 

5 
4 



24 
26 

13 

9 

15 



21 I 



Territory of the Middle Missouri 
(Kansas and Nebraska) 

Territory of the Mi^^sissippi (be 
tween 38° and 43° north latitude.. 

Territory of the Upper Mississippi. 

Indian Territory 

Central Texas , 

Lower Rio Grande 



N. 


NE. 


E. 


SE. 


S. 


SW. 


W. 


10 


10 


13 


18 


26 


13 


10 


9 


10 


9 


22 


j6 


12 


XI 


6 


II 


7 


21 


13 


21 


10 


6 


8 


14 


22 


27 


12 


5 


3 


6 


II 


54 


17 


6 


2 


I 


5 


17 


52 


16 


8 


I 



NW. 



II 

12 

6 

I 

I 



In Southeastern Texas (Rio Grande) the prevailing condi- 
tions approximate those of the trade-winds ; but here, too, 
the north winds are the strongest. In Central Texas we 
observe already an actual Monsoon, and this, furthermore, 
with a distribution of the relative humidity which is char- 
acteristic of veritable Monsoon regions, as at San Antonio, 
for instance, where it is as follows : winter 49 per cent., 
spring 6t, per cent., summer yj per cent., autumn 64 per 
cent. The distribution of precipitations in Central Texas 
very strongly resembles that of Eastern Japan, in that it 
has a decided minimum at the beginning and at the end of 
the moist Monsoon period, occurring, respectively, in June 
and September. 

According to Loomis, the i^ower Missouri has in winter 
a higher atmospheric pressure than the surrounding terri- 
tories, (up to 768 mm.). A second maximum is found in 
the Southern States west of the Appalachian Mountains 
(somewhat over 767 mm.). From here northward, i. e., 
towards the Great Lakes, the atmospheric pressure be- 
comes lower, resulting in W. S. W. as the mean direction 
of the wind in winter and summer. In the south, on the 
shores of the Mexican Gulf, an approximation to the trade- 
winds is already observable, with predominating east winds. 



212 

which, however, owing to the lower atmospheric pressure 
in the interior of the continent, take in summer a more 
south-easterly, and in winter a more northerly direction. 
Most constant are these east winds in autumn, when a 
more pronounced maximum has been developed here, 
and when the atmospheric pressure on the Caribbean 
Sea has reached its annual minimum. Florida presents a 
still closer approximation to the conditions of the trade- 
winds. 

On the Atlantic coast, the influence of the minimum pre- 
vailing near Nova Scotia and New Foundland, is already 
very obvious, particularly in winter. In the Southern 
States there are even in winter more south-west than north- 
west winds, whilst in New England already the north-west 
winds are decidedly predominant in winter. In a still 
higher degree is this the case in Labrador, where even in 
summer north winds, or rather north-east winds, predomi- 
nate, whereas in Southern New England south-west winds 
are the rule at that season of the year, which, however, is 
determined to some extent by the trend of the coast. 
Even greater than in New England in general, is the 
preponderance of north-west winds in winter on Mt. 
Washington, the highest peak of New England, where 
the direction of the wind is in summer still more north- 
erly than in winter. Very remarkable, besides, is the 
great force of these winds, amounting in the mean to 13, 
18, and 22 m. per second for S. W., W., and N. W., re- 
spectively. 

In the winter months, temperatures of — 40°, with wind- 
velocities of 40 m. per second and upwards, are there no 
rare occurrence. These conditions are quite dissimilar to 
those of the mountains of Europe, where no such low 
temperatures occur on isolated peaks. 



213 

WINTER. 



Territories of the Ohio and Tenn.. 

N. Shore of Gulf of Mexico 

Bahamas and Florida S. of 29° N. 

latitude 

South Atlantic States 

Middle Atlantic States 

New England 

Labrador 



N. 


N.E. 
7 


E. 

5 


S.E. 


S. 


s.w. 


W. 


8 


9 


12 


28 


16 


19 


16 


9 


14 


9 


9 


6 


14 


28 


14 


18 


7 


5 


3 


13 


13 


7 


6 


II 


18 


14 


9 


12 


5 


6 


7 


14 


19 


9 


II 


4 


7 


7 


14 


15 


16 


5 


8 


I 


2 


I 


5 



NW. 



16 
18 

II 

17 
28 

33 
64 



Territories of the Ohio and Tenn.... 

N. Shore of Gulf of Mexico 

Bahamas and Florida S. of 29° N 

latitude 

South Atlantic States 

Middle Atlantic States 

New England 

Labrador 



N. 



7 
10 

2 

7 
8 

5 
20 



N.E. 



II 
12 

15 
12 
10 
10 
36 



E. 



7 
9 

28 
8 
6 

8 



S.E. 



32 
12 
II 
10 
2 



II 
13 

II 
17 
14 
12 

I 



S.W, 



31 
15 

5 
26 

19 

24 

I 



W. 



12 
10 

4 
II 
16 

14 
2 



NW. 



II 

13 



15 
16 

30 



The prevalence of cold ocean currents in the proximity 
of the east coasts of North America up to 44° N. Lat., 
and the fact that Hudson's Bay, on which the ice remains 
solid to midsummer, extends to 53° N. Lat., give rise to a 
colder summer in the eastern part of the continent than is 
found in the central part thereof. The region of cold sum- 
mers comprises here, moreover, a much larger area than in 
East Asia, where it is confined to a narrow border along the 
coast. The extensive lakes and marshes in the eastern 
part of the continent contribute their share, also, to this 
low summer temperature. 

The five Great Lakes of North America, the greatest ag- 
gregation of fresh water on our earth, must needs exert a 
far-reaching influence on the climate of circumjacent sections. 



214 

This influence naturally manifests itself, upon the whole, 
in a manner analogous to that of salt water, viz., winter 
and autumn are, under otherwise like circumstances, ren- 
dered warmer, spring and summer, cooler. But, where 
several months have a mean temperature below zero, a 
marked difference obtains between fresh and salt water. 

Winchell very justly directs attention to the influence of 
the winds. As they are chiefly west in autumn and winter, 
the temperature of the east shores is moderated by them 
in a much higher degree than that of the west shores. In 
spring and summer this is by no means equalized, because 
of the prevalence of east winds in these seasons. The dif- 
ference is brought out most clearly by a comparison between 
Grand Rapids on the east shore, and Milwaukee on the 
west shore of Lake Michigan. 

The influence of the Lakes is most potent on the penin- 
sula between Lake Huron and Lake Michigan, so that at 
Ft. Mackinak the difference from January till July is but 
25.3°, at Thunder Bay, even no more than 22.5° C. Such 
a slight diflerence is found nowhere else between the Rocky 
Mountains and the Adantic Ocean north of t^^"" north 
latitude. 

The climate is coldest on the western extremity of 
Lake Superior (Superior, Beaver Bay). In winter the 
cold northwest winds have free access thereto, and in 
December and January the lake is frozen over for a con- 
siderable distance. The east winds which frequently occur 
in spring cause the ice to retain its place for a long time. 
After very cold winters, like that of 1873 for instance, a 
portion thereof does not thaw before June. Superior has 
accordingly a temperature of but 3.2°, in the annual mean 
which, reduced to the level of the sea, equals 4.3°, and is 
therefore but 0.6° higher than that of St. Petersburg (z-l")^ 



215 

'The temperature of July, also, even when reduced to the 
sea-level, exceeds that of St. Petersburg by only .9°. A 
comparatively high temperature, per contra, is found on 
the south shore of Lake Erie. 

That the Great Lakes are more decidedly operative 
in retarding the temperature than the Atlantic Ocean, is 
accounted for by the fact that the water of the ocean, being 
kept as it is in a state of perpetual agitation, cools much 
less during the winter than that of the Lakes, where, more- 
over, as long as the temperature continues below zero, the 
formation of ice proceeds, which more and more reduces the 
area of the water's surface in a liquid state, tending to the 
mitigation of the extremes of cold. 

In spring, when the temperature rises above zero, much 
warmth is absorbed by the melting of the ice ; this renders 
the spring months much colder than they would be without 
these expansive water-areas and the formation of ice. 

In autumn the temperature is raised by the agency of 
the Lakes, causing the first frosts especially to set in later 
on their shores. 

Where the influence of the Lakes is particularly strong 
the summer down to 46° north latitude, is as cool as in 
European Russia, a condition which probably obtains also 
in the western part of North America in the vicinity of the 
Rocky Mountains under 50° north latitude. 

The absolute extremes are likewise moderated by the 
Lakes. At Detroit, Cleveland, Rochester, Buffalo, for in- 
stance, they are higher than in the region of the Ohio 
south thereof. At Sackett's Harbor, at the north-east ex- 
tremity of Lake Ontario, and at Governor, in its immediate 
proximity, the extremes are again much lower, because of 
the directness with which the cold air can reach there from 
the north, i. e., from Canada. 



2l6 

The absolute minima in the region between the Rocky 
Mountains and the Mississippi north of 40° N. Lat., are 
very low. The lowest hitherto known in the United States, 
exclusive of Alaska, is -50.6°, which is found at Pembina, 
on the Red river of the North, in 49° N. Lat. The 
next lowest are the temperatures in the east of the plateau 
region, as at Ft. Sanders and Washakie (Wyoming), and 
at Ft. Ellis (Montana), where they equal -45.6°, -47.5°, and 
-47.2°, respectively, and everywhere in this region where 
data from at least five years' observations are extant, we 
find minima of no less than -30°. As, on the other hand, 
very high temperatures are observed in summer, the differ- 
ence between the absolute extremes is here very great, 
partly above 80°. 

The low absolute extremes during the winter are charac- 
teristic of the plateaus east of the Rocky Mountains, and 
constitute an essential difference from what is observed 
west thereof. Compare, for instance, the points in Mon- 
tana with those in Idaho, or Ft. Laramie with Salt Lake 
City. The mean temperatures of the winter months differ 
much less. 

The region on the Middle Mississippi is noted for the 
rapid changes in the temperature frequently occurring there 
in winter. They are all the more palpable as they involve, 
at times, a change from 15 to 20° above zero to as many 
degrees below zero. 

South of 40° north latitude the thermometer rises some- 
times in February already above 25°, as at St. Louis, Jeffer- 
son Barracks, and various stations in Kansas. At Ft. 
Leavenworth -32.2° and 25.6° have already been observed 
in February ; in Arkansas and the Indian Territory, even 
January occasionally shows a temperature of more than 25°. 

If North America east of the Rocky Mountains is alto- 



217 

gether distinguished by non-periodical variations as no 
other country under the same latitude, this is pre-eminently 
the case in the territory of the Middle Mississippi. 
Further north, especially in Dakota, the maxima in winter 
are not so high ; at Fort Abercrombie, for instance, they 
rise in January to 6.1°, in February to 6.7°. In Montana 
the maxima are again higher, being at Fort Shaw 23.3° in 
December, 19.4° in January, 21.7° in February. These 
high winter maxima are probably produced here by the 
"Fohns," called "Chinook-winds" in this region. 

The variations of the temperature in Texas, while 
not greater, have, nevertheless, been more distinctly recog- 
nized. A suddenly arising north wind (Norther, Norte) 
now and then depresses the temperature from 25° to the 
freezing point. Much exaggeration, however, has been 
permitted to slip into the statements touching this point, as I 
have learned from the journal of a most careful observer, 
Dr. Pettersen of San Antonio, and through oral inquiries. 

But, although sudden and great depressions of the tem- 
perature are not quite so frequent as commonly asserted, 
they form nevertheless one of the most conspicuous pecu- 
liarities of the climate of that region, and there is no country 
under the same latitudes where non-periodical variations 
are so great as in Texas, especially when shorter periods, 
and not whole months, are considered. As far south as 
Ft. Brown, located at a distance of scarcely two degrees 
from the tropic, the temperature falls to — 6.7°. These low 
temperatures are, however, all the more remarkable as the 
means of the winter months are not low, amounting, for in- 
stance, at Ft. Brown in January, to 15.3°. In China 
equally low minima are possible under the same latitudes, 
but there the mean temperature of the winter is much lower 
•than in Texas. 



2l8 



ABSOLUTE EXTREMES IN TEXAS. 



EVecember. 



I Max. Min. 

Ft. McKavett I 27.2 —13-9 

Ft. Inge 28.9 —7.2 

Ft. Mcintosh 33-9 — 8.3 

Ringgold Barr 32.2 — 7.8 

Ft. Brown 3i-7 —56 

Austin 30.0 —12.2 



January. 



Max. 
26.7 

3I-I 
32.2 
32.2 
30.6 
30.6 



Min. 
—14.4 
— 1 1. 2 
— 7-2 
-6.7 
-6.7 
—14.4 



February. 



Max. 

31-7 
32.2 

38.3 
37-8 
32.2 
30.6 



Min. 
—12.8 
-6.7 

— 50 

— 3-3 

— 2.2 

— 7-2 



Thus, some winter months show a difference in the abso- 
lute extremes of more than 40°, and this south of 30*^ 
N. Lat. On the southern shores of the Mediterranean 
Sea, the absolute variation of the whole year is not so 
great as it is here in winter. 

We observe in Texas a quick rise of the temperature in 
spring, while the maximum itself is not reached before the 
end of July, and in some places August is even warmer 
than July. The period of the rising temperature, therefore, 
is longer than that during which it falls. 

This retardation of the maximum of the temperature is 
probably connected with the summer Monsoon of Texas. 
Owing, namely, to the calefaction and diminished density 
of the air in the interior, south-east winds are in Texas 
very regular during the summer, carrying the influences of 
the sea far into the interior. 

Farther east on the coasts of the Gulf of Mexico, in 
Louisiana and Alabama, the climate is, upon the whole, 
more moderate ; the winters are warmer, the summers 
cooler, and the changes of the temperature less abrupt. 
At New Orleans, for instance, January is by ij4° warmer 
than at Galveston, which is located i^° farther south and on 
an island. Still less are the differences between summer 
and winter on the Gulf coast of Florida, lying within the 



219 

Immediate sway of the Gulf Stream, and these conditions 
culminate on the small island of Key West, the tempera- 
tures of which are already thoroughly tropical, viz.: Year 
25.1°, January 20.7°, July 28.8°. But, little as the differ- 
ence here is between January and July (8.1°), it is greater 
than at San Francisco, where it amounts to only 5.3°. 
Frost has never yet been observed at Key West ; the ab- 
solute variation of the temperature amounts to only 30°, 
and is therefore even less than at San Francisco. 

Notwithstanding the high mean temperatures of the win- 
ter months, the absolute maxima observed in Florida are 
not so high as in Texas ; Key West, for instance, has in 
winter no more than 31.2°. 

Mention has already been made of the region of the 
Upper Mississippi and the Red river of the North. This re- 
gion has of late attracted very general attention because 
of the rapidity with which it is being settled, and because of 
the large quantities of wheat produced there. In the main, 
it is a prairie region, interspersed with small thickets. The 
climate is raw, the winter being especially cold, but the 
summer is warm and sufficiently rainy to favor the cultiva- 
tion of the soil. 

In the following table I present a comparison of this re- 
gion with such parts of European Russia as are also dis- 
tinguished by the extensive production of wheat : 



Degree 
of Lat. 


Altitude, 
(m) 


N. America. 


Year. 


Jan. 


July. 


45" 

46K° 
50° 


244 
440 
300 
220 


St. Paul, Minn 

*Ft. Pierre and Ft. Sully, (Dakota) 
**Ft. Abercrombie & Breckenridge 
Winnipeg, (Manitoba) 


6.1 

6.9 

3.8 

•4 


-II. 2 

-16.0 
-20.5 


22.1 

23-9 
21.4 
19. 1 



*On the Middle Missouri. 
**On the Red river. 



220 



Degree 


Altitude. 


of Lat. 


(m) 


5i>^° 


60 


48K° 


30 


52° 


no 


65° 


100 



European Russia and West Siberia. 



Saratow 

Zarizin 

Orenburg 

Ischim, (West Siberia). 



Year. 


Jan. 


5-3 


-10.9 


6.9 


-10.4 


33 


-15-3 


.1 


-20.1 



July. 



21.9 

23-7 
21.6 
18.9 



Analogous temperatures of winter and summer are thus 
shown to prevail in East Russia and West Siberia about 
6° farther north, but at elevations lower by about 1 50 m. 
The comparison of St. Paul with Ft. Sully establishes an in- 
crease in the temperature toward the west. Still higher 
are the temperatures in Montana, on the Upper Missouri, 
which, notwithstanding the elevation, are even warmer than 
those prevailing under the same latitudes on the Upper 
Mississippi and the Red river. This is ascribable in win- 
ter to the small quantities, or entire absence, of snow and 
to the frequency of " Fohns," and in summer to the aridity, 
which admits of an intense calefaction. 

The region on the Mississippi, being rather flat and little 
elevated above the level of the sea, is exceedingly favora- 
ble for studies about the variation of the temperature with 
the latitude. The fact however must not be overlooked 
that the farther we move northward, the farther we advance 
also into the interior, so that, on the whole, a more conti- 
nental climate must be found. 

I have utilized, besides, the observation at Winnipeg, on 
the Red river, reducing the same to St. Paul, conformably 
with simultaneous deviations. 

In the following table the temperatures are reduced to 
the sea-level, assuming a variation, per 100 m., of 40° 
in January, of 70° in July, and of 50° in the annual 
mean: 



221 



VARIATION OF THE TEMPERATURE PER DEGREE OF LATITUDE. 



Degree of 
Latitude. 



30-35 
35-41 
41-45 
45-50 



New Orleans — Memphis, 

Memphis — Muscatine 

Muscatine — St. Paul 

St. Paul — Winnipeg 



January. 



1.50 
1.71 
1.41 
1.24 



July. 



.02 
.78 
•44 
•30 



Year. 



•91 

1. 12 

.68 

.80 



As far, therefore, as the observations reach, we must as- 
sume the decrease of the temperature towards the north to 
be more rapid on the Middle Mississippi than on its upper 
and lower courses. Everywhere, however, the decrease is 
much more rapid in winter than in summer. 

I quote some figures relative to the temperature bound- 
aries and ranges in the United States and in Southern 
Canada between 24° and 50° north latitude. The annual tem- 
perature is barely above o°at the northern boundary, and 25° 
in Southern Florida. The January temperature varies from 
20° on the Red river of the North, to 20.5° in Southern Flor- 
ida. The zero temperature of January between the Missis- 
sippi and the Atlantic Ocean, is found under about 39° 
north latitude. The temperature of July is about 14° on 
the east coast under 50° north latitude, and 34° on the 
Lower Colorado. South of 35° north latitude, through- 
out the plains of the central and eastern parts of the 
United States, it is above 27°. This high temperature is 
accompanied here by a considerable air-humidity and by 
copious rains. 

The annual range of the temperature is smallest on the 
coast of California (5.6°), which is chiefly conditioned by 
the extremely low summer temperature. 

The whole west coast, inclusive of Sitka, has an annual 
variation of warmth of less than 15°, whilst in the central 



222 



and eastern parts of the United States, exclusive of Florida, 
it is everywhere higher than 1 5°, even on the banks of the 
Lower Rio Grande under 263^° north latitude. In the 
most southerly section of Florida, it is no less than 8° not- 
withstanding its genuinely tropical climate. 

East of the Rocky Mountains and north of 35 north 
latitude, the variation is everywhere above 20°. On the 
Middle Mississippi it exceeds 25° and reaches its highest 
numerical expressions north of 43° north latitude between 
the Great Lakes and the Rocky Mountains. At Winnipeg 
it is 39-6°, scarcely greater on Grinnell Land, and even less 
in the most northerly part of Greenland and in the North 
American Archipelago, and this for the reason that in these 
regions the summer temperatures are considerably reduced 
by the melting of the ice. 

The peninsulas and islands north of 44° north latitude 
have also a smaller range than the interior, and the annual 
variation of the temperature is moderated besides, by the 
Great Lakes. 

In comparing Eastern North America with the coast 
region of East Asia, which it somewhat resembles in 
respect of climate, we find that Labrador has very nearly 
the same temperature as the shore of the Sea of Ochotsk 
under the same latitudes, which, in view of the fact that 
Florida is much warmer than South China, establishes even 
for East Asia a smaller decrease of the temperature towards 
the north. 

In Europe and Asia, it is true, an almost equally rapid 
decrease of the temperature occurs in smaller territories, 
and this also principally in winter ; but in all such 
cases a mountain range separating north and south, is the 
determining agency. Thus, very different temperatures 
are found, respectively, on the two sides of the Cevennes 



223 



Mountains, of the Alps, the Western Apennines (inclusive 
of the Sea-Alps), the Balkan, the Caucasus, etc. 

In the Old World, therefore, such great differences in the 
temperature are found only where a positive, well defined 
geographical separation exists. The only larger country in 
Europe which is devoid of such mountain-ranges separating 
north and south, (Russia) has, indeed, the slowest" decrease 
of temperature towards the north. Not so in the Atlantic 
and Mississippi region of North America. Here the iso- 
therms crowd one another, as it were, without the instru- 
mentality of a geographically separating mountain-range. 

The great significance of this condition for man and his 
civilization lies in the fact that, by virtue of it, the fruits of 
the tropics and those of the polar regions are here produced 
within shorter distances from each other than anywhere 
else, whilst regions of such different climates and with such 
diversified products are, nevertheless, easily accessible to 
one another. With reference to its climate, Labrador must 
be counted amongst the polar countries. As in the High 
North, man is there dependent for his sustenance on the 
sea, the vegetable kingdom yielding him virtually nothing. 
Florida, on the other hand, at least the southern part thereof, 
although still north of the tropic, is decidedly tropical in 
point of temperature and vegetation. The following table 
exhibits the decrease of warmth per degree of latitude : 



Degree. 



25^ to 32 
32 to 36I4: 
36^ to 39^ 
39^ to 42 >^ 
42>^ to 46 
46 to 55}4 
25^ to 55>^ 



Ft. Dallas-Savannah 

Savannah Portsmouth 

Portsmouth-Philadelphia 

Philadelphia-Cambridge 

Cambridge H oulton 

Houlton-Hoffenthal, (Labrador). 
South Florida-Labrador 



Jan. 


July. 


1.50 


■19 


1.90 


•05 ; 


1.60 


•55 


1.40 


1.08 


1-59 


.64 


1.19 


1.04 


1.29 


.60 



Year. 

.86 
.67 

1. 17 
•91 
•95 
•91 



224 

The decrease of warmth is consequently most rapid in 
winter. 

In March the decrease of warmth with the latitude is nearly 
as rapid as in the winter months ; it is slowest in summer, 
whilst the other five months form the period of transition. As 
already observed, the difference from east to west is little 
perceptible in North America east of the Rocky Mountains. 
As regards the winter in particular, the temperature is, 
of course, milder on the coast of the Atlantic Ocean thaa 
in the interior, but even this influence is rather insignificant 
when compared with what we see in Europe. This is caused 
by the west winds, which are land-winds for the coast. The 
S. W. winds from the Gulf of Mexico, however, the warmest 
of all, bring warm air alike to the coast and to the interior. 
It is for this reason that we find in the interior of New Eng- 
land, at distances of from loo to 200 km. from the ocean, 
winter temperatures as low as under the same latitudes on 
the Mississippi. 

Only farther north, beyond 45° north latitude, a much 
colder winter prevails in the west, especially on the Red 
river. But the Lake region between New England and the 
Mississippi, is in winter warmer than either of these, owing 
to the influence of the enormous water masses. Thus, for 
instance, we find in January the following temperatures : 

Houlton, Me. (interior of New England) — 9.7 

Ft. Brady, Mich. (Lake Region) — 8.7 

Ft. Abercrombie or Red River Steppe — 15.6 

Colebrook, Connecticut — 6.2 

Detroit, Michigan — 4. 

Dubuque, Iowa — 6.5 

Concerning the cloudiness of the United States very 
few observations have, as yet, been made ; but it is certain 
that in the annual mean it is smaller than in Europe, with 
the exception of the countries around the Mediterranean 



225 

Sea. In the eastern and central parts of the United States, 
the annual variation is less than in Europe, while it is con- 
siderable on the west coast and on the western slope of the 
mountains, winter having here, as in the greater part of 
Europe, a heavier cloudiness than summer. On the Upper 
Red river, the annual period of cloudiness is similar to 
that of Middle Siberia. 

In Chap. 2 I have adduced some figures relative to the 
duration of sunshine. They clearly show to how great 
an extent the American coast surpasses in this respect that 
of Europe, notably so, when we compare points of equal 
temperature located under different latitudes. And not 
only is the duration of sunshine greater, but the air is 
more transparent, particularly in the winter months. This 
contrast is most strikingly brought to our view in the 
course of a voyage from England to the United States. 

In a large part of the Eastern United States, from the 
Atlantic Ocean to and somewhat beyond the Mississippi, 
and from the Gulf coast to 43° north latitude, the annual 
rain precipitations amount to more than 100 cm. 

Nowhere on the earth in middle latitudes do we find again 
so extensive a territory with such considerable precipita- 
tions. Abundant rains during the warmer months, accom- 
panied by a high air-temperature and rather ample humid- 
ity, account for the thriving of many plants, like cotton, 
sorghum, and maize. The first mentioned of these three 
products is, as is well known, the chief article of export of the 
Southern States, whilst maize is by far the most important 
bread-stuff of the United States. All three plants flourish 
only when a high temperature, combined with humidity 
prevails during the period of their growth. 

For this reason maize ceases to be the principal cereal 
on the plateaus and on the west coast, where either the 



226 

whole year or the summer are too dry for the cuhlva- 
tion of that plant without artificial irrigation. Towards the 
west, 1 00° west longitude is considered as the limit of the 
region of abundant rains, in which the cultivation of the 
soil is remunerative without artificial irrigation. 

The largest aggregate of precipitations in the United 
States is found on the coasts of Alaska and of Washington 
Territory and, next to them, on the coasts of the Gulf of 
Mexico, whilst the region of the greatest rain deficiency is 
found on the Lower Colorado, and many sections of the 
plateau region even much farther north, have annual precipi- 
tations of less than 20 cm. 

The distribution of the precipitations over the single 
months may be summarized as follows : On the peninsulas 
.and islands north-east of Newfoundland as far as Nova 
Scotia, autumnal rains predominate ; on the coasts of New 
England and the Middle Atlantic States, rains are uni- 
formly distributed throughout the year ; on the South At- 
lantic coast, summer rains predominate, especially in Au- 
gust, and this the more, the nearer to Florida. In the in- 
terior, a greater predominance of summer rains is percept- 
ible. In the wooded valley of the Hudson, the largest 
quantity of rain falls in July, whilst farther west, in the 
prairies of the Upper and Middle Mississippi and its right 
tributaries, June rains are prevalent. This region, has be- 
come noted as one of the granaries of Europe, to the 
markets of which it exports large quantities of wheat and 
maize. It must be remembered in this connection that in 
the steppes of Southern Russia, also, the greatest rain-fall 
occurs in June. In the territories of the Upper Mississippi 
and the Red river spring wheat preponderates, and this 
for the reason that the cold winter has not sufficient snow 
io protect the seeds from the frosts. 



227 

The cause of the great abundance of rain in the United 
States east of 100"^ west longitude, is to be found, firstly, in 
the warm basin of the Mexican Gulf lying south of it, and, 
secondly, in the violent agitation of the air caused in the 
north by frequent cyclones. The strong south winds bring 
warm and humid air, which, ascending near the centre, pro- 
duces profuse rain and snow-falls. 

In summer, and, in the Southern States, also in spring 
and autumn, the rains are frequently accompanied by furious 
thunder-storms to an extent which is unparalleled in any 
other country in middle latitudes. Not infrequently, also, 
the cyclones in the warmer months are accompanied by tor- 
nadoes, which, though raging within a limited circumference 
only, are nevertheless terribly devastating in their effects. 
Their course is usually from south-west to north-west, but 
always to the south-east of the centre of depression. They 
are most frequent in the Prairie States west of the Missis- 
sippi, viz.: Iowa, Kansas, Nebraska. 

3. TROPICAL AMERICA. SOUTH AMERICA. 

In this chapter I combine the whole of the American 
tropics with extra-tropical South America. 

North of the Isthmus of Panama are located Mexico, 
Central America, and the islands of the West Indies. 
Countries of a more or less mountainous character pre- 
dominate here, extensive plains being entirely absent, 
though some smaller ones exist on the Atlantic slope. Some 
mountains are high, but long and high mountain-chains 
trending in the same direction, like the Andes of South 
America, are wanting, and with them, also, the well-defined 
climatic lines of demarcation found in the latter country. 
But the manifold indentations of the country and the differ- 
ence of elevation, produce, nevertheless, diversified climates 



228 



within short distances from each other. Long continued 
observations at many points would be requisite for obtain- 
ing exact data on this subject ; unfortunately, however, but 
very few stations have been established. 

Least of all do we know of the atmospheric pressure, 
especially in the interior, because good levellings have, as 
yet, not been taken. Upon the whole, the atmospheric 
pressure probably decreases towards the south, the same 
as in the same latitudes on the Atlantic Ocean, and the pre- 
dominating air-current is the trade-wind of the Northern 
Hemisphere, (N. E., E.) With regard to location, however, 
these winds predominate chiefly on the islands and on the 
eastern slope of the continent, while they are much less 
prevalent in the interior and on the west coast, partly, be- 
cause the trade-wind, originally a not very strong air-cur- 
rent, is considerably weakened by friction in the highlands, 
and partly, because of the neutralizing effects of local gra- 
dients. In the interior, especially on the vast, almost 
woodless plateau of Mexico, the atmospheric pressure 
during the greater part of the year is probably lower than 
on the ocean, a fact which is well calculated to attract 
winds from the Pacific Ocean. The following table shows 
this to be really the case : 



Pacific) 2o°— 25°N. Lat. 105 
J- 15°— 20° " no' 
Ocean J 5° — 10' 



Monterey | ^ ■ 
Vera Cruz J 

Guatemala, City 

Havana, Cuba 

Barbadoes 



50^ 



-ii5°W. 

-I20°W. 

- 75°W. 



Summer. 


Resul- 


Winter. 




Mean Wind- 


Mean Wind- 


Resul- 


direction. 


tant. 
60 


direction. 


tant. 


N. 67 W. 


N. 23 W. 


48 


N. 20 W. 


39 


N. 32 E. 


82 


s. 47 w. 


58 


N. 28 W. 


30 


S. 41 E. 


82 


N. 33 E. 


33 


N. 78 E. 


21 


N. 22 E. 


37 


N. 32 E. 


41 


N. 41 


76 


N. 80 E. 


70 


N. 69 E. 


68 


N. 88 E. 


87 


N. 76 E. 


89 



Everywhere, then, with the exception of the Pacific Ocean 



229 

from 15° to 20°, and of Havana, the mean wind-direction 
is more southerly in summer than in winter. In the pre- 
ceding chapter this has been shown to prevail also in an 
extensive region of the United States, and there traced to 
the diminished density of the air in summer over the inter- 
ior of that country. 

On the Pacific Ocean from 5° to 10° N. latitude, this 
diminished density of the air in the interior of the country, 
produces in summer a south-west Monsoon. 

The difference of the temperature on the sea-coast in the 
region here under consideration, is slight, particularly in 
the annual mean. It rises here everywhere above 26°, and 
even beyond the tropics, in Northern Mexico, it is not 
under 22°. It is therefore, for the most part, the heights 
only which give rise to a greater difference, to which is added, 
in the warmer months, the difference between sea and land. 
Where the latter is dry, because protected from the influen- 
ces of the ocean, high temperatures are developed, as es- 
pecially in the environs of the Gulf of California. These, 
however, are already located north of the tropics, which 
exhibit no such high temperatures, so that the annual range 
is not above 8°, not even on the arid Mexican plateau, but 
mostly less. 

As everywhere in the tropics, the temperature on this 
expansive elevation is higher than in mountains of the same 
altitude, so that between Vera Cruz and Mexico the temper- 
ture shows, per 100 m., a decrease of .41° in the annual 
mean, of .43° in January, and of .37° in May. The smaller 
plateau of Guatemala is relatively less warm, and the de- 
crease of the temperature with the elevation equals .53° 
per 100 m. in the annual mean. 

On the Mexican plateau the rainy season extends from 
June till October, being the regular period of rains in the 



230 

tropics ; the other months are measurably dry and have 
but a Hght cloudiness. On the Pacific slope, the rains 
more and more diminish in duration and quantity up 
to 30° north latitude, where an all but rainless belt ex- 
ists. Differently conditioned is the east slope of the plateau ; 
here the rains are more plentiful, and besides the regular 
tropical ones, there are rains from November till April of an 
entirely different character, being "fog-rains," which yield 
but little water. They fall while the Nortes are blowing 
which occur here at times, and which bring cold and rain 
not only here, but also as far south-east as the moun- 
tains of Honduras. The fluctuations in the temperature 
are, therefore, much greater here than elsewhere in the 
tropics. At Vera Cruz, as at Havana, there are nearly 
every winter minima of 13°, occasionally even of 10°, and 
at a short distance north of the tropics, the temperature 
falls below zero. The "" Nortes " are yet vehement on the 
southern slope of the Isthmus of Tehuantepec, where, how- 
ever, they are dry and less cold. 

These regions, as also the coast and the western slope of 
the mountains, are known to me of my own knowledge. 
On the isthmus, the rainy season is short, lasting about 
four months ; the other months are very dry, and the wild 
vegetation is by no means luxuriant. It becomes more 
and more so, however, as we advance towards the east, and 
at Socunusco, on the frontier of Guatemala, we find one 
of the most beautiful tropical vegetations. The humidity of 
the climate is characterized by the oak-ferns which are found 
here. The rainy season is here longer than on the isth- 
mus ; in winter, rains are rare, though fogs are frequent. 
The most violent "Nortes" do not penetrate into this 
section, being intercepted by the wooded mountains. The 
humidity of the climate unquestionably depends to a great 



231 

extent upon the dense forests, for, considering the condi- 
tions in general, the western mountain slopes in these 
regions are dryer than those in the east. Very humid, 
also is the adjacent west-coast of Guatemala ; much less 
so is the plateau, as also San Salvador and Nicaragua. 
From Humboldt's beautiful description it has often been 
inferred that this condition uniformly prevails through- 
out the tropics. But the more we become acquainted with 
the tropics, the greater is the manifoldness we discover in 
the tropical climate, especially m the hydro-meteors. 

My knowledge of the rainy season of Socunusco and 
Guatemala is derived from personal observations. I found 
that the rains are there by no means confined to the day- 
time, as on the Orinoco, and that the nights and mornings 
in the rainy season are very far from being always clear. 
In addition to the rains accompanied with thunder-storms, 
there are also so-called "land-rains," which fall unremit- 
tingly for twenty-four hours, and which are at times not 
heavier than our autumnal rains. That the inhabitants have 
attached a specific name (temporal) to these rains, proves 
the latter to be not altogether exceptional. 

The eastern slope of Central America is more moist and 
rainy than the western one. This produces an exuberant 
vegetation, and this not only on mountains and coasts, as at 
Socunusco, but also on plains. The trade-winds prevail here 
during the larger portion of the year; coming, as they do, 
from across the warm Caribbean Sea, they are naturally 
laden with vapors. March and April are relatively dry, 
probably because the water is then colder ; in October the 
rains are especially abundant, the waters being at that 
time colder than the land. This character of the rains pre- 
vails also on the Lesser Antilles. On some of the Antilles, 
numerous observations of the rain have been made, espec- 



232 

ially on Barbadoes. On the northern and eastern slopes, 
which are altogether more moist, the trade-wind brings rain, 
even in winter ; on the southern and western slopes, most 
of the rains accompanied with thunder-storms fall during 
the warmer months. 

It has often been asserted that, normally, the vicinity of 
the tropics has but one rainy season, whilst nearer to the 
equator a double one is the rule. In tropical monsoon- 
regions of the Northern Hemisphere, like South Asia, West 
and Central Africa, this is indeed the case, but the very 
reverse obtains on the Antilles. In the north, between 
17° and 23° N. latitude (Cuba, Porto Rico, Hayti, Jamaica) 
there is a twofold rainy season, viz : in May, and Sep- 
tember and October, whilst June and July are comparatively 
dry; on Barbadoes (13° N. latitude) August and October 
are the rainiest months, September having somewhat less 
rain ; on Trinidad (io^° N. latitude) there is a well-marked 
single rainy season with regular increase from March till 
October, and decrease from October till March. All the 
rain-measurements on the Antilles indicate, likewise, that 
the winter months are there by no means rainless. Even 
in the south of mountainous Jamaica, that is, under local 
conditions which are certainly unfavorable to winter-rains, 
3 per cent, of the annual rain-fall occurs in February, the 
least rainy of all the months. 

South America bears a general resemblance to North 
America in the outlines of the continent, each forming a tri- 
angle with its vertex turned southward, and In the location of 
the highest mountain-chains in the west. Even the relative 
position of the Appalachian Mountains and the Canadian pla- 
teau on the one hand, and of the mountains of Brazil and the 
plateau of Guayana on the other, are analogous. But this 
analogy between the two continents is attended by essenti- 



233 



ally different effects upon their respective climates owing to 
the fact that South America broadens in the tropics, and 
North America in the middle and higher latitudes. 

Moreover, the high mountains of South America are 
shoved still more to the west, forming an uninterrupted high 
wall from io° north latitude to far beyond t,o° south latitude. 
In this respect, no mountain range surpasses the Andes, 
and none forms such a sharp climatic boundary-line between 
east and west. As the western slope comprehends no 
more than— of the continent, the eastern one is open to 
the influences of the Atlantic Ocean. This is of special 
importance for the tropics, because by reason of these geo- 
graphical features, by far the greater part of the continent 
is open to the sweep of the trade-winds. Hence, the cli- 
mate of South America from io° north latitude to 20° 
south latitude, and from the Atlantic Ocean to the eastern 
crest of the Andes is, in the main, a maritime climate, char- 
acterized by the predominance of a truly oceanic air-current 
(the trade-wind), by great uniformity of the temperature, by 
limited variations of the latter, both periodical and non- 
periodical, and by considerable humidity. Thus, the open- 
ness of the continent towards the east neutralizes to a great 
extent the influence of its bulk. 

Very little is known, as yet, about the atmospheric pres- 
sure, and the drawing of the isobares in the interior is ren- 
dered difficult by the small number of stations, and besides, 
by the want of levellings determining the elevations. The 
following table affords an idea of the winds in the north of 
South America : 

JUNE, JULY, AUGUST. 





N. 


N. E. 


E. 


S. E. 


S. 


s. w. 


W. 


N. W. 


Northern Venezuela 

Dutch Guiana 


2 

4 


45 
60 


23 
13 


13 
II 


3 

I 


6 



5 
2 


3 
10 







234 



DECEMBER, JANUARY, FEBRUARY. 



Northern Venezuela. 
Dutch Guiana 



N. 



N. E. 



17 
41 



E. 



32 
22 



S. E. 



22 

24 



s. w. 



w. 



N. W. 



This shows the trade-wind to be more regular in Guiana ; 
here, as in Venezuela and on the Antilles, the wind- 
direction in summer is more southerly. This evidently 
indicates that in the summer of the Northern Hemisphere, 
the zone of high atmospheric pressure in the western part 
of the ocean is located more to the north ; furthermore, that 
the influence of the diminished density of the air in the in- 
terior of the United States extends to this region, and, 
finally, that a lower atmospheric pressure probably obtains 
then also in the interior of the most northerly portion of 
South America. 

The coast-belt of Guiana is very rainy notwithstanding 
its being a plain, the annual rainfall ranging from 230 to 350 
cm. The distribution through the months is here, as on the 
Antilles, very unequal, and this, chiefly, because September 
and October are the driest months. The same conditions 
prevail at the mouth of the Amazon. 

It is probable that the dense forests of Guiana are like- 
wise conducive to the cooling of the air and the increase 
of precipitations. In the vicinity of Guiana and the forests of 
the Upper Orinoco, there lie, on the left bank of the river, the 
steppes called "Llanos," the climate of which has become so 
well known to us through Humboldt's classical description. 
April and May undoubtedly exhibit here the highest tem- 
perature of South America ; the grasses wither, and the 
soil is rent by deep fissures. In consequence of the di- 
minution of cattle breeding during the last fifty years, the 
Llanos are now dotted with isolated clumps of trees and 



235 

small groves, so that Jonas'-' could nowhere find a complete 
steppe horizon. There are also at present more clouds 
during the arid season than at Humboldt's time, and, now 
and then, even more rain. A slight change in the vegeta- 
tion has thus already exerted an influence upon the climate. 

West of these Llanos, there are, besides, extensive steppe 
districts in South America, north of the equator. Some of 
these districts, chief amongst them the shores of Lake Mara- 
caybo and part of the valley' of the Magdalena river, are 
noted for their great heat. 

On the Amazon river and its tributaries, there exists 
what is probably the most luxuriant vegetation on earth. 
The larger part is still forest, and, being connected with the 
forests of Guiana and stretching for long distances along 
the east declivities of the Andes, it is, next to the Siberian 
Taega, the most extensive forest-zone on the earth. Un- 
fortunately, the observations of the climate of the Amazon 
river are few, but the deficiency is made up for by ex- 
cellent descriptions. On the principal river, east winds 
predominate during the greater part of the year, notably 
in the dry season, from November till May, when they are 
rather strong. 

On the Rio Negro and the Orinoco, on the other hand, 
the winds are moderate, and calms frequent. From this 
fact the conclusion has frequently been drawn that the zone 
of equatorial calms obtains here throughout the year. But 
in Chapter XXI it has already been pointed out that 
even on the western part of the Atlantic Ocean, this zone 
is narrow and shifting in location in the course of the year. 
The matter must probably be referred to the easy access 
offered by the wide estuary of the Amazon to the winds, 
which thence advance farther up the valley. In the lateral 

*Peterman, Mittheilungen, 1879. 



236 

valleys, however, we find again temperate winds. The 
direction of the valleys of the Upper Rio Negro and 
Orinoco is nearly rectangular to that of the predominating 
winds, and between them and the ocean intervene hun- 
dreds of kilometers of dense forests, which diminish the 
force of the winds, especially of those of the Parime moun- 
tains (more correctly, •* Parime Plateau"). 

I have already adverted to the bearing of the dense for- 
ests on the Upper Amazon on the reduction of the temper- 
ature and on the increase of precipitations. (Chapter 13.) 
There certainly exists here an interdependence of cause 
and effect. The abundant rains conduce to a luxuriant 
forest-vegetation, which, on its part, is instrumental in in- 
creasing the precipitations. I must add that on the Upper 
Amazon the winds are S. E. and E. during the dry season, 
but variable during the rainy season, when calms and N. 
W. winds are of frequent occurrence. Phenomena, how- 
ever, partaking of the nature of monsoons, do certainly not 
occur here, and, altogether, the mutual connection between 
the phenomena is, as yet, to a great extent obscure to us. 
The water of the Amazon river has a very variable level, 
and even at Ega, near the frontier of Peru, the high-water ' 
is by 40' (14 m.) higher than the low-water, although the 
country is there so level as to render possible overflows 
by the river for miles. 

Our present information concerning the coast and the 
interior of Northern Brazil east of the Amazon river, is 
limited. The oft-quoted rainfall of over 700 cm. at Maranhao 
is surely incorrect. The province of Ceara, farther to the 
east, is noted in Brazil for the periods of drought occurring 
there. (Draenert "Journal for Meteorology," Vol. III. Page 
381.) It seems, however, that this drought prevails principally 
in the interior, the city of Ceara having the rather ample 



237 

rainfall of 149 cm. annually, which is but little less than that 
at Para. It must be observed, though, that Ceara has for 
four successive months a rainfall of less than 2 cm. per 
month, whereas at Para this is the case for one month only. 
At Pernambuco the rainy season is the very opposite of 
what might have been expected on the Southern Hemi- 
sphere. The largest quantity of rain falls in July, the small- 
est in November and February, whilst at Bahia, as at Para 
and Ceara, April is the rainiest month. In Guiana also, the 
period of rain is essentially the same, and this conformity 
between the two sides of the equator is most remarkable. 
The explanation of this phenomenon is perhaps to be 
found in this, that the low atmospheric pressure probably 
prevailing during these months in the highly heated Llanos 
of the Orinoco, more effectively attracts the warm air of 
the ocean, thus causing abundant precipitations. In the 
interior of Northern Brazil, under 8° and 9° north latitude, 
the quantity of rain (loo-i 10 cm.) is very small for a trop- 
ical country, and the period of rain is the same as at Per- 
nambuco. The trade-wind is exceedingly strong on the 
coast of Bahia, and even more so on that of Pernambuco 
and at the mouth of the San Francisco river. 

Farther south, particularly in the neighborhood of Rio 
Janeiro, the climate is, upon the whole, moist, though much 
less rain is precipitated than at Pernambuco. The heights 
to the east of the Bay probably shut out part of the rain- 
winds. On the ridge of the coast-mountains in the prov- 
inces of Rio Janeiro and San Paulo, the rain-quantity is 
larger. But while west of them the rainfall is more limited, 
it is nevertheless incorrect to regard this region as very 
arid, (as does, for instance, Griesebach in his "Vegetation 
of the Earth"), and to ascribe the absence of unbroken 
forests to this circumstance. The existence of coffee plan- 



238 

tations without artificial irrigation, as well as some rain- 
measurements, prove the rain-quantities of this region to 
be by no means inconsiderable, especially from November 
till March, though the months from June till September 
are dry. 

Of the remaining part of the interior we know very little. 
In the swampy plain at the sources of the Paraguay and 
Madeira rivers, 20° to 21° S. latitude, the plentifulness of 
water and the luxuriant vegetation indicate copious precipi- 
tations ; here palms largely preponderate. In like manner 
does a rich vegetation point to abundant rainfalls on the 
whole eastern slope of the Andes from about 20° S. latitude 
to lo"" N. latitude. The vegetation is not only exuberant, 
but also exceedingly diversified, and varies materially with 
the altitude. Amongst others, the quinine tree has here its 
home. 

The tropical Andes are. next to the Himalaya and some 
neighboring mountain chains of High Asia, the highest 
mountain-range of the earth. They differ from the Hima- 
laya in this that their two slopes descend, respectively, to 
the ocean and to low plains. With the warm climate and 
the ample irrigation of the mountain sides in the proximity 
of the equator and the adjoining plains, the Andes have 
become the classic example of the influence of the eleva- 
tion on the vegetation, for they reach from regions where 
the vegetation is the most exuberant on earth, up to heights 
which are utterly destitute thereof The Andes are 
classical, also, by having furnished to Humboldt the well 
known illustrations of the variability of the vegetation 
in mountainous regions, which have since been incorpo- 
rated in educational text-books and other popular works. 

In the high regions of the Andes, beyond the forest bound- 
ary (" paramos"), the winds are very high and, at the same 



239 

time, blowing from different directions. At times they in- 
crease to the force of dangerous gales ; this is of particularly 
frequent occurrence on clear and warm days below the snow- 
fields. In such cases the air-strata are undoubtedly in an 
unstable equilibrium, wherefore these winds may be com- 
pared to the "Bora" of the Adriatic and of the Black 
Sea. 

The Andes in the tropics consist of several parallel 
chains, and the wide longitudinal valleys between them are 
inhabited up to considerable heights. These colossal eleva- 
tions have a relatively warm climate, or, in other words, the 
decrease in the temperature from the sea-coasts up to them, 
is comparatively slow, whilst from these highland valleys up- 
wards, towards the higher regions of the mountains, the tem- 
perature falls very rapidly. (Chap, ii Ouito-Antisana). 
These interior highland valleys exhibit a very uniform an- 
nual progression of the temperature and have, moreover, 
considerably less rain than the whole eastern slope of the 
tropical Andes and the western slope north of 4° south 
latitude. The absence of extensive forests, and the intense 
heat imparted by the sun to the rocks on the valley-sides, 
offer, for the most part, the explanation for the high temper- 
ature of these valleys. From the latter upwards, however, 
there are, on the one hand, many clouds which intercept 
the rays of the sun, whilst, on the other, a large afflux of 
air from the exposed heights takes place, which has a refrig- 
erating effect. 

West of the Andes, between 10° north and 4° south 
latitude, the climate is again very moist, rains are frequent 
and profuse, and the vegetation is scarcely inferior to that of 
the Amazon. The river Atrato, flowing in this section, has, 
notwithstanding the smallness of its territory, an amount 
oi water equal to that of the great rivers of Europe, with 



240 

the exception of the Volga and Danube, Near 4° S. lati- 
tude, a pronounced climatic boundary-line exists, south 
thereof being an almost rainless region ; this is mainly ef- 
fected by the cold Humboldt-current, flowing along the 
coasts of Peru and Chili, between 30° and 4° S. latitude, 
thence branching off towards the west, in the direction of 
the Galapagos Islands, giving the latter the coldest climate 
known in the^e latitudes. For, according to Wolf, the air- 
temperature at the level of the sea is but 22°, and that of 
the surface of the sea, 23°. The temperature rapidly de- 
creases with the height, so that the same observer found at 
an elevation of 700 m. but 14° at noon, with a high south- 
east wind and dense fogs. The lower region of the islands 
is very arid, rains being very rare ; higher up, nearly con- 
stant fogs prevail, which gradually turn into drizzling rain. 
The moisture is here so considerable that the upper stratum 
of basaltic lava has been disintegrated thereby and con- 
verted into argillaceous soil. (T. Wolf, Apuntos, so birel 
clima de las islas Galapagos, Quito 1879.) 

The coasts of Peru and Northern Chili, and the adjoin- 
ing ocean have, along with South Africa, the lowest tem- 
peratures of corresponding latitudes. It is not only the cold 
ocean-current which is decisive in this direction, but also the 
south winds blowing from the region of higher atmospheric 
pressure to about 30° S. latitude. The air brought by these 
w^nds into the lower latitudes is colder than the temperature 
of the adjacent ocean. As long as they alone are blowing, 
the sky is mostly serene, rain occurring at most once in 
every 20 to 30 years. During the three to four colder 
months, the winds are variable, partly blowing also from the 
north, and from the sea upwards, to an elevation of about 
1000 m., dense fogs prevail, which pass into misty rains. 
The fogs are not denser on the ocean, but at some elevation 



241 

on the hills, which then drape themselves in scant verdure. 
The fog-region is rather sharply delimited towards the 
interior, and at a short distance from Lima, for instance, 
the salubrity of the valleys is such as to render them avail- 
able as climatic health-resorts for patients to whom the 
moisture of the coast-belt is an element of injury.* 

Between 5° and 16° S. latitude the chain of the Andes is 
very distinctly bounded, and beyond the narrow coast- 
belt rains occur in summer and, in the higher regions, snow. 
The water flowing from this source down the mountains, 
serves the purpose of irrigating the fields and gardens of 
the coast-region. The inadequacy of this rain-supply, how- 
ever, is sufficiently indicated by the complexion of the 
vegetation, in which cacti and other plants of dry climates 
predominate. 

Farther south, between 16° and 30° south latitude, the 
western ridge of the Andes assumes more the character 
of a plateau ; the aridity is here still greater, so that, 
within this whole tract but one small river reaches the sea. 
Above the coast-belt, with its hibernal fogs, plateaus are 
found here, on which several years intervene, sometimes, be- 
tween one rain and another. Such is the plateau of Tara- 
paka, from 1000 to 1500 m, high, noted for its rich depos- 
its of nitre and borates, and, farther south, the desert of 
Atakama, about 3000 m. high. The plateau west of Titi- 
caca Lake, which is partly upwards of 4000 m, high, has in 
summer regular rains and snows, the latter of which, however 
melts in a short time. In winter the sky is clear, the air exceed- 
ingly dry, and the daily range of the temperature very great. 
Both in this respect and in point of elevation, this plateau pre- 
sents an analogy to that of Thibet, though, owing to the low 

* The best authority for the climate of this coast is, " Contributions to the 
Meteorology of Cape Horn," etc., London, 1871. 



242 

latitudes, the winter on the former is decidedly warmer. 
Meteorological observations extending over, somewhat more 
than a year, have been made on this plateau, at Huancacho, 
at an elevation of 4100 m.; the mean annual temperature 
is about 8°, with considerable difference between the months 
of October and June, the former being the warmest, the 
latter the coldest month. Of 41 1 days, 251 were dry and 
stormy, 75 dry and calm, and 85 had precipitations, of 
which 59 occurred from January till March, again con- 
ditions, therefore, which undoubtedly call to mind, those of 
Thibet, by the frequency of storms'* and the predominance 
of precipitations in summer. In these latitudes, and a little 
further south, the elevation of the Andes as a whole is broader, 
and plateaus of greater extent, to the east of them, are found 
also. At Sucre, the capital of Bolivia, 2840 m. high, a period 
of 321 days showed 1 1 1 days with rain, 77 of which were 
between November and March; thus, here too, summer- 
rains largely predominate. 

Concerning the climate of Chili we are somewhat better 
informed than concerning that of Peru and Bolivia, and here 
we have, moreover, observations of the atmospheric pres- 
sure on the mainland. Upon the whole, Northern and Cen- 
tral Chili have a high atmospheric pressure, and the annual 
mean is everywhere above 762 mm. In Northern Chili the 
atmospheric pressure is in midwinter by 4 mm, higher than 
in midsummer, whilst in Southern Chili the difference 
ranges from i to i ^/^ mm. From 40° S. latitude southward, 
the atmospheric pressure rapidly diminishes, a condition 
which is altogether peculiar to the higher latitudes of the 
Southern Hemisphere. In these latitudes, furthermore, 
W. and N. W. winds begin to prevail, the moisture and 
relative warmth of which cause the rains farther south to 
become more and more abundant. At Copiapo, under 27° S. 



243 

latitude, the annual rainfall is equal to i m., whereas at 
Puerto Montt, under 41° S. latitude, it amounts to 269 cm. 
In Northern and Central Chili south winds are yet predom- 
inant in summer, in consequence of which that season is 
almost or entirely, rainless, especially, since the sea has 
here a colder temperature. The other seasons, however, 
have rain, particularly autumn and winter. 

In many respects the climate of Central Chili is ana- 
logous to that of California and Italy. Wheat and barley 
are here, as in the latter countries, the principal products 
and are grown, likewise, without artificial irrigation, whilst 
the latter cannot be dispensed with in the cultivation of 
herbage and vegetables. The vine and the fruit-trees 
of Southern Europe are also found here, though the or- 
ange, for instance, does not ripen here, the summer being 
much cooler than in Italy and in the interior of California. 
The cloudiness is slight in Northern Chili (Copiapo : 19 
annually) ; on the coast it is much heavier, and in Central 
Chili it has a considerable annual range, to-wit, 22 in Jan- 
uary and 56 in June. 

On the coast of Northern Chili the temperature is de- 
pressed in a marked degree by cold winds blowing from 
the ocean, whilst in the interior the rocky soil is exceed- 
ingly favorable to calefaction. Owing to these facts the 
temperature rises in the direction of the interior, up to a 
considerable height. Thus, for instance, we find between 
27° and 28° south latitude the following annual means: 
Caldera (coast) 19.5°, Copiapo (400 m.) 16.5°, Pabellon 
(670 m.) 17.3°, Potrero Grande (850 m.) 19°. Assuming 
the temperature to decrease from the last named altitude 
by -55° per 100 m. elevation, the temperature at the 
height of 1300 m. would still be no lower than on the coast. 
In CaHfornia the same phenomenon is observed, but prin- 



244 

cipally in summer, whilst in the annual mean the tempera- 
ture does not increase up to such elevations. 

South of 42° south latitude we have no observations 
of the rain on the west coast of South America, but 
the appearance of the vegetation, and the accounts of travel- 
lers, concur in arguing an exceeding abundance of rain. 
Such, too, is the judgment of Darwin, King, Fitzroy, and 
others. Autumn and winter rains probably predominate 
as far as 45° south latitude, whilst farther south the rains 
are more evenly distributed over all the seasons of the year. 
In keeping with this profusion of precipitations is the quan- 
tity of snow found on the western declivities of the Andes ; 
mighty glaciers are formed accordingly, one of which ex- 
tends in the Lagoon of S. Raphael (46^° south latitude) 
down to the sea-level. 

As in South Africa, so also in South America, the west 
coast is considerably colder than the east coast. We are, 
alas, without observations regarding the section from 4" to 
to 18° S. latitude, where the difference is probably greatest. 
At Rio Janeiro, under 23° S. latitude, the mean tempera- 
ture is by 4° higher than at Arica, in Peru, located under 
18% S. latitude. In the latter latitude on the coast of 
Brazil, the mean temperature is probably by 5° higher than 
at Arica. At Bahia-Blanca, on the east coast under 39° 
S. latitude, the mean temperature is by only 4.5° lower 
than at Arica, whilst its summer is even by 1.1° warmer. 

Until recently we knew virtually nothing about the tem- 
perature in the interior of the Argentine Republic. At 
present, however, quite a number of stations are to be found 
there, and three years ago B. A. Gould projected a chart of 
the isotherms of South America. The. limited number of 
observations, however, and the plateau-like elevation in the 
north-west of the country, render the isotherms rather doubt- 



245 

ful. Their general course is as follows : From the coasts 
of Chili they turn abruptly to the south, reach their most 
southerly location on the plateaus east of the Andes, and 
shift again somewhat to the north in the vicinity of the 
east coast. Thus, the course of the isotherms in the 
eastern and central parts of South America, resembles, in 
a great measure, that in the United States. Here also does 
the temperature of the western plateaus, when reduced to 
the sea-level, exceed that of the eastern lowlands ; at Pilciao, 
for instance, located in the west at an elevation of 800 m., 
the summer is no cooler than under the same latitude in 
the plains of the Parana. 

For want of requisite means, we are, as yet, not in a 
condition correctly to draw the isobares in the interior of 
South America. Although observations have been made 
of the atmospheric pressure, the height of the latter is not 
definitely known to us. The assumption is warranted, how- 
ever, that in the interior of the country, between 30° and 
35° S. latitude, the isobare 768 mm. is to be found in winter, 
whilst that of 757 mm. probably obtains in summer, and 
this for the following reasons : i . It is peculiar to the interior 
of continents in middle latitudes to have a much lower at- 
mospheric pressure in winter than in summer; 2. Though 
not specially broad south of 2,0° S. latitude, the South 
American continent between 30° and 39° S. latitude extends, 
nevertheless, over 15 degrees longitude east of the 
Andes, and, being protected by high mountains against 
the west winds prevalent in these latitudes, its climate is 
more continental than it would be if exposed to the sea 
winds blowing from the west; 3. In the interior of the 
Argentine Republic and Paraguay, between 25° and 30° S. 
latitude, the temperature in summer is higher than that 
of any month on the Amazon. 4. At Buenos Ayres 



246 

already, the atmospheric pressure of July is by 5 mm, 
higher than that of January. At Pelotas in Southern 
Brazil, at a short distance from the coast, the difference 
amounts to no less than 9 mm. ; a difference of 1 1 mm. 
in the interior, when reduced to the sea-level, would, there- 
fore, be no extraordinary phenomenon. 

South America, south of the tropics and east of the An- 
des is by the latter mountain range cut off from the west 
winds which are the rule in middle latitudes, and for 
this reason calms occur frequently on the eastern base of 
the mountains, as, for instance, at Mendoza.''' But on the 
eastern plains and on the east coast, the winds are 
rather high,, and the warm north winds are, therefore, 
shortly superseded by cool, humid, southeast (Su Estada), 
and by dry cool southwest winds (Pampero), and vice versa. 
This is attended with pretty rapid changes of the tempera- 
ture, especially in summer, as is also the case in the Eastern 
United States. 

But this similarity between the Eastern United States 
and the Argentine Republic does not reach very far, the 
climates of the two countries being essentially different, 
notably in winter. Eastern North America widens to- 
wards the north, i. e. towards the pole ; in the High North 
the winter is very cold, and the plain of the United States 
is completely open both to the cold dry winds from the 
north, and to the warm winds from the Gulf of Mexico. 
In South America, the opposite of these conditions pre- 
vails. The continent does not extend into higher lati- 
tudes and becomes more and more narrow as it ap- 
proaches the pole, so that regions of winter-colds, as in- 
tense as those found in North America, are here entirely 
absent. Throughout South America, therefore, east of the 

* Burmeister : Description physique de la R^publique Argentine. 



247 

Andes, the temperature of the coldest month is nowhere, on 
the plains, and not even the plateaus, below -i° or -2°. 
Hence the country is exempt in winter from that extreme 
cooling through winds from high latitudes which is so pro- 
nounced a feature in the United States. The winter is 
everywhere in South America south of 30° south longitude 
very moderate, and, as far as known, a permanent snow- 
crust is found nowhere in that season, not even on the 
plains of Patagonia. There exists, moreover, in the 
proximity of the Argentine Republic no warm sea-basin 
like the Gulf of Mexico, and the variations of the tem- 
perature in winter from day to day, are, therefore, less 
wide than in summer, and much more limited, especially, 
than anywhere in the United States. ( Vide the admirable 
investigations of this subject by O'Doering " La Varia- 
bilidad Interdiurna de la temperaturain America del Sur" 
Buenos Ayres. 1883.) 

But the fluctuations of the temperature are here greater, 
nevertheless, than on the west coast of South America, 
so that as far as 30°, and here and there as far as 26° 
south latitude, night frosts occur occasionally at a short 
distance from the coast. In the valley of the Parana 
snow falls to about 30° south latitude, though this is a rare 
occurrence. 

The rain-quantity in Southern Brazil, the Argentine Re- 
public, and Paraguay, from the tropic to 30° or 32° south 
latitude, and east of the Parana, is rather large, viz.: 100 cm. 
and more ; farther south it grows smaller, being 87 cm. at 
Buenos Ayres, 49 cm. at Bahia-Blanca, and still less, proba- 
bly, in Eastern Patagonia. But in the city of Buenos 
Ayres and the surrounding district, the precipitations begin 
to be very variable, and years of very destructive droughts 
are occasionally experienced. West of the Parana, the 



248 

climate grows more and more dry, the rainfalls are limited, 
and, as we advance, we find heavier rainfalls confined to 
isolated climatic oases, all of which are located on the east 
slope of mountain-groups, at whose sides the more humid 
E. and N. E. winds ascend [i. e., Tukuman 90 cm., Kor- 
dova 69 cm.) Between the coast or the Parana, and the 
Andes, several mountain-groups of this kind are to be found, 
and the Argentine slope of the Andes north of 40° south lati- 
tude is, consequently, very arid. Farther south this is not 
the case to the same extent, as, owing to the decrease in 
the elevation of the Andes their eastern declivities receive 
larger quantities of rain. Between 22° and 32° south lati- 
tude, however, both slopes of the Andes, and the contig- 
uous plateaus, are exceedingly dry. 

Until a very short time ago, it was currently believed 
in Europe that the distribution of rain throughout South 
America between 25° and 40° south latitude, is subtropi- 
cal, which means a rainless summer and rains during the 
colder months. At present we know this distribution to 
prevail only in Chili, but nowhere east of the Andes, so that 
South America east of the Andes and south of the tropic is a 
region of strongly predominating summer-rains. This ap- 
plies particularly to the interior. We have at present ob- 
servations from more than twenty points in the interior, 
and everywhere the same distribution is exhibited, with 
widely varying rain-quantities. The coast and its vicinity 
(Buenos Ay res, the valley of the Parana), shows a slightly 
different distribution, the precipitations being heavier in 
spring and autumn, but even here the smallest quantity of 
rain falls in the winter months. 

There are reasons for regarding what has been ob- 
served in this part of South America as the normal conti- 
nental conditions of middle latitudes. The interior of the 



249 

continents on the Southern Hemisphere present altogether 
similar conditions. 

In the highest latitudes of South America, and in the 
neighboring islands (Terra del Fuego, Falklani^ Islands), 
the rains are much more evenly distributed through the 
months. The annual aggregate is not large, about 50 cm., 
but the rains are frequent, the air is humid, and the cloudi- 
ness considerable. 

At Ushuaya (Terra del Fuego), July has a temperature 
of -.6°, while that of January exceeds 10.6^. The French 
polar station in Orange Bay, west of it, found the condi- 
tions much less continental. At both points the mean 
annual temperature was about 5.4°, which clearly indicates 
that the most southerly portion of South America, and Terra 
del Fuego, have a relatively warm climate. A much colder 
temperature at the same time was observed on South 
Georgia, where the German polar expedition passed the 
winter, and which is located under the same latitude as 
the French station. 

The following collation presents some of the results : 



Annual mean 

Coldest month, (June).... 
Warmest month, (Feb'y) 



Orange Bay, French Station, 
on Terra del Fuego. 



5-4 
2.3 
8.9 



South Georgia. 



1.4 
-2.9 
5-3 



South Georgia is in every month of the year much colder 
than Orange Bay, but the difference of the temperature of 
the coldest month is greater than that of the warmest, and 
in the annual mean it amounts to 4°, which is certainly con- 
siderable, in view of the fact that the Southern Hemisphere 
is principally covered with water. 

In conclusion I have to make one more observation : On 
the Paramos (plateaus) of the Andes, beyond the height of 



250 

3000 m., a high west wind is observed everywhere, especially 
in the daytime. The same phenomenon has been observed, 
also, in other regions, as, for instance, in Thibet, where it 
has been explained by assuming it to be the air of the plains 
and lower table-lands located to the west of it, which rises to 
these heights in the middle of the day, owing to the ascent of 
the strata of equal atmospheric pressure. For the Andes this 
explanation is not admissible, because west of them lies the 
cool eastern part of the Pacific Ocean, and the equally cool 
coast region. I think it more probable that these west 
winds are a part of the general westerly current prevalent 
on high elevations, and the fact of their being more pro- 
nounced at daytime, must be referred to the same cause 
which increases the force of all winds on heated land-areas. 

4 THE ATLANTIC OCEAN. 

Of all the oceans of the globe, the Atlantic has been most 
thoroughly explored. For a long period of time it has served 
as the highroad of commerce to civilized nations, so that 
many facts concerning it have been gathered, many practi- 
cal experiences acquired, before the oceans were made the 
subjects of systematic scientific investigation. Of late 
years, many expeditions have been specially equipped for 
this purpose, and a considerable portion of the mate- 
rials thus collected bears exclusively on the Atlantic Ocean. 
Apart from its having been more closely examined into 
than other oceans, the Atlantic has certain peculiarities 
rendering its exploration singularly important. Although 
its dimensions, at least in width, are not considerable 
when compared to those of the Pacific and Indian Oceans, 
it presents, nevertheless, a very expansive scope to the 
winds, by reason of its being devoid of islands, save 
such as are located near the shores of the continents, and 



251 

the trade-winds of the Atlantic, if no other, yield not in 
the least to those of other oceans in regularity and force. 
Furthermore, the Atlantic Ocean stretches over all the 
tropical and a large part of the middle latitudes of both 
hemispheres, and stands in open communication with both 
the Arctic and the Antarctic Ocean, being thus in a condition 
to receive cold water from both. The Pacific and Indian 
Oceans have such communication with the Antarctic Ocean 
only ; with the Arctic Ocean the Pacific connects by means 
of the relatively narrow and shallow Behrings Strait, whilst 
the Indian Ocean barely reaches to the northern tropic. 

There is, finally, one more feature in the Atlantic Ocean 
by dint of which it must needs exert a most potent influence 
on the climates of the globe, and which, therefore, greatly 
enhances the value of the exploration of the same ; it is this : 
While itself much smaller than the Pacifi,c Ocean, its territory 
is much greater, inasmuch as a very large portion of the sur- 
face of the earth is comprised in the basins of the rivers 
emptying into it or its gulfs, and into the inland seas con- 
nected with it, as, for instance, the Mediterranean Sea, 
Black Sea, Sea of Asov, North and Baltic Seas, Gulf of 
Mexico, Caribbean Sea, etc. This points out the fact that 
the extensive continental plains are not separated from the 
Atlantic Ocean by mountain-ranges, and are, accordingly, 
open to the action of the winds blowing from there. Nor 
are the territories of the Caspian and Aral Seas separated 
from this ocean by mountains. 

The chart of the Atlantic Ocean by the " Deutsche See- 
warte" (German Maritime Institute) clearly shows that the 
temperature at the bottom of the ocean is very low. This is 
especially the case in the western part of the ocean, where, 
upon the whole, a temperature of less than 2° prevails, 
whilst that of the eastern part ranges between 2° and 3°. 



252 

But this region of higher temperature divides into two dis- 
tinct sections, so that between io° and 15° north latitude a 
broad, continuous belt of lower temperature extends in an 
easterly direction as far as the Cape Verde Islands, and 
thence, in a narrower strip, towards N. N. E. up to the 
Strait of Gibraltar. The South Atlantic Ocean, also, has 
no extensive areas in which the temperature at the bottom 
is higher than 3°, if, therefore, any mention of a high tem- 
perature is made, it must be regarded as of a purely relative 
meaning. Only west of the shores of Europe, between 38° 
and 60° north latitude, do we find a moderately large area, 
with a temperature at the bottom of more than 3°, but the 
depths are there already inconsiderable. In the western 
part of the ocean, where the temperature is altogether 
lower, a greater diversity obtains in the temperatures at the 
bottom. East of South America there is a large area with 
a temperature below 0°; under 42° south latitude it occupies 
30 degrees in longitude, viz. : from 26° to 56° west longi- 
tude, and extends northward to 34° south latitude. A 
noteworthy belt of very low temperature (below .5°) is 
found farther north between 2° and 26° south latitude under 
about 30° west longitude. In its most northerly portion, 
the Island of Fernando Noronha, the temperature is even 
below zero. Due north thereof, however, a higher tem- 
perature prevails, i. e. above 2°, and in the centre (4^° to 
6}4° N. latitude and 24° to 29° W. longitude), the tempera- 
ture is even higher than 3^°. The water of the Gulf of 
Mexico and the Caribbean Sea, and of a part of the Atlan- 
tic Ocean east of them and extending north to Cape 
Hatteras and east to the meridian of Puerto Rico, has like- 
wise a temperature exceeding 2°. 

The charts of the temperatures at the greatest depth, 
which existed already in former years, cannot furnish the 



253 

same data as those supplied by the charts of medium 
depths, for the reason that the heaviest and coldest water 
naturally accumulates where the depth is greatest, provided 
only that there is a sufficiently deep connection with the 
reservatories of cold water, to wit : the Arctic and, espec- 
ially, the Antarctic Ocean. But the Atlas of the Atlantic 
Ocean above referred to contains also a map of the tem- 
peratures at depths ranging from 800 to 1 200 m. A glance 
at this map shows how greatly the temperatures at that 
depth increases from 35° S. latitude to 35° N. latitude. 

The course of the isotherms is therefore more uniform 
in medium depths than at the bottom, principally because 
of the approximate equality of the former. I shall not 
describe the course of the isotherms m extenso, but confine 
myself to the remark that the isotherms of 3°, 4° and 5° 
draw nearer to the north on the shores of South Africa and, 
especially, of South America. In the latter case the influ- 
ence of the rotation of the earth is distinctly noticeable in 
this that it causes the motion of the water from the south, 
i. e., from the Southern Ocean, to change to S. E. In mid- 
ocean, especially from 0° to 10° west longitude, the iso- 
therms move farther south, i. e., the water at this depth is 
warmer. The farther we advance northward, at least up to 
35° N. latitude, the higher is the temperature of the water 
at this depth. The isotherm of 8° corresponds with the 
warmest water in the western part of the ocean ; in the 
eastern part, it divides into two branches and comprises a 
a very extensive area ; between these two branches, on the 
shores of France, of the Pyrenean Peninsula, and of Moroc- 
co, and west of them, water of a yet much higher tempera- 
ture is found at this depth, so that the isotherms of 9°, 
10° and 11° can be drawn. The isotherms of 7° has like- 
wise a northern and a southern branch, and the zone 



254 

between them, which, near the American shores, has a width 
of less than 4^° (29° to 331^° north latitude), widens near 
the Azores to the extent of 12° (28° to 40° north latitude), 
and attains between 10° and 13° west longitude, a width of 
27° (26° to 53° north latitude). The course of the isotherms 
at depths from 800 to 1 200 meters conveys an idea of the 
insignificant extent to which the cooling of the lower strata 
of oceans, especially the tropical ones, is influenced by the 
Northern Ocean and in how marked a degree this is de- 
pendent upon the Southern Ocean. The Northern Polar 
Sea has probably supplied the cold water filling the deeper 
basins of the North Atlantic ; yet, the latter has nowhere 
temperatures below zero, whilst in the South Atlantic 
there exists a broad zone, extending from 34° to 43° south 
latitude, with a temperature at the bottom of less than 0°. 
Still slighter is the influence of the Arctic Ocean upon the 
refrigeration of the strata between 800 and 1200 m., even 
under 40° north latitude, which conclusively proves that 
even as far north as the Tropic of Cancer the colder water 
comes from the south, and that the section of the Atlantic 
Ocean bounded by 30° and 40° north latitude has a much 
higher temperature than the latitudes near the equator. 

It has long been an established fact that under the equa- 
tor the depth of the stratum of warm water is much less 
than in the middle latitudes of the North Atlantic Ocean. 
I refer only to the — in their time — eminent observations 
of E. Lenz. But the false conclusion has not infrequently 
been drawn from these observations that the limited depth 
of the stratum of warm water under the equator points to 
an upward movement of the water, or, in other words, that 
the low temperature of the middle strata under the equa- 
tor is referable to the rising of cold water from the bottom. 
Were this so, the temperature of the water at the same 



255 

depth would necessarily increase south of the equator. 
The chart, however, clearly shows that, upon the whole, 
nothing of the kind obtains and that the cold water, down to 
a temperature of 4° and less, which is found under the equa- 
tor at a depth of 1000 m,, flows into these parts from the 
Arctic Ocean, inasmuch as everywhere in the Atlantic 
Ocean, between 30° N. and 40° S. latitude, the tempera- 
ture of the water at the same depth and under the same 
meridian, becomes lower the farther we advance to the 
south. 

The steady rise of the temperature from the middle lati- 
tudes of the Southern Hemisphere to the equator, and from 
the equator to the middle latitudes of the Northern Hemis- 
phere, can be accounted for mainly by the corresponding 
increase in the distance from the fountain-head of cold 
water. 

I return to the high temperature (above 10'^) found at 
the depth of 1000 m. along the coasts of Portugal, Spain, 
and Morocco. The influence of the Gulf Stream and its 
branches offer no satisfactory explanation for this temper- 
ature, for even on the coasts of Florida, where it is most 
powerful, do the warm waters not descend to such depths. 
It seems to me that the warm water comes from the Med- 
iterranean Sea. Through the Strait of Gibraltar an upper 
current of less salt water passes from the Ocean into the 
Mediterranean, whilst an under current of salter water 
flows in an opposite direction. It is known, however, that 
the water of the Mediterranean, down to its bottom, is 
warmer than 12°. It is this warm water which produces 
the high temperature in the Atlantic Ocean at. medium 
depths in the vicinity of the Strait of Gibraltar. To the 
bottom its influence does not reach. Down there the 
water is much colder. 



256 



If my hypothesis as to the cause of the high temperature 
in medium depths be correct here, we must expect a high 
temperature to prevail also in the Indian Ocean in the 
vicinity of the Red Sea, for this sea, too, has much Salter 
water than the oceans, and its water is warm down to 
the lowest strata, so that in its southern part a tempera- 
ture of 21.4° has been found at its bottom, 1240 m. deep. 
And in fact, there does exist here an upper current 
from the Indian Ocean, and an under current from the 
Red Sea. 

The temperatures of the Indian Ocean are as fol- 
lows : 



Surface , 

366 Meters 

549 

914 
1280 
2012 
2*377 



Between Aden and 


Between 


the Khurian Murian 


Khurian Murian 


Islands. 


and Bombay. 


24.7 


23-9 


15-8 


16.6 


14. 1 


14. 


12.3 


10.5 


10.6 


7.8 


6.1 


5-1 


2.2 


3-3 



Thus no substantial difference exists down to the 
depth of over 500 m., but from that depth downward, 
the temperature is decidedly higher in the west, near 
the Red Sea. Such a high temperature at depths of 
about 1000 m. has been found here only and in the 
Atlantic Ocean in the proximity of the Mediterranean 
Sea, and it may safely be assumed that it is found no- 
where else. 

The principal current of the Atlantic Ocean is the equa- 
torial one, which moves from east to west under the action oi 
the trade-winds. Accordingly, it is somewhat stronger 
north than south of the equator, owing to the greater force 



257 

and regularity of the southern trade-winds. On striking 
the eastern part of South America, this current divides into 
two branches, to-wit: To the left, the Brazilian Current flow- 
ing along the coast of South America to about 45° south lat- 
itude, and to the right, the so-called Gulf Stream, flowing suc- 
cessively along the north coast of South America, through 
the Caribbean Sea, the Mexican Gulf and finally, in a north- 
erly direction, along the east coast of the United States. 
Until very recently it was the accepted opinion that all 
the warm water of the Atlantic Ocean follows this course ; 
but the investigations of Challenger established the exist- 
ence, to the east of the West Indies, of a large mass of 
warm water, which undoubtedly contributes to the aug- 
mentation of the warm waters flowing in middle latitudes, 
under the action of the west winds, towards the coasts of 
Europe. In the proximity of the latter, the southern part 
of this current is caused by the northwest winds predomi- 
nating at the northern limit of the trade-winds to flow, as 
"Rennelstream," along the coast of Africa, finally rejoin- 
ing the circuit of the Equatorial Current.' The northern 
part of the Gulf Stream is by the predominating south- 
west winds directed towards the coasts of Great Britain 
and Norway. 

This current, though slow, exerts, nevertheless, a great 
influence upon the climates of Western and Northern 
Europe, giving the latter a higher temperature of the year 
and, particularly, of the winter than is found anywhere else 
on the earth under the same latitudes. Hence, in Norway, 
for instance, the temperature of January remains above 
zero up to the Polar Circle, and no ice is to be found 
in the vicinity, and north of that country, up to 75° north 
latitude. 

North of the North American Continent there are two 



258 

polar currents. The Labrador Current, the more powerful 
of the two, passes through Davis Strait and flows along 
the coasts of Labrador and Newfoundland ; the other 
courses between Iceland and Greenland, though nearer to 
the latter. In the middle latitudes of the Southern Hemis- 
phere there is found a movement of water from the west, 
brought about by the action of the predominating west 
winds. In the vicinity of the Cape of Good Hope, this 
current joins another coming from the higher latitudes of 
the Southern Hemisphere, after which they flow united 
along the west coast of Africa, finally entering into the cir- 
cuit of the Equatorial Current. 

The temperatures of the water's surface vary but little 
in the course of the year, much less, at all events, than the 
air-temperatures, so that north of the equator up to 35° 
north latitude near the American Continent, and up to 
about 45° north latitude in the eastern parts of the 
ocean, the difference between the coldest and the warm- 
est months amounts to no more than 5°. On the 
Southern Hemisphere the difference is everywhere less 
than 5°. 

Regarding the temperature of the surface of the water, 
the following points are to be noted as of chief interest : 
In lower latitudes, to wit, between 40° north and 40° south 
latitude, the temperature is, upon the whole, lower in the 
east than in the west of the ocean, which is to say, that the 
latter is colder near the coasts of Europe and Africa than 
near those of North and South America. Thus, a temper- 
ature of more than 26° is found along the coast of South 
America to 15° south latitude, but along the coasts of Afri- 
ca, only to 8° south latitude. The same temperature 
reaches in the neighborhood of Florida as far as 30° north 
latitude, and in the eastern part of the ocean no farther 



259 

than 113^° north latitude. A temperature of 22°, which is 
found near the coasts of Brazil as far as 28° south lati- 
tude, extends near St. Helena only to 15° south latitude. 
The cause of this difference lies in the different tempera- 
tures of the currents flowing, respectively, towards the east- 
ern and western parts of the ocean in these latitudes, the 
latter receiving warm currents, and the former cool ones. 
Under about 40° latitude the course of the isotherms 
changes, the temperature decreasing rapidly in the western 
part of the ocean, so that no higher than 45° north latitude, 
it is much lower on the American than on the European 
coasts. The isotherms extend fan-like from west to east ; a 
temperature of 24°, for instance, is found in the western 
part of the ocean under 31%° north latitude, and in the 
eastern part, under 17° north latitude; a temperature of 4°, 
which prevails in the western part under 47^° north lati- 
tude, is found in the eastern part under 70° north latitude ; 
the decrease in the temperature is, therefore, equal to 
1.2° per degree of latitude in the western part of the 
ocean, and to .38° in the eastern part. On the Southern 
Hemisphere, the temperature of the surface is, in the main, 
lower than on the Northern, the difference increasing with 
the latitude. Under 10° south latitude we find a tempera- 
ture of about 24° in the eastern part, and somewhat more 
than 26° in the western part of the ocean, whereas under 
10° north latitude it is everywhere above 26° ; under 30° 
south latitude the temperature is about 18° in the eastern 
part, and slightly above 20° in the western part; under 
30° north latitude, on the other hand, less than 20° is 
found only on a limited area in the neighborhood of the 
Canary Islands, whilst throughout the western half of 
the ocean the temperature exceeds 22°, and on the coasts 
of Florida it is even higher than 26°. Under 50° south 



26o 

latitude, a temperature of about 4° prevails in the eastern 
part of the ocean, and only west of 30° west longitude 
does it rise above 6°, but nowhere above 7° ; but under 
50° north latitude, the temperature in the eastern part of the 
ocean is everywhere higher than 12°, less than 6° being 
found only between 46^^° west longitude and the Ameri- 
can coasts. 

The following table exhibits the mean temperatures as 
computed by me after the Atlas of the Atlantic Ocean, 
from five to fifty-five degrees of latitude : 



Degree of Latitude 


North. Hemisphere. 


South. Hemisphere. 


Difference. 


55 


7-7 






50 


10.3 


55 


4.8 


45 


12.9 


9.8 


31 


40 


17.1 


13.2 


3-9 


35 


19.7 


16.9 


2.8 


30 


22.9 


19.4 


3-5 


25 


24.7 


20.7 


4.0 


20 


25-3 


22.7 


2.6 


15 


25.8 


23-5 


2.3 


10 


26.7 


24.7 


2.0 


5 


27.4 


25.8 


1.6 





26.0 







This table shows that not only is the Northern Hemi- 
sphere warmer under the same latitudes, but that 5° north 
latitude has a higher temperature than the equator. Lat- 
itude 5° north may be regarded as the meteorological equa- 
tor of the Atlantic Ocean. Here is found the highest tem- 
perature in the annual mean, as also the region of calms 
and of variable winds between the two trade-winds. This 
location of the meteorological equator explains, further- 
more, the high temperature of the surface of the water 
on the Northern Hemisphere. The southeast trade-wind, 
which blows over a wider area than that from the north- 
east, puts in motion larger quantities of water, carrying part 



26l 

thereof to the Northern Hemisphere. From 35° north 
latitude northward, the North Atlantic is considerably nar- 
rower than the South Atlantic. Between 0° and 35° latitude, 
both north and south, the width of the ocean is nearly equal, 
so that a larger quantity of warm water is brought into 
the smaller space of the ocean in middle north latitudes. 
Moreover, the deflection of the wind from the normal to 
the isobare is greater in the region of the north-east trade- 
wind than in that of the south-east one, because of the 
greater distance of the former from the equator. The 
middle of the north-east trade-wind in the Atlantic Ocean 
may be assumed to have its location between 17° and 18° 
north latitude, and that of the south-east trade-wind be- 
tween 10° and 12° south latitude. In the region of the 
trade-winds the friction-coefficient is very small, viz., 
about .0002, and the deflection from the normal to the iso- 
bares must, therefore, be as follows : Under io°=52.7°, 
under i5°=62.i°, under 20°=68.2°, so that the deflec- 
tion in the region of the north-east trade-wind is 
greater by about 10° than in that of the south-east trade- 
wind. 

The north-east trade-wind crosses the equator only 
during the period from February to April, and this only in 
the western part of the ocean ; but the south-east trade- 
wind passes to the other side of the equator in every 
month of the year, advancing to 6° north latitude. This 
smaller deflection from the normal to the isobare ex- 
plains in itself the greater force of the south-east trade- 
wind, but in addition to this, the southern region of the 
trade-wind is broader, and the south-east trade-wind 
more regular. On an extensive area of the sea near 
the Island of Ascension, no other wind ever occurs than 
south-east, whilst other than north-east winds occasionally 



262 

blaw everywhere in the region of the north-east trade- 
wind. 

In the middle region of the trade-winds, the mean direc- 
tion of the wind is no abstraction, because of the magnitude 
of the results. 





Degree of Long. 


June to Aug. 


Dec. to Feb. 


Degree of Lat. 


Mean Wind- 
direction. 


R. 


Mean Wind 
direction. 


R. 




4.=;-SO 


N. 60 E. 
N. 55 E. 
S. 49 E. 
S. 62 E. 
S. 43 E. 
S. 47 E. 
S. 48 E. 
S. 26 E. 


77 
90 

5 
70 
92 
96 
92 
84 


N. 64 E. 
N. 49 E. 
N. 65 E. 
N. 87 E. 
S. 35 E. 
S. 45 E- 
S. 84 E. 
S. 35 E. 


71 




w 


86 


c-in N "1 


•lO-'^S 


30 


r>- c N 1 


w 


69 


O- c S 


20-25 W 


89 


c-Tn m 


15-20 


96 


5 ^°^ I 


w 


q8 




0-12^ Ew 


q6 









From the extent of the results (R), as set forth in this 
table, it is evident that the S. E. trade-wind blows with 
greater regularity than the N. E. one. The former reaches 
in our summer far, beyond the equator, and has decided 
sway between 0° and 5° north latitude. 

Middle polar limits of the N. E. trade-wind. 



Degree ofW. 


Jan. -March. ' 


Apr.-June. 


July-Sept. 


Oct.-Dec. 


Long. 


Degr. N. 


Degr. N. 


Degr. N. 


Degr. N. 


65 


26>^ 


28 


27 


26 


60 


25 


24>^ 


27 


24 


55 


23/2 


23 


26>^ 


23>^ 


50 


23 


25 


26 


22 


45 


24>^ 


27 


26^4 


22}4 


40 


26 


28 


27K 


24'A 


35 


26K 


28 


27>^ 


2^yz 


30 


25;^ 


28 


28>^ 


26>^ 


25 


25>4 


28;^ 


3^ . 


26K 


20 


28;^ 


32 


31'A 


29% 


17 


30 


33 


32/2 


31 



263 

Middle interior (equatorial) limits of the two trade- 
winds. 

Degree of West Longitude. 





40 


35 


30 


25 


20 


17 


Jan.-Feb. {g'!" 


3N. 

I 




20N. 
I 


4^2 N. 
2 


3 


8N. 


Mar.-Apr. { ^- |- 


rS. 





iS. 


^^ 


5 


6 

I 


May-June. {^; 1; 


3XN. 


3N. 




3>^N. 
' 2 


5>^ 
3 


8K 
3>4 


X 
X 


July-Aug.{N-E. 


4 


9 

4 


10 

3 


12 
3 


14 

3 


X 
X 


Sept.-Oct. 1 g • |- 


6 


12 

4 


11;^ 
2 


II 
2 


12 



X 
X 


Nov.-Dec.{N|- 


6 


6 
4 


6 

3>^ 


6>^ 
3K 


9K 
4 


X 
X 



X The interior limits lie from May till November on the Continent of Africa. 

Middle polar (south) limits of south-east trade-wind. 



Deg. Long. 


January-March. 


April-June. 


July-September. 


Oct.-Dec. 




Degrees S. 


Degrees S. 


Degrees S. 


Degrees S. 


30 W. 


19 


2I>^ 


20>^ 


i(>% 


25 w. 


21 


■^lYz 


22>^ 


i8>^ 


20 w. 


24 


24 


24 


20% 


15 w. 


26>^ 


25 


24>^ 


21 


10 W. 


28 


25 


^VA 


22>^ 


5 W. 


29 


27 


2?,y2 


28 


E. 


30 


28;^ 


29K 


2S% 


5 E. 


3i>^ 


32 ^ 


29X 


29 


10 E. 


32;^ 


zVA 


zoY 


30 


15 E. 


33 









The region between the interior limits of the trade-winds 
or, in other words, the region of variable winds and calms 
near the equator, is, upon the whole, wider in the eastern 
than in the western part of the ocean, and from July till 
September, than from January till March. Under 35° 
west longitude it extends in March over no more than i%°, 
whereas under 20° west longitude it has in July a width of 



264 

io°. A region of predominating west winds is found In 
our summer between the two trade-winds, west of Africa. 
This explains the great extent to which the interior Hmits 
recede from one another in that season. 

North of the north-east trade-wind a rather extensive 
belt exists with predominating north winds which, however, 
are not sufficiently regular to be designated as trade- 
winds. This region is particularly developed near the 
coasts of Europe and Africa. In summer, the winds are 
here north-west, owing to the low atmospheric pressure in 
the interior of the African Continent, and to the high pres- 
sure in the vicinity of the Azores. 

In the western part of the ocean the summer winds are 
south-east, because of the low atmospheric pressure in the 
interior of North America. 

South of the region of the south-east trade-wind, are also 
south winds prevalent but these, too, have no more the 
regularity of trade-winds. 

From the maps of the atmospheric pressure it may be 
seen that the latter is highest at the polar limit of the 
trade-winds, and that it diminishes from there both to the 
north and to the south. This high atmospheric pressure 
in middle latitudes is the normal distribution on the oceans, 
but it is partly modified by the influence of the conti- 
nents. A comparison of the maps for January and July 
shows that during the summer of either hemisphere this 
region of high atmospheric pressure approaches the poles, 
and during the winter, the equator. This is evident, also, 
from the polar limits of the trade-winds, especially in the 
eastern part of the ocean. In the annual mean, the highest 
atmospheric pressure is found near the Azores. This high 
atmospheric pressure requires no special explanation for 
the winter season, when it is the common feature of the 



265 

whole section lying between 30° and 40° north latitude. In 
summer, however, it is accounted for by the temperature 
being- lower here than on the African Continent, whereby 
the air in great heights is caused to flow off from Africa to 
the Azores. On the Southern Hemisphere, the continents, 
(with the exception of South America, the conditions ol 
which have already been referred to as peculiar to itself), are 
so little expanded as to render impossible such a consider- 
able heating, and such a flow of air in great heights from 
the interior of the continents to the oceans, as found on the 
Northern Hemisphere. For this reason we find nowhere 
on the South Atlantic Ocean, neither in the annual mean 
nor, more especially, in summer, so high an atmospheric 
pressure as near the Azores. 

Our knowledge of the climates of the tropical portions 
of the Atlantic Ocean has been greatly advanced through 
two publications of the London " Meteorological Office." 
(Meteorology of square 3 (o°-io° N.) and "Chart of Me- 
teorological Data for Nine Ten-degree Squares"). These 
detailed communications have, in the main, confirmed the 
hypotheses brought forward by me in 1872, while at the 
same time throwing much new light upon the conditions 
under consideration. More especially do these investiga- 
tions establish the fact that 5° north latitude is the real me- 
teorological equator of the Ocean. South thereof we 
already find the heaviest cloudiness in the summer of the 
Southern Hemisphere ; as, for instance. 



Latitude. 


Largest Cloudiness. 


Smallest Cloudiness. 


o°-s°N 


66 (January). 
68 (July). 


43 (August). 

44 (April). 


5°-io° N 





The air-temperature between 0° and 5° north latitude is 



266 

also higher from December till March (highest, 26.19°, Irt 
March), although it is in these very months that the cloudi- 
ness is heavier, and the rains more frequent and copious, 
whilst July and August, when rains are rare and the cloud- 
iness light, have, nevertheless, a lower temperature, to 
wit : 25° in August. 

In 1 880 appeared Koeppen and Sprung's important work 
on the rain-conditions of the Atlantic Ocean. It is worked 
out on the basis of observations of German and Dutch ves- 
sels, elaborated at the "Deutsche Seewarte." It con- 
tains, however, an elaboration not only of the observations 
of the tropical, but also of the extra-tropical latitudes of 
the Atlantic Ocean. It is based, throughout, on rain-prob- 
abilities. On the ocean we must content ourselves with 
this, because of the absolute lack of rain-measurements. 
This much is certain, that a rainy day yields more water 
near the equator than in middle latitudes. Still smaller, no 
doubt, is the quantity of rain falling on a rainy day in the 
region of the trade-winds. While rains are not exactly rare 
in some parts of this region, they are, at all events, of brief 
duration and scant in quantity. It is to be hoped that, ere 
long, we may obtain through naval observations information 
regarding the number of rain-hours, which will convey a 
clearer conception of the phenomena than the number of 
rainy days. 

Between 15° north and 5° south latitude abundant rain- 
falls occur on the Atlantic Ocean during and after the tran- 
sit of the sun through the zenith of the respective local- 
ities. Between 0° and 5° north latitude, the rainy season 
occurs, as already observed, in the winter and spring of the 
Northern Hemisphere, and between 5° and 15°, in the 
summer and autumn thereof. The rain-probability is as 
follows : 



267 



Latitude. 


Jan. 


Feb. 


Mar. 


April 


May 


June 


July 

65 
18 


Aug. 

60 
12 


Sept. 


Oct. 


Nov. 


Dec. 


5°-i5° N. 
5° N.-5° S. 


19 
52 


9 

62 


14 
62 


2 
70 


28 
62 


50 

42 


54 
24 


63 
32 


44 
32 


34 
46 



The region between 15° and 20° north latitude is marked 
by a great deficiency of rains, which is owing to the great 
regularity of the trade-wind prevailing there. From Feb- 
ruary to June scarcely any rain is precipitated here, most of 
the rain falling in August, September, and at the beginning 
of winter. 

North of 20° north latitude, autumn and winter rains pre- 
dominate everywhere, whilst the summer months, are upon 
the whole, dryer. Between 20° and 40° north latitude, the 
winter is altogether moderately rainy, whilst the summer is 
dry. North of 40° north latitude, rains are frequent in 
every month, and in winter and autumn, three of every four, 
aye, four of every five days, are rainy. On the Southern 
Hemisphere between 5° and 50° south latitude, there is also 
more rain in the colder than in the warmer months. Be- 
tween 40° and 50° south latitude a greater difference be- 
tween the seasons is recognizable than between 20° and 40° 
south latitude, which is the very opposite of what is observed 
in corresponding latitudes of the Northern Hemisphere. A 
still greater difference between the two hemispheres is ex- 
hibited between latitudes 5° and 20°, inasmuch as the sum- 
mer is the driest season between 5° and 30° south. This 
probably arises from the almost exclusive sway of the trade- 
wind even in summer, that wind being on the high sea a 
decidedly dry wind. The somewhat frequent rains in the 
colder months may possibly find their explanation in the 
fact that at that time the air is colder than the surface of 
the sea, which naturally facilitates condensation. 

The rain-probability is here as follows : 



268 



Degrees of 
Latitude. 


Degrees of 
Longitude W. 


Rainiest Months. 
February, 48 


Driest Months. 


20 — 40 N. 1 


10—30 


June, 


10 


30—50 


December, 


52 


August, 


17 






f November, 
lOct., Dec, 


53 


August, 


20 




30—50 


50 


July. 


27 


40—55 N. 


0—30 


r January', 
1 December, 


77 
73 


June, 
August, 


37 
45 


40—50 N. 




j March, 


83 


September, 


46 


30 — 50 


t February, 


80 


August, July, 


56 


5—20 S. 


0—30 


1 April, 

1 September, 


43 
37 


December, 
January, 


20 
22 


20 — 40 S. 




/April, 
1 October, 


56 


January, 


35 


— 50 


56 


February, 


37 


40—50 s. 


30—50 


f June, 

t November, 


90 
71 


February, 
March, 


27 

33 



The English observations are prepared after a different 
plan. They present the frequency of rains in per cent, of 
the number of observations, and not of the number of days, 
so that, under otherwise equal conditions, the figures ar- 
rived at by them must be much less than those yielded by 
the customary method of computation. 

From the following table (Page 270) it may be seen that 
in the immediate vicinity of the equator the rainy season 
continues for six months, and, furthermore, that no rain 
whatever has been observed there during the three months, 
June, July, August. The actual conditions, therefore, are 
completely at variance with the current notions concern- 
ing the rains in these latitudes in all the months of the 
year. Already between 4° and 5° north latitude, but 
more especially south of 4°, the type of the Southern Hem- 
isphere predominates, i. e., the months from January till 
March are the rainiest of the year, whilst during the sum- 
mer of the Northern Hemisphere the rains are exceedingly 
limited. The section from 4° to 7° north latitude is a region 
of transition, where the rainy season is divided into two 



269 

periods, one of which extends from July till August, the 
other, from October till November. 

Hitherto I have considered the rain-probability. For 
some islands of the ocean, however, we have also rain- 
measurements, the most interesting of which are those on 
small islands, because of the strictly oceanic character of 
their conditions. On the Island of St. Helena the rain quan- 
tities are very small, amounting to only 13 cm. on the sea- 
shore, and are rather unevenly distributed over the months ; 
whilst at Longwood, at an elevation of more than 500 m., 
the rainfalls equal 105 cm. On the Island of Ascension, 
under 8° south latitude, the annual rainfall does not exceed 
8 cm., the greater part of which is precipitated in April and 
July. These observations confirm my opinion as to the 
great rain-deficiency of those regions of the Ocean where 
the trade-winds blow with great constancy. On the Island 
of St. Thomas, near the African coast, under yi° north lat- 
itude, the annual rainfall amounts to 107 cm.; but July has 
no rain whatever, and the four months from June till Sep- 
tember, have but four per cent, of the annual fall, which 
shows that here, virtually under the equator, the rainy 
and the dry season are distinctly separate from one an- 
other. 

Altogether, it must be remarked with regard to the rain 
conditions of the "Atlantic Ocean, and especially of the 
tropics : i . These conditions are more complicated than 
has generally been assumed ; 2. The rain periods of the 
Ocean are, in part, essentially different from those of the 
contiguous continents; 3. Many observations must yet be 
made before our knowledge of the conditions will be some- 
what adequate. 



270 



o 0) 

T3 



10 — 9 N. 
9-8 

8-7 
7-6 
6-5 
5—4 

4—3 

3—2 
2 — I 
I — o 



Rainy Months. ; Dry Months. 
(More^than^2oper^Lessthan5p.c.) 



July till October. 
June till October, 
fjune, July, Au- \ 
\gust, Oct.,Nov. J 
/June, July,Oct.,\ 
1 Nov. j 

/ May,June,Oct., \ 
I Nov. J 

f Jan.,May,June I 
\ Oct., Nov. j 
f Jan.,Feb.,Ap'l, \ 
1 May. i 

January till May. 
Jan., Feb. 
No month. 



Jan. till May. 
Jan. till May. 

Feb. till April. 
Feb. till April, 
February. 
August. 

August. 

July till Sept. 
June till Nov. 
June till Nov. 



Rainiest Months. 



August, 27 

July and Aug., 28 

July, 31 

June, 31 

June and Oct., 26 
May, 30 

January, 32 

Feb., Mar., 26 
January, 25 

January, 19 



Driest Months. 



Feb. till Apl, o 
Jan. till Ap'l,o 

Feb. till Mar., o 
Mar., April, i 
February, 3 
August, 2 

August, ^ 

August, ^ 
September, o 
June till Aug. o 



Explanatory Note. ^Throughout this translation, the centigrade ther- 
mometer and metric measures have been used. The abreviations are : km. — 
kilometer, m. — meter, cm.^centimeter, mm. — milometer. In the principal 
work the temperatures are quoted according to the Fahrenheit scale. 

S. K. 



INDEX. 



PAGE 

Absence from home, friends, etc.. ..20 

Absolute humidity of the air 11 

Acclimatization 157 

Adirondack Mountains,... 88, 141, 162 
Advantages of American health 

resorts 22 

Aguascalientes, Mex 172 

Aiken, S. C 147, 164 

Air, Clearness of the 159 

Air, Composition of the 11 

Air currents 14 

Air, Diathermancy of the 159 

Air, Dryness of the 159 

Air, Humidity of the 11 

Air, Impurities of the 11 

Air pressure 12 

Air, Purity of the 159 

Air, Rarity of the 160 

Alaska 14, 56, iii, 139, 199 

Albany, N. Y 123 

Albuquerque, N. Mex 98 

Alder Creek, N. Y 89 

Aleutian Islands 117, 197 

Alexandria Bay, N. Y 69, 121 

Alkaline mineral waters 129, 169 

Allegheny Mountains 90, 141, 162 

Allegheny Springs, Va 132 

Alpena, Mich 73 

Alpena Well, Mich 131 

Altitude of immunity from phthisis i6r 

Alton, 111 125 

Altoona, Pa 93 

Amazon River, S. A ; 235 

American climate 14 

American Hay Fever Association 167 

American people as travelers 9 

(37 



PAGE 

Amityville, N. Y 41 

Ammonia and its compounds 11 

Anaemia 16S 

Andes, N. Y 90 

Andes, S. A 238 

Andros, Bahamas 107 

Anglesea, N. J 46 

Animal emanations (nature of 

ptomaines) 16 

Annapolis, N. S 103, 138 

Annisquam, Mass 30 

Anti-cyclones 177 

Antigua, West Indies 107 

Apostle Island 76 

Appalachicola, Fla 149 

Appledore Islands 28 

Appleton, Wis 79 

Arctic Zone 174 

Argentine Republic, S. A 244 

Artificial climate 16 

Asbury Park, N. J 43, 141 

Asheville, N. C , 94, 141, 162 

Ashland, Wis 76, 120, 142 

Asthma 166 

Astoria, Ore 54, 126, 144 

Atlanta, Ga 95 

Atlantic City, N. J 45, 141, 148 

Atlantic Highland, Climate of. 15, 209 

Atlantic Ocean • 250 

Atlantic Ocean, Climate of. 251 

Atlantic Ocean, Currents of. 256 

Atlantic Ocean, Rainfall of 266 

Atlantic Ocean, Temperature of... ..251 

Atlantic sea-board 140, 212 

Atmospheric electricity 12, 160 

Atmospheric micro-organisms... 11, 19 
I) 



2/2 



PAGE 

Atmosplieric pressure in Arctic 

Zone J 174 

Atmospheric temperature 13, 159 

Atwoods Key, Bahamas 107 

Auburn, N. Y 65 

Augusta, Ga 147 

Au Sable, Mich 73 

Austin, Tex 150 

Au Train, Mich 76, 142 

Avon Springs, N. Y 131 

Babylon, N. Y 40 

Bacteria, Atmospheric 11, 16 

Bahama Islands 107 

Baldwin, N. Y 60 

Ballston Spa, N. Y 130, 142 

Baranoff Island, Alaska 56 

Barbadoes, West Indies. ..107, iii, 232 

Bar Harbor, Me 25, 140 

Barnegat, N. J , , 45 

Bamegat City, N. J 45 

Barometric pressure 12 

Barstow, Fla 149 

Bath, Me T40 

Bathsheba, West Indies ili 

Baton Rouge, La 125 

Bay City, Mich 73, 120 

Bayfield, Wis 76, 120 

Bay Head, N. J 44 

Bayou Sara, La 125 

Bayport. N. J 40 

Bay Ridge, Md 47 

Bayshore, N. Y 40 

Bayville, N. J 45 

Bay View, Mich 74 

Beach Haven, N.J 45 

Bear Island 178 

Beaumaris, Out 139 

Bedford Alum Springs, Va.. 132 

Bedford Springs, Pa 92, 132 

Bellport, N. Y 40 

Berkeley, X. 1 44 

Berkely Springs, W. Y'a 132 

Berkshire Hills, Mass 87, 140 

Bermuda Islands 105 

Bethlehem, N. H 85, 167 



PAGE 

Bethlehem, Pa ; 90 

Beverly, Mass 31 

Biddeford, Me 27 

Big Bone Springs, Ky 131 

Big Indian, N. Y 90 

Bird Island, Sandwich Islands 118 

Bladon Springs, Ala 130 

Block Island, R. 1 35, 140, 165 

Blue Ridge Mountains 90 

Bluffs, N. Y 70 

Bogota, S. A 173 

Bolivia, S. A 242 

Bolton, N. Y 60 

Bonds, N. J 45 

Boonville, N. Y 89 

Borax Springs, Cal 130 

Bracebridge, Ont 139 

Brain fag 167 

Branford, Comi 37 

Brazil, S. A 236 

Bridal Veil Falls, Minn 79 

Bridgeport, Conn 37 

Bridgeton Centre, Me ...59 

Bridgetown, West Indies 11 1, 148, 164 

Brielle, N. J 44 

Bright's disease 168 

Brighton, N. J 44 

Brighton Beach, N. Y. 41 

British Columbia 139 

British Maritime Provinces loi, 138 

Brown's Mills, N.J 147 

Brownsville, Pa 126 

Brule River, Wis 77 

Brunswick, Ga 49, 1 48 

Buen Ayre, West Indies 107 

Buffalo, N. Y 71, 119, 215 

Buffalo Springs, Va 130 

Burlington, Iowa 125 

Burlington, Vt 60 

Butterworth Springs, Mich 132 

Cairo, 111 125, 126 

Cairo, N. Y 89, Mi 

Calcic mineral waters. 132 

Caldwell, N. Y 60, 89 

California, Climate of 19B 



273 



PAGE 

Calistoga Hot Springs, Cal 134 

Camden, S. C 147 

Campobello Island 102 

Canandaigua, N. Y 67 

Canton, N. Y 89 

Cape Breton Island, N. S 103 

Cape Cod, Mass 33 

Cape Elizabeth, Me 27 

Cape Girardeau, Mo 125 

Cape May, N. J 46, 141, 148 

Cape Maj' Point, N. J- 46 

Cape Traverse, Can 104 

Cape Vincent, N. Y 69 

Capon Springs, W. Va 129 

Carbonic Acid 11 

Carlisle, Pa 92 

Carlisle Springs, Pa 131 

Carson City, Nev 81 

Carthage, N. Y 89 

Cascades, W. Ty 126 

Casco Bay, Me 26, 140 

Catarrhal affections of the respira- 
tory organs 165 

Catskill, N. Y 89, 123, 141 

Catskill Mountains 89, 141 

Causes of rainfall 12 

Cedar Keys, Fla 50, 149 

Central America 14, 105, 227 

Centre Harbor, N. H 59 

Chadwicks, N. J 44 

Chalybeate mineral waters 131, 168 

Change of climate at an early stage 

of the disease 21 

Change of scene 100 

Charleston, S. C 48, 105, 148 

Charlevoix, Mich 74, 142 

Charlotte, N. Y 70 

Charlotte Amalie, West Indies no 

Charlottetown, Can 104, 138 

Chateaugay, N. Y 89 

Chautauqua, N. Y 68 

Cheboygan, Mich 73 

Chelsea Beach, Mass 32 

Chesapeake Bay 141 

Chihuahua, Mex 173 



PAGE 

Chicago, 111 120 

Chinook-winds 217 

Chilcat Inlets 115 

Chili, S. A 240 

Christiansted, West Indies no 

Cincinnati, 126 

City of Mexico 172 

Clarendon Springs, Vt 132 

Clarksville, Ga 95 

Clatsop Beach, Ore 54, 144 

Clay Soil 12 

Clayton, N. Y 69, 121 

Cleveland,© 71, 120, 215 

Clifton Beach, Mass 32 

Clifton Springs, N. Y 131. 142 

Climate, Artificial 16 

Climate as a remedy 17 

Climate, Cold and moderately dry..i64 

Climate,- Definitions of. 10 

Climate, Effects upon the organism.. 155 

Climate, Elements of. 10 

Climate, Mild and moderately dry.. 163 

Climate, Mild and moist 164 

Climate, Modifying influences of 13 

Climate of California 198 

Climate of high altitudes 83, 159 

Climate of islands and sea-shore. 13, 164 

Climate of South America 14, 232 

Climate of Southern California, 

151, 200 

Climate of Texas 150, 211, 217 

Climate of the Atlantic High- 
lands 15, 209 

Climate of the High North 174 

Climate of the Middle latitudes 

of North America 195 

Climate of the Mississippi Val- 
ley 15, 205 

Climate of the Pacific coast 15, 197 

Climate of the Pacific Highlands, 

15, 202 

Climate of the Western Continent..i4 

Clinnte of Tropical America 227 

Climate, Requisites of. 169 

Climate, Warm and dry 163 



274 



PAGE 

Climatic prescriptions 20, 156 

Climatic resources of the United 

States 14 

Climatology 9 

Clinton, Iowa 125 

Clothing 20 

Cloudland, N. C 95 

Cobourg, Ont 120 

Coeur d'Alene City, Id. Ty 80 

Cohasset, Mass 33 

Cold Spring, N. Y 38 

Collingwood, Ont 120 

Colorado Springs, Col 97, 143, 162 

Columbia River 126 

Columbus, Ky 125 

Como, N. J 44 

Coney Island, N. Y 41 

Congenial company 21 

Congress Springs, Cal 130 

Contamination of air from the 

ground 12 

Cooper's Well, Miss 132 

Cooperstown, N. Y 63 

Cordoba, Mex 171 

Cornwell, N. Y 124 

Coronado Beach, Cal.. .52, 144, 154, 163 

Corpus Christi, Tex 51, 150 

Coulton, Cal 153 

Crab-orchard Springs, Ky 132 

Cresson, Pa 93, 141 

Crooked Island, Bahamas 107 

Cuba, West Indies 107. 232 

Cuisine 20 

Curacoa, West Indies 107 

Cushing Island, Me 27 

Cuzco, S. A 173 

Cyclones 177 

Dalles, Ore 126, 143 

Dalles City, Ore 143 

Davenport, Iowa 125 

Davos, Switz 161 

Daytona, Fla 50, 149 

Deal, N. J 43 

Debility 168 

Deer Park, Md 94 



PAGE 

De Funiak Springs, Fla 150 

DeKalb Junction, N. Y 89 

Delaware Water Gap, Pa 90, 141 

Denver, Col 96, 151, 162, 207 

Desire for longevity 17 

Detroit, Mich 72, 120, 215 

Devereaux, N. Y 89 

Digby, N. S 103 

Dingman's Ferry, Pa 91 

Distribution of precipitation over 

the United States ,226 

Dominica, West Indies no 

Donaldsonville, La 125 

Doty's Island, Wis 78 

Doubling Gap Springs, Pa 92 

Douglas Island, Alaska 56, 114 

Dry Season of the Pacific slope 15 

Dubuque, Iowa 125 

Duluth, Minn 79, 119 

Dunkirk, N. Y 71, 120 

Dunleith, 111 125 

Dunmore Town, Bahamas 108 

Dutch West Indies 107 

Eagle Harbor, Mich 120 

Eagle Pass, Tex 172 

Eagle's Mere, Pa 92 

Eagle Waters, Wis 77 

East Moriches, N. Y 40 

Easton, Pa 90 

Eastport, Me 25, 140, 165 

Eaton-Rapids Well, Mich 132 

Ebensburg, Pa 93 

Edgartown, Mass 34 

Effect of mental conditions 22 

Effect of residence in a suitable 

climate 19 

Elberon, N. J 43 

Electricity of the air 12, 160 

Electricity of the earth and clouds 12 

Elements of climate 10 

Eleuthera, Bahamas 107 

Elizabethtown, N. Y 89, 141 

Elk Rapids, Mich ,.74 

El Paso, Tex 151, 172 

Enterprise, Fla 149 



275 



PAGE 

Equatorial current t, Influences of 14 

Erie, Pa 71, 120 

Esquimault, B. C 56 

Estill Springs, Ky 132 

Eureka Springs, Ark 97 

European health stations 18, 22 

Evanston, 111 75 

Excitements of fashionable resorts.. 20 

Fairbault, Minn 146 

Fairfield, Conn 37 

Fairhaven, N. Y 70 

Fairplay, Col 96 

Falls of St. Anthony, Minn 79 

Favorable mental impressions 21 

Fernandina, Fla 49, 148, 164 

Fire Island, N. Y 41 

Fishkill Landing, N. Y 124 

Florida 233 

Florida, Resorts of 148, 164 

Fohns 194, 217, 220 

Fond du Lac, Wis 78 

Forks, Pa 91 

Fort de France, West Indies no 

Fort George Island 49 

Fort Mackinac, Mich 214 

Fort Ticonderoga, N. Y 60 

Fort Tongas, Alaska 56, 112 

Fort William, Ont 77, 120 

Fort Wrangell, Alaska 56, 113 

Francis-Joseph Land 177 

Franconia Mountains, N. H 86 

Franklin, Pa 126 

Frederickstadt, West Indies no 

Freeport, N. Y 41 

French Lick Springs, Ind 131 

Frontenac, Minn 146 

Fruit Port Well, Mich 130 

Fulton, III 125 

Gainesville, Fla 150 

Galena, 111 125 

Galveston, Tex 51, 150, 218 

Garden of the Gods, Col 97 

Garfield Beach, U. Ty 82, 143 

Garrison, N. Y 124 

Guatemala, C. A 230 



PAGE 

Geneva, N. Y 66 

Georgetown, Can 104 

Georgian Bay 73, 120, 142 

Gettysburg Springs, Pa 132 

Glenbeulah, Wis 78 

Glen Cove, N. Y 38 

Glendale, N. Y 89 

Glen Eyrie, Col 97 

Glen Falls, N. Y 123 

Glen Haven, N. Y 65 

Gloucester, Mass 30, 140 

Gloversville, N. Y 89 

Gorham, N. H 85, 140 

Gouverneur, N. Y 89, 215 

Grand Bahama, Bahamas 107 

Grand Haven, Mich 75, 142 

Grand Manan Island ..102 

Grand Pr^, N. S. 103 

Grand Rapids, Mich 214 

Gray's Harbor, W. Ty 154 

Grayson Springs, Ky 131 

Grayson Sulphur Springs, Va 130 

Great Abaco, Bahamas 107 

Great Barrington, Mass 87, 140 

Great Exuma, Bahamas 107 

Great Inagua, Bahamas 107 

Great Lakes 69, 119, 142, 213 

Great Salt Lake, U. Ty 82 

Great Shoshone Falls, Id. Ty...8o, 143 

Greater Antilles 107, 108 

Green Bay, Wis 75, 142 

Greenbrier White Sulphur Springs, 

W. Va 131 

Green-cove Springs, Fla 131 

Greenland 189 

Green Mountains, Vt 86, 140, 162 

Greenport, N. Y 38 

Greenville, Me 58 

Greenville, S. C 95 

Greenwich, Conn 37 

GrinnellLand 189 

Grosse He, Mich 72 

Guadalajara, Mex 172 

Guadaloupe, West Indies 107 

Guanajuato, Mex 172 



2/6 



PAGE 

Guiana, S. A 234 

Guilford, Conn 36 

Gulf of Mexico 51, 218 

Guyer Hot Springs, Id. Ty 143 

Hague, N. Y 60 

Haines' Corners, N. Y 89 

Halifax, N. S 103, 138 

Hamilton, Bermudas 106, 148 

Hamilton, Ont 69, 120, 142 

Hammondsport, N. Y 67 , 

Hampton Beach, N. H 29, 140, 165 

Hancock, Mich 76, 120 

Hannibal, Mo 125 

Harbor Point. Mich 74 

Harbor Springs, Mich 74 

Harrisburg, Pa 92 

Harrison, Me 59 

Harrisonville, N. Y 89 

Hastings, Minn 125 

Hastings, West Indies iii 

Havana, Cuba 108, 148, 164, 230 

Hawaii, Sandwich Islands 117 

Hay Fever 166 

Hayti, West Indies 107, 232 

Health resorts, Desirable char- 
acteristics of 20 

Health Springs, Va 133 

Helena, Ark 125 

Henderson Harbor, N. Y 70, 142 

Hepatic disorders 169 

High North, Climate of. 174 

Highland Park, 111 75, 142 

Highlands, N. J 42 

Hilo, Sandwich Islands 119 

Holly City Beach, N. J 46 

Home-sickness 21 

Honduras, C. A 230 

Honolulu, Sandwich Islands.... 1 18, 164 

Hope, Idaho Ty 80 

Hot Springs, Ark 97, 134 

Hot Springs, N. C 95 

Hot Springs, Va 133 

Houghton, Mich 76, 120 

Hudson, N. Y 123 

Hudson River 122, 142, 226 



PAGE 

Huguenot Springs, Va 130 

Humidity, Absolute 11 

Humidity of the air 11 

Humidity, Relative 11 

Hunter, N. Y 89 

Hyannis, Mass 33 

Hyde Park, N. V 123 

Iceland 176 

Idaho Hot Springs, C0I.96, 133, 143, 162 

Ideal climate 157 

Ilwaco, W. Ty 54, 144 

Importance of climatology to the 

physician 17 

Impurities of the air 11 

Impurity of the atmosphere of 

dwellings 16 

Inconveniences of traveling 20 

Indian Neck, Conn 37 

Indian Springs, Ind 131 

Indianola, Tex 51, 150 

Indio, Cal 163 

Individualization of climatic pre- 
scriptions 20, 156 

Intermediate resorts 145 

Irondequoit, N. Y 70 

Island Beach, N. J 45 

Island Heights, N. J 45 

Islands, Climate of 13 

Isle of Pines, West Indies 109 

Isles of Shoals 28, 140, 165 

Islip, N. Y 40 

Ithaca, N. Y 66 

Jacksonville, Fla 148, 164 

Jalapa, Mex 171 

Jamaica, West Indies 107, 232 

Jamestown, N. Y 67 

Jan Mayen 178 

Jefferson, N. H 85 

Jordan's White Sulphur Springs, 

Va 130 

Jobobado, West Indies 109 

Juneau City, Alaska 56, 114 

Kahoolawe, Sandwich Islands, 117 

Kane, Pa 93 

Kara Sea 184 



2/7 



PAGE 

Kawai, Sandwich Islands ii8 

Kaula, Sandwich Islands ii8 

Keene, N. Y 141 

Keeseville, N. Y 89 

Kennebunkport, Me 28 

Kenoska, Wis 75 

Keokuk, Iowa 125 

Ketchum, Id. Ty 143 

Key East, N. J 44 

Key West, Fla 50, 149, 219 

Killarney, Ont 73 

Kingston, Jamaica 109, 148, 164 

Kingston, Ont 69, 120, 143 

Kingston, Pa 92 

Kingston, St. Vincent no 

Kiskiminetas Springs, Pa 93 

Kissimmee City, Fla 149 

Kootenai, Id. Ty 80 

Labrador, B. A 105, 223 

La Crosse, Wis 125 

Lafayette Well, Ind 131 

Lahaina, Sandwich Islands 119 

Lake Beach, N. Y 70 

Lake Bluff, N. Y 70 

Lake Bluffs, 111 75, 142 

Lake City, Fla 150 

Lake Forest, 111 75, 142 

Lakeland, Fla 149 

Lake Mills, Wis 78 

Lakeport, Cal 81 

Lakeside, N. Y 70, 142 

Lakeside, 72, 142 

Lake View, N. Y 70, 142 

Lakewood, N. J 146 

Lakewood, N. Y 67 

Lakes : 

Ampersand, N. Y 61 

Ausable, N. Y 61 

Avalanche, N. Y 61 

Bald Eagle, Minn 79 

Battle, Minn 79 

Beach's N. Y 61 

Benton, Minn 79 

Big Stone, Minn 79 



Lakes (Continued) : page 

Blue, Cal 81 

Blue Mountain, N. Y 61 

Bois Blanc, Minn 79 

Bradford, Fla 82, 149 

Budd's or Senecawana, N. J 62 

Calhoun, Minn 79 

Canandaigua, N. Y 67, 141 

Cayuga, N. Y 65, 141 

Cedar, Minn 79 

Champlain, N. Y 56, 141 

Chautauqua, N. Y 67, 141 

Cherry, Fla 82, 150 

Clitheral, Minn 79 

Cocohla, Id. Ty 143 

Coeur d'Alene, Id. Ty 79, 143 

Colden, N. Y 61, 88 

Como, Minn 79 

Conesus, N. Y 67 

Detroit, Minn 79 

Devil's, Dak. Ty 80 

Devil's, Wis 78 

Dexter's, Fla , 82 

Donner, Cal 81, 99 

Dunmore, Vt 59 

Echo, N. H 86 

Eckford, N. Y 61 

Elkhart, Wis 78 

Erie 71, 119, 142 

Flathead, Mon. Ty....^ 80 

Forked, N. Y 61 

Fulton, N. Y 61, 88 

Francis, Fla 82, 150 

Geneva, Wis 79 

George, Fla 82 

George, N. Y 60, 141 

George, Wis 77 

Gogebic, Mich 77 

Great Salt, U. Ty 82 

Green, Wis 78 

Greenwood, N. Y 62 

Hamilton, Fla 82 

Hancock, Fla 82 

Harney, Fla 82 

Harvey's, Pa 92 

Harriet, Minn. 79 



278 



Lakes (Continued) ; page 

Hemlock, N. Y 67 

Henderson, N. Y 61 

Honeoye, N. Y 67 

Hopatcong, N. J 62 

Huron 73, 119, 142 

Independence, Cal 81 

Jackson, Fla 82, 149 

Jessup, Fla 82 

Kegonsa, Wis 78 

Keuka, or Crooked, N. Y 67, 141 

Kissimmee, Fla 82 

Lafayette, Fla 82, 149 

Leech, Minn 79 

Long, Me 58 

Long, N. Y 61,88 

Luzerne, N. Y 61 

Maitland, Fla 82 

Mary, Fla 82, 150 

Medical, W. Ty 79, 144 

Memphremagog, Vt 59 

Mendota, Wis 78 

Miccosukie, Fla 82 

Michigan 74, 119, 142 

Mille Lacs, Minn 79 

Minnetonka, Minn 79 

Minnewaska, Minn 79 

Minnewaska, N. Y 63, 124 

Mohensick, N. Y 61 

Mohonk, N. Y 62, 124 

Mohopac, N. Y 61 

Monona, Wis 78 

Monroe, Fla 82 

Moosehead, Me 57, 140 

Muskoka, Ont 138 

Newcomb, N. Y 61 

Of Theresa, N. Y 69 

Of the Thousand Islands 68 

Of the United States 57 

Of the Woods, Minn 79 

Oneida, N. Y 64, 141 

Onondago, N. Y 65 

Ontario 69, 119, 142 

Otisco, N. Y 65 

Otsego, N. Y 63 

Owasco, N. Y 65 



Lakes (Continued) : page 

Paradox, N. Y 61, 88 

Parker, Fla 82 

Pelican, Wis 77 

Pend d'Oreille, Id. Ty 80, 143 

Perkins, N. Y 61 

Pike, Wis 77 

Piseco, N. Y 61 

Placid, N. Y 88 

Pleasant, N. Y 61 

Pontchartrain, La 82 

Rachel, Fla 82, 150 

Rainbow, N. Y 61 

Rainy, Minn 79 

Rangeley or Androscoggin, Me. 

58, 140 

Raquette, N. Y 61, 88 

Red, Minn 79 

Red Cedar, Wis 77 

Rock, Wis 78 

Ronkonkoma, N. Y 61 

Round, N. Y 61 

Salt, Fla 82 

Sandy, Minn 79 

Sanford, N. Y 61, 88 

Saranac, N. Y 61, 88 

Sauk, Minn 79 

Schroon, N. Y 61, 88 

Schuyler's, N. Y 63 

Sebago, Me 58 

Seneca, N. Y 66, 141 

Skaneateles, N. Y 65 

Squam, N. H 59 

St. Germaine, Wis 77 

St. Regis, N. Y 61 

Superior 75, 119, 142 

Swan, Minn 79 

Tahoe, Cal 81, 99 

Thompson, Wis 77 

Titicaca, S. A 173 

Tupper, N. Y 61, 88 

Twin, Wis 77 

Vermilion, Minn 79 

Wamckin, Minn 79 

Waubesa, Wis 78 

Webber, Cal 81 



279 



Lakes (Continued) : page 

White Bear, Minn 79 

Willoughby, Vt 59 

Wingia, Wis 78 

Winnibigoshish, Minn 79 

Winnebago, Wis 78 

Winnepesaukee, N. H 59, 140 

Winnipeg, B. A 139 

L'Anse, Wis 76 

Lansing, Iowa 125 

Laredo, Tex 172 

Las Animas, Col 151 

Las Vegas, N. M 98, 143, 162 

Las Vegas Hot Springs, N. M..98, 133 

Lauai, Sandwich Islands 118 

Lavellette, N. J 44 

Lebanon Springs, N. Y 133, 142 

Lehigh Gap, Pa 90 

Lehua, Sandwich Islands 118 

Length of day. Influence upon 

climate ..13 

Lenox, Mass 87, 140 

Leslie Well, Mich 132 

Lesser Antilles 107, no, 231 

Lexington, N. Y 90 

Ligonier, Pa 93 

Little Abaco, Bahamas 107 

Little Inagua, Bahamas 107 

Lodi Artesian Well, Ind 131 

Long Beach, Cal 153 

Long Beach, N. Y 41 

Long Branch, N. J 43, 141 

Long Island, Bahamas 106, 107 

Long Island, N. Y 37 

Longport, N. J 45 

Los Angeles, Cal 153, 163 

Louisiana, Mo 125 

Louisville Artesian Well, Ky 131 

Lowell Island 31 

Lower Blue Lick Springs, Ky 131 

Lowville, N. Y 89 

Lynn, Mass 32 

MacGregor, Iowa 125 

Macinaw City, Mich 74 

Macinac Island, Mich 73, 142 



PAGE 

Madison, Fla 82, 149 

Madison, Wis 77 

Magnolia, Mass 30 

Malarial dyscrasia 169 

Mai de montagne 83 

Maloja, Switz 161 

Malone, N. Y 89 

Malpeque, Can 104 

Manahawkin, N. J 45 

Manasquan, N. J 44 

Manchester, Mass 31, 165 

Manchester, N. J 45 

Manhattan Beach, N. Y 41 

Manistee, Mich 75 

Manitoba, B. A 139 

Manitou Springs, Col 97, 143, 162 

Manitowoc, Wis 75, 142 

Mantoloking, N.J 44 

Marblehead, Mass 31, 140 

Marblehead Neck, Mass 31 

Margarita, West Indies 107 

Marietta, Ga 95 

Marinette, Wis 75, 142 

Marquette, Mich 76, 120, 142 

Martha's Vmeyard, Mass... 34, 140, 165 

Martinique, West Indies 107, no 

Marshfield, Mass 33 

Massena Springs, N. Y 131, 142 

Matanzas, Cuba 108 

Mauch Chunk, Pa 91, 141 

Maui, Sandwich Islands 117 

Mayville, N. Y 68 

Meadford, Ont 73 

Memphis, Tenn 125 

Menasha, Wis 78 

Menominee, Wis 75, 142 

Mental conditions, Effects of, on 

health 22 

Meteorology, Definition of 11 

Metlah Kathla, B. C 56, 116 

Mexican Point, N. Y 70 

Mexico 105, 170, 227 

Mexico, Climate of. 14 

Michigan City, Mich 75 

Michigan Congress Spring 130 



28o 



PAGE 

Micro-organisms of the air ii, i6 

Middlebury, Vt 59 

Middle latitudes of North Amer- 
ica, Climate of. 195 

Middle Park Hot Springs, Col 133 

Midland, Ont 73 

Milford, Conn 37 

Milwaukee, Wis 75, 120, 214 

Mineral springs 127 

Mineral springs, Classification of.. ..129 

Minneapolis, Minn 79, 125, 146, 164 

Minnehaha Falls, Minn 79 

Minnequa Springs, Pa 131 

Minnesota, Winter resorts of.... 145, 164 

Minnewaukan, Dak. Ty 80 

Miquel's experiments regarding 

micro-organisms 16 

Mississippi River 125, 220 

Mississippi Valley, Climate of.. .15, 205 

Mobile, Ala 50, 105, 150 

Modifying influence of climate 13 

Moira, N. Y 89 

Moisture of the atmosphere 11 

Molokai. Sandwhich Islands 118 

Molokini, Sandwich Islands 117 

Monmouth Beach N.J 42 

Monona Lake Assembly Grounds. ..78 

Montauk Point, N. Y 39 

Montecito Hot Sulphur Springs, 

Cal 153 

Montery, Cal 53, 144 

Monterey, Mex 172 

Monticello, Fla 82, 150 

Montpelier, Vt 140 

Montreal, Que 121 

Montvale Springs, Tenn 132 

Monument Park, Col 97 

Moriches, N. Y 40 

Mountain Lake Park, Md 93 

Mount Desert Island, Me.. .25, 140, 165 

Mount Holly Springs, Pa 92 

Mount Katahdin, Me 58 

Mount Kineo, Me 58 

Mount Pleasant, S. C 48 

Mount Washington, N. H 85, 212 



PAGE 

Muscatine, Iowa 125 

Muskegon, Mich 75 

Muskoka District, Ont 138 

Muskoka Wharf, Ont 138 

Natchez, Miss 125 

Nahant, Miss 32 

Napoleon, Ark 125 

Nantasket, Mass 32 

Nantucket, Mass 30, 140, 165 

Narragansett Pier, R. 1 35, 140 165 

Nassau, Bahamas 108, 148, 164 

Natural parks, Col 96, 143 

Nauvoo, 111 125 

Neenah, Wis 78 

Neurasthenia 167 

New Britain, Fla 50, 149 

New Brunswick, B. A loi 

Newburg, N. Y 124 

Newburyport, Mass 30 

New Castle, N. H 28, 140 

New England 139, 164 

Newfoundland, B. A 104 

New Haven, Conn 37 

New London, Conn 36 

New Madrid, Mo ...125 

New Mission, Mich 74 

New Orleans, La 82, 125, 218 

New Paltz Landing, N. Y 124 

Newport News, Va 48, 141, 148 

Newport, R. 1 34, 140, 165 

Newport, Vt 59 

New Providence, Bahamas 107 

Newshoreham, R. 1 36 

New Smyrna, Fla 50 

Niagara Falls 70, 142 

Niihau, Sandwich Islands 118 

North Adams, Mass 87, 140 

North America, Climate of. 14 

North American Archipelago 188 

North Conway, N. H.... 85, 140 

Northport, Mich .....74 

Northwest 143 

Norwalk, Conn 37 

Norway i77 

Norwood, Mich 74 



28l 



PAGE 

Norwood, N. Y 89 

Nova Scotia, B. A 103 

Nova Zembla 177 

Noyes' Beach, R. 1 35 

Nueva Gerona, West Indies 109 

Nursing 20 

Nyack, N. Y 124 

Oahu, Sandwich Islands 118 

Oak Bluffs, Mass 34 

Oakland, Cal 54 

Oakland, Md 93 

Oak Orchard Acid Springs, N. Y...132 

Ocean Beach, N. J 43 

Ocean City, Md 47 

Ocean City, N. J 45 

Ocean Grove, N.J 43 

Ocean Springs, Miss 132 

Ocean View, Mass 30 

Ogdensburg, N. Y 121 

Ogunquit Beach, Me 28 

Ohio River 125 

Olcott, N. Y 70, 142 

Old Orchard Beach, Me 27, 140, 165 

Old Mission, Mich 74 

Old Munising, Mich 75 

Old Point Comfort, Va..47, 105, 141, 148 

Olympia, W. Ty 55, 144 

Ontario Beach, N. Y 70, 142 

Ontonagon, Mich 76, 120 

Orinoco River, S. A 235 

Orizaba, Mex 172 

Orkney Springs, Va 129 

Orlando, Fla 149 

Oshkosh, Wis 78 

Oswego, NY 70 

Ottawa River 122 

Out-door exercise 155 

Oyster Bay, N. Y 38 

Ozone of the air 11 

Pablo Beach, Fla 49, 148 

Pacific coast, Climate of 15, 197 

Pacific Grove, Cal 53, 144 

Pacific Highlands, Climate of.. .15, 202 

Pagosa Springs, Col 162 

Palatka, Fla 149 



PAGE 

Palenville, N. Y 89, 141 

Paraguay, S. A 245 

Parkside, Pa 91 

Paroquet Spnngs, Ky 131 

Parry Sound, Ont 73, 142 

Pasadena, Cal 153 

Paso Robles Hot Springs, Cal 134 

Patchogue, N. Y 40 

Pecuniary circumstances of the 

invalid 21 

Peekskill, N. Y 124 

Pembina, Minn 216 

Penetang, Ont 73 

Penn Yan, N.Y 67 

Pensacola, Fla 50, 149 

Percentage of atmospheric humidity.ii 

Perry Warm Springs, Pa 92 

Peru, S. A 240 

Petoskey, Mich 74, 142 

Philips' Beach, Mass 32 

Phoenicia, N. Y 90, 141 

Pictou, N. S 103, 122, 138 

Pictured Rocks, Mich 75 

Piedmont Country 94 

Pigeon Cove, Mass 30 

Pike's Peak, Col 97, 205 

Pine Hill, N. Y 90 

Pine Point, Me 27 

Pittsburgh, Pa 126 

Pittsfield, Mass 87, 140 

Piaquemine, La 125 

Plattsburg, N. Y 60, 89 

Plum Island 30 

Pocono Summit, Pa 91 

Point Lookout, N. Y 41 

Point of Pines, Mass 32 

Point Pleasant, N. J 44 

Polar currents, Influence of 14 

Port Arthur, Ont 77 

Port Carling, Ont 139 

Port Haven, N. Y 70 

Port Hope, Ont 120 

Port Hudson, La 125 

Port Huron, Mich 120 

Port Jefferson, N. Y 38 



282 



PAGE 

Port Kent, N. Y 60, 89 

Port Lyden, N. Y 89 

Port of Spain, West Indies iii 

Port Ontario, N. Y 70 

Port Orange, Fla 50, 149 

Port Rosseau, Ont 139 

Port Townsend, W.Ty 55, 144 

Portage Lake, Mich 120 

Portland, Me 26, 122 

Portland, Ore 54, 126, 144 

Porto Rico, West Indies... 107, 109, 232 

Portsmouth, N. H 28 

Potsdam, N. Y 89 

Poughkeepsie. N. Y 123 

Prarie du Chien, Wis 125 

Prattsville, N. Y 89 

Precautions in the use of mineral 

waters 134 

Prescott, Ont 121 

Prescott, Wis 125 

Pressure of the atmosphere 12 

Prevailing winds. Influence upon 

climate of 14 

Preventive medicine 17, 156 

Prince Edward's Island 104 

Prospect, N. Y 89 

Provincetown, Mass 33 

Puebla, Mex 172 

Pueblo, Col 97, 151, 162 

Puerto Principe, Cuba 109 

Puget Sound 54, 144 

Pulmonary phthisis 158 

Put-in-Bay Islands 72, 142 

Quebec, Que 121, 122 

Quer^taro, Mex 172 

Quincy, Fla 150 

Quincy, 111 125 

Quito, S. A 173 

Quogue, N. Y 39 

Racine, Wis 75 

Rainfall, Causes of. 12 

Rainy Season of the Pacific 

slope 15, 200 

Rawley Springs, Va 131 

Reading, Pa 92 



PAGE 

Red River, La 125 

Red River of the North 139 

Red Rock, Ont 120 

Red Sulphur Springs, W. Va 131 

Redwing, Minn 125, 146 

" Reef of Norman's Woe." 30 

Rehoboth Beach, Del 46 

Relative humidity of the air 11 

Remsen, N. Y 89 

Rest 20 

Revere Beach, Mass 32 

Rheumatism 168 

Richfield Springs, N. Y 131, 142 

Rio Negro, S. A 235 

Riverside, Cal 154 

Rochester, N. Y 67, 70, 215 

Rockaway Beach, N. Y 41 

Rockbridge Alum Springs, Va 132 

Rockbridge Baths, Va X29 

Rock Island, 111 125 

Rock Ledge, Fla 50 

Rockport, Mass 30 

Rocky Mountains 95, 142, 162, 167, 

195, 205. 

Rocky Point, R. 1 35 

Roseau, West Indies no 

Rothesay, N. B 102 

Round Island Park, N. Y 68 

Rum Bay, Bahamas 107 

Rustico, Can 104 

Rutland, Vt 87, 140 

Rye Beach, N. H 29, 140, 165 

Sackett's Harbor, N. Y 69, 142, 215 

Saco Pool, Me 27 

Sag Harbor, N. Y 39 

Saguenay River 122 

Salem, Mass 31 

Saline mineral waters 130, 166 

Salisbury Beach, Mass 29 

Salt Lake City, U. Ty 82 

Salt Lake Hot Springs, U. Ty 133 

Salton, Cal 163 

Salt Sulphur Springs, W. Va 131 

Sand Beach, Mich 73 

Sand Point, Id. Ty 80 



283 



Sand Springs, Mass 87 

Sandusky, 72, 120 

Sandwich Islands 117, 164 

Sandy soil 12 

Sanford, Fla 149 

Sanitary surroundings 20 

San Antonio, Tex 150, 217 

San Bernardino, Cal 153, 163 

San Buenaventura, Cal 153 

San Diego, Cal. ..50, 144, 154, 163, 198 

San Domingo, West Indies 107 

San Felipe Sink Valley, Cal 163 

San Francisco, Cal 54 

San Juan de Porto Rico 109 

San Luis Obispo, Cal 53, 163 

San Rafael, Cal 54, 144 

San Salvador, Bahamas 107 

Santa Barbara, Cal 52,144, 152, 163 

Santa Barbara Hot Springs, Cal 134 

Santa Cruz, Cal 53, 144 

Santa Cruz, West Indies no 

Santa F6, N. M 97, 143, 151, 162 

Santa F^, West Indies 109 

Santa Monica, Cal 53, 144, 153 

Santa Rosalia, Mex 173 

Santiago de Cuba 109 

Saranac, N. Y 141 

Saratoga Springs, N. Y 89, 130, 141 

Sault Ste. Marie, Mich 75, 120 

Savannah, Ga 48, 148 

Saybrook, Conn 36 

Sayville, N. Y 40 

Scarborough Beach, Me 27 

Schooley Mountain Springs, N. J...132 

Scituate, Mass 33 

Scrofulous affections 169 

Sea-air, Composition of. 24 

Sea-air, Effect of upon the organisnuoo 

Sea Breeze, N. Y 70 

Sea Bright, N. J 42 

Sea Cliff, N. Y 38 

Sea Girt, N. J 44 

Sea Haven, N. J 45 

Sea Isle City, N.J 46 

Sea-shore 24 



PAGE 

Sea-Side Park, N. J 45 

Seal Islands 117 

Seattle, W. Ty 55, 144 

Seneca Point, N. Y 67 

Shandaken, N. Y 90 

Sharon Springs, N. Y 131, 132, 142 

Shawangunk Mountains, N. Y 62 

Sheboygan, Wis 75, 142 

Sheldon Springs, Vt 129 

Sheldrake, N. Y 66 

Shelter Island, N. Y 39 

Shoalwater Bay, W. Ty 54 

Siasconset, Mass 34 

Siberia 185 

Sidney, N. S 104,138 

Sierra Nevada Mountains 98 

Silver Cascade Falls, Minn 79 

Sing Sing, N. Y 124 

Sitka, Alaska 56, 116, 139 

Skaneateles, N. Y 65 

Soda Springs, Id. Ty 143 

Sodus Point, N. Y 70 

Soil, Varieties of. 12 

Sorel, Que 121 

Souris Can 104 

South America 173 

South America, Climate of. 14, 232 

Southhampton, N. Y 39 

South Beach, N. Y , 40 

Southern California 151, 163, 167 

Southern California, Climate of, 151, 200 

Southern Pines, N. C 147 

South Georgia Island 249 

South Haven, Mich 75 

South Oyster Bay, N. Y 41 

Southport, Conn 37 

South West Harbor, Me 26 

Spitzbergen 177 

Spokane, W. Ty 8i« 

Spokane Falls, W. Ty 81, 144 

Spragueville, Pa 91 

Spring Lake, N.J 44, 141 

Spring Lake Well, Mich 130 

Stamford, Conn 37 

Stamford, N. Y 90 



284 



PAGE 

Star Island 28 

St. Anne, Que ...122 

St. Andrews, N. B 102 

St. Augustine, Fla 49. 148, 164 

St. Clair, Mich 72, 142 

St. George, Bermudas 106 

St. Ignace, Mich 74 

St. John, N. B 102, 138 

St. Johns, N. F 104, 122, 138 

St. Kitts, West Indies 107 

St. Lawrence River 120 

St. Louis, Mo 125 

St. Louis Spring, Mich 130 

St. Lucia, West Indies 107 

St. Moritz, Switz 161 

St. Paul, Minn 79, 125, 145, 164, 220 

St. Pierre, West Indies no 

St. Thomas, West Indies no 

St. Vincent, West Indies 107, no 

Stockbridge, Mass 87, 140 

Stonington, Conn 36 

Stowe, Vt 86, 140 

Stratford, Conn 37 

Stroudsburg, Pa 91 

Sullivan's Island, S. C 48 

Sulphated mineral waters 132 

Sulphur mineral waters 130, 166 

Summer resorts. Desirable fea- 
tures of. 136 

Summerside, Can 104 

Summerville, S. C 147 

Summit, Cal 98 

Sunshine 161 

Superior, Wis 77, 119, 142, 214 

Swampscott, Mass 32, 140, 165 

Sweet Chalybeate Springs, Va 132 

Sweet Springs, W. Va 132 

Sylvan Beach, N. Y 64 

Syracuse, N. Y 65 

Tacoma, W. Ty 55, 144 

Tahoe City, Cal 99 

Tallahassee, Fla 82, 149 

Tampa, Fla 50, 82, 149 

Tannersville, N. Y 89 

Tarrytown, N. Y .....124 



PAGE 

Temperament of the invalid 20 

Texas, Climate of 150, 211, 217 

The Geysers, Cal 134 

Thermal springs 133, 168 

Thermal Sulphur Springs, Alaska.. 131 

Thomasville, Ga 148, 164 

Thousand Island Park, N. Y 69 

Thousand Islands 68, 121, 142 

Three Rivers, Que .".122 

Tierra del Fuego 249 

Tignish, Can , 104 

Titusville, Fla 50, 149 

Tobyhanna, Pa 91 

Tom's River, N. J 45 

Ton-ya-wa-tha, Wis 78 

Toronto, Ont 69, 120, 142 

Tortuga, West Indies 107 

Traverse City, Mich 74, 142 

Trenton Falls, N. Y 64, 89 

Trinidad, Col 151 

Trinidad, West Indies 107 

Tropical America, Climate of 227 

Troy, N. Y 123 

Truckee, Col 81, 98 

Tuckerton, N. J 45 

Turk's Island, Bahamas 108 

Two Rivers, Wis 75 

Upper Blue Lick Springs, Ky 131 

Utah Hot Springs, U. Ty 143 

Vancouver, B. C 56 

Vegetation, Influence of, upon 

climate 14 

Venezuela, S. A 234 

Vera Cruz, Mex 171, 230 

Vicksburg, Miss 125 

Victoria, B. C 55, 13S 

Virginia Beach, Va 48 

Waimea, Sandwich Islands 119 

Waldo, Fla 150 

Wallkill Valley, N. Y 62 

Wallula,W. Ty 126 

Warm Springs, Ga 133 

Warm Springs, N. C 133 

Warm Springs, Va 133 

Washburn, Wis 120 



285 



PAGE 

\Yatch Hill Point, R. 1 35 

Waterbury.Vt 86 

Water Island Beach, N. Y 40 

Waterloo, N. Y 66 

Watkins, N. Y 66 

Watkin's Glen, N. Y 66 

Watling Island, Bahamas 107 

Waukegan, 111 75, 142 

Waukesha, Wis 78 

Welaka, Fla 149 

Welden Springs, Vt 129 

Well's Beach, Me 28 

We-que-ton-sing, Mich 74 

Wernersville, Pa 92 

West Baden Springs, Ind 131 

West End, N. J 43 

West Indies 14,106, 164, 227 

West Kill, N. Y 90 

Westminster Park, N. Y 69 

West Point, N. Y 124 

Westport, Conn 37 

Westport, N. Y 89 

Whatcom, W. Ty 55, 144 

Wheeling, W. Va 126 

White Fish Point, Mich 75 

Whitehall, N. Y 60 

White Island 29 



PAGE 

White Mountains 84, 140, 162, 167 

White River, Ark 125 

White Sulphur Springs, Va 130 

Wiesen, Switz 161 

Wilkes-Barre, Pa 92 

Willemsted, West Indies 11 1 

Williamstown, Mass 87, 140 

Windham, N. Y 89 

Winnipeg, Manitoba 220 

Winona, Minn 125, 146 

Winsor Beach, N. Y 70 

Winter Park, Fla 149 

Winter resorts 145 

Woodstock, N.Y 90 

Woodville, N. Y 67 

Yarmouth, Mass 33 

Yarmouth, N. S 103 

Yellow Springs, O 132 

Yellow Sulphur Springs, Va 130 

Yellowstone National Park, Wy. 

Ty 98, 133, 143 

Yonkers, N. Y 124 

York Beach, Me 28, 140 

York Sulphur Springs, Pa 131 

Young's Point, La 125 

Yosemite Valley, Cal 99 

Zacatecas, Mex 172 



■J[« 



^ ''^-U 















V^S-^' 



/ ^^- 



r^4^ 






Y^' 



\ - ^^--U:^'^; 





/ \ 



', ) ' 



]^~^^! \ 



1 I H I V 

Railroad, Si. 



ica. 



CANADA ^ND MEXICO 



i\' 



) / 



KIP DF *TIIUIT C COtST SimS INCRWID ON INIIRriD SCIIE 



-V 1 I V 



'K^if^^ "^: 



\ . / 



^^ L F O r "" M M JH: I C (J 



hvmn 





^9-' 

%: 









'^• 






4-' 



r' 



